The Myth of Racist Kids - Launch Satellite

Monday 30 November, 10.45am until 12.30pm, Civitas

The Manifesto Club will launch a new publication, The Myth of Racist Kids, at a lunchtime discussion at Civitas, 77 Great Peter Street, London SW1P 2EZ. The publication looks at anti-racist policies and the growing regulation of school life.

The Race Relations (Amendment) Act 2000 led to a requirement on schools to report ‘racist incidents’ to local education authorities, which has resulted in the reporting of an estimated 250,000 incidents. Many of these ‘racist incidents’ involved very young children, and included cases of name-calling in the playground and arguments between friends. A growing ‘race relations industry’ has moved into the daily life of schools and even nurseries, with the aim of combating prejudice in children as young as three. This book argues that these policies bring officials into the playground: they have meant a growing regulation of children’s peer relationships, and the undermining of teachers’ ability to deal with classroom incidents. Worse, the growing myth of racist kids can actually create ethnic tensions, stifling the trend towards increasing openness and intermixing.

This is an INVITATION ONLY event. However, if you are interested in attending, contact the Manifesto Club: .(JavaScript must be enabled to view this email address)

Speakers
Adrian Hart
author, That's Racist! How the regulation of speech and thought divides us all and Leave those kids alone – How official hate speech regulation interferes in school life

Chair:


Produced by
Josie Appleton director, civil liberties group, Manifesto Club; author, Officious: Rise of the Busybody State
Session partners



Battle of Ideas 2009 | session: We are – or were – the people: Germany 20 years after the Wall came down
We are – or were – the people: Germany 20 years after the Wall came down

Saturday 28 November, 4.00pm until 6.00pm, MMK Museum für Moderne Kunst, Frankfurt

Venue: MMK Museum für Moderne Kunst, Domstraße 10, D-60311, Frankfurt

Tickets: NB. This event is invitation ONLY. Please email info@novo-argumente.com.


With the fall of the Berlin Wall in November 1989, hope, courage and the sheer conviction that things could not carry on as they were triumphed over the repressive GDR state machine and ended the partition of Germany. With tremendous tenacity, people in Leipzig, Dresden, Berlin and then in virtually every town of Eastern Germany rose up and transformed Europe, helping to end the Cold War, with repercussions for the whole world. But did 1989 represent the resurgence of democracy that everyone hoped for?

Twenty years on, those events seem a distant memory. A kind of ‘unity blues’ appears to have taken hold of Germany. There is talk of a new ‘mental wall’ between people in the west and the east, where the economy remains fragile, with high unemployment and massive emigration alongside a few promising pockets of growth. At Frankfurt’s Museum of Modern Art (MMK), NovoArgumente is hosting a discussion about the legacy of 1989, about the causes of and possible answers to the current impasse in the unified Germany and beyond.

The event will be attended by Alex Hochuli, a guest representative from the Battle of Ideas Organising Committee.

Speakers
Axel Brüggemann
writer and journalist; media consultant, (www.myoperatext.com); author, Wir holen uns die Politik zurück [Bringing politics back home]

Stefan Dietrich
politics editor, Frankfurter Allgemeine Zeitung

Dr Rainer Land
founder, Thuenen-Institut for Regional Development; former chief editor, Berliner Debatte Initial

Sabine Reul
translator, Textbüro Reul GmbH

Chair:
Thomas Deichmann
editor, NovoArgumente; author, Die Steinzeit steckt uns in den Knochen: gesundheit als erbe der evolution


Produced by
Sabine Reul translator, Textbüro Reul GmbH
Thomas Deichmann editor, NovoArgumente; author, Die Steinzeit steckt uns in den Knochen: gesundheit als erbe der evolution
Recommended readings
Germany's Election: Divided They Stand

In the run-up to the election, there has been no grand new mission, no ambitious vision of remaking Germany — or Europe, or the world — on view.

Catherine Mayer, Time, 21 September 2009

Session partners





Battle of Ideas 2009 | session: Who owns culture?
Who owns culture?

Tuesday 17 November, 5.30pm until 7.00pm, London School of Economics

Venue: Thai Theatre, London School of Economics, New Academic Building, 54 Lincoln’s Inn Fields, London, WC2A 3LJ

Tickets: £7.50 (£5 concessions) per person. Tickets are available from the Academy of Ideas website.


For the past two centuries, the West has acquired treasures of the ancient world to fill its museums, so that visitors to the British Museum in London for example can see historic artefacts from all over the world. In recent years, though, various countries and even ethnic communities within countries have begun to demand the return of artefacts. Several North American museums were recently rocked by claims from countries including Italy that objects in their collections had been acquired illicitly. In response they returned over a hundred objects. Meanwhile a former curator of antiquities from the prestigious Getty Museum is currently on trial for conspiracy to traffic in illicit antiquities. In response to this controversy, UNESCO has encouraged the development of policies and laws which state that artefacts excavated after 1970 belong to the nation states in which they were found.

Where do treasures from the past rightly belong, and why? Should they be housed in the country of origin where locals as well as visitors can see them in their historic context, or in an institution with objects from everywhere? Often it is not clear what it means to say something belongs to a particular country. The Parthenon Marbles pre-date by millennia the formation of the Greek state, for example, while terracotta Nok sculptures found in Nigeria have little to do with that country’s culture today. Some argue the policy of repatriating such objects, along with ‘nationalist retentionist’ policies, promote divisive identity politics over a universalist appreciation of objects of art as part of world history. But is this just a self-serving argument on the part of Western institutions who already have much of the best ‘stuff’ from world history? Some argue museums should return objects or at least consult with the relevant communities as a form of reparations for colonialism. But does this unhelpfully politicise museums in the here and now? Others argue contentious artefacts should be entrusted to an international nongovernmental agency. But who might sit on this suggested nongovernmental agency and what power should they have? So are things best left where they are, or returned whence they came in the interests of fairness?


Listen to the session audio…

 

Other formats are available here

Speakers
Dr James Cuno
president and Eloise W. Martin director, Art Institute; author, Whose Culture? The promise of museums and the debate over antiquity

Dr Maurice Davies
partner, the Museum Consultancy; senior research fellow, Department of Management, King's College London

Dr Tatiana Flessas
lecturer, cultural property and heritage law, LSE

Chair:
Dr Tiffany Jenkins
writer and broadcaster; author, Keeping Their Marbles: how treasures of the past ended up in museums and why they should stay there


Produced by
Dr Tiffany Jenkins writer and broadcaster; author, Keeping Their Marbles: how treasures of the past ended up in museums and why they should stay there
Recommended readings
A banana republic police HQ maybe, but not a home for the Elgin marbles

I am a restitutionist – but the new museum fails to clinch the case. It is not so much an argument as a punch in the face.

Simon Jenkins, Guardian Comment is free, 22 October 2009

Roman art thieves

Was art in ancient times always plundered art?

Mary Beard, Times Literary Supplement, 30 September 2009

How to preserve the future of museums

Whose Culture? - a collection of essays defending the vital importance of museums - is a welcome challenge to repatriation policies underpinned by identity politics.

Tiffany Jenkins, spiked, 29 May 2009

Museums into the Fray: The Marion True trial

Prosecutions of art dealers in U.S. and foreign courts for trading in antiquities are on the rise, but only one criminal case so far involves an American museum official.

Kate Fitz Gibbon, The Magazine Antiques, 26 March 2009

Whose Culture?: The Promise of Museums and the Debate over Antiquities

The international controversy over who "owns" antiquities has pitted museums against archaeologists and source countries where ancient artifacts are found.

James Cuno (ed.), Princeton University Press, 19 March 2009

‘Culture knows no political borders’

Tiffany Jenkins talks to James Cuno about looting, exporting and owning antiquities

Tiffany Jenkins, The Spectator, 17 July 2008

Is it time to start talking about the Parthenon marbles again?

For the first time two prominent staff members of the British Museum have participated in a major cultural event in Greece

Helena Smith, Guardian Art & Design blog, 21 March 2008

Picking over the Parthenon

The cooling of national passions reveals the real reason why the Elgin Marbles belong in Bloomsbury.

Josie Appleton, spiked, 13 January 2004

Session partners



Battle of Ideas 2009 | session: The Recession, Obama and the future – where do we go from here?
The Recession, Obama and the future – where do we go from here?

Monday 9 November, 5.00pm until 6.30pm, Barnes & Noble, Lincoln Triangle Branch, Broadway and 66th Street, New York

Venue: Barnes & Noble, Lincoln Triangle Branch, Broadway and 66th Street, New York

Tickets: This event is FREE but ticketed. Please contact .(JavaScript must be enabled to view this email address)


The run up to the US Presidential Elections last year seemed to buck the trend of entrenched cynicism and apathy that had come to characterise contemporary politics. Barack Obama’s rallies were often more like pop concerts or festivals, and many young people were mobilised to vote. Beyond broad generalities such as ‘hope’ and ‘change’, however, critics noted that specific political ideas and broader party principles seemed to be absent. Now we are in the midst of a severe recession: financial institutions and flagship businesses like GM are in crisis and jobs are being lost. So can President Obama deliver on his promise and deliver the change necessary for America to recover?

The global political climate has changed dramatically in recent years. The traditional debates between right and left, capitalism and communism – the interplay of which shaped the thinking of economic thinkers like Milton Friedman and John Maynard Keynes – lack salience today. So what ideological resources, if any, does Obama have to draw on? It often appears few politicians and commentators even understand what has happened and why – let alone how to resolve the problem. Many have sought to blame ‘greedy bankers’ or ‘greedy consumers’ and neglectful regulators – but is this a case of scapegoating rather than serious analyis? Western economies have become increasingly dependent on credit rather than production. So will attempting to kick-start these economies with a stimulus bill that is predicated on more credit creation get to the heart of the problem? Or do we need a more comprehensive, honest debate about the fundamentals of the economy, what is and isn’t working, and what has changed? Given all the failed experiments of the past, is there no alternative to how things are? Can citizens make a difference to these complex issues?


With thanks to our publishers, Random House and Palgrave Macmillan:



Speakers
Justin Fox
economics columnist, Time magazine; lead author, Curious Capitalist blog. Time.com; author, The Myth of the Rational Market

James Matthews
management consultant; founding member, NY Salon; writer on economics and business

Robert J Samuelson
columnist, Newsweek and Washington Post; author, The Great Inflation and Its Aftermath: the past and future of American affluence

Bruce Bartlett
economic historian; columnist, Forbes.com; author, The New American Economy: The Failure of Reaganomics and a New Way Forward.

Chair:
Alan Miller
chairman, Night Time Industries Association (NTIA)


Produced by
Alan Miller chairman, Night Time Industries Association (NTIA)
Session partners





Battle of Ideas 2009 | session: Campaigning documentaries: the thin line between passion and propaganda
Campaigning documentaries: the thin line between passion and propaganda

Friday 6 November, 1.45pm until 3.15pm, Sheffield

Venue: Sheffield Doc/Fest, Site Gallery, 1 Brown Street, Sheffield, S1 2BX

Tickets: Entry to this session and all other festival sessions requires a delegate pass. For further information go to: http://www.sheffdocfest.com


Many documentary makers are driven by a desire not only to document the world but to change it. So with the usual sources of funding drying up amid the recession, surely the opportunity to meet up with ‘social change film financiers’ is too good to miss? This is the idea behind radical new initiatives The Good Pitch, and Channel 4 Britdoc’s goodfilm.org. Campaigning NGOs and foundations as diverse as Greenpeace, Amnesty International, Friends of the Earth, the NSPCC, Save the Children, the Soil Association and the Joseph Rowntree Reform Trust are now active funders of new documentary.

But do these new funding models compromise editorial independence? Nick Fraser, editor of the BBC’s Storyville strand, has suggested there are ‘big dangers’ that NGOs could edge out impartial journalism with propaganda, however benign. NGOs may well be trusted by audiences, but shouldn’t documentary makers be as sceptical of these funders as they would be of any other multi-national corporations looking to promote their interests through film?

When filmmakers are encouraged to promise ‘associated outreach campaigns’ to maximise the impact of their film and its message on behalf of social action funders, what distinguishes documentary film-making from mere political advertising? When goodfilm.org suggests ‘best practice’ means working on social-purpose films in order: ‘To try and change law and influence policy; To question the status quo; To care more about the world around them’, should we be inspired, or suspicious about new forms of audience manipulation? No-one would deny NGOs the right to make films, or indeed that documentary can be a powerful tool for social change, but what are the pitfalls of these new instrumental social action funding partnerships and the new passion for campaigning on film?

Speakers
Ceri Dingle
director, WORLDwrite & WORLDbytes

Nick Fraser
commissioning editor, Storyville, BBC; series editor, Why Democracy?; executive producer, Why Poverty?; author, Why Documentaries Matter

Jess Search
chief executive, Channel 4 BRITDOC Foundation; co-founder, Shooting People

Kevin Toolis
director and co-founder, manyriversfilm; director, Emmy-nominated Cult of the Suicide Bomber

Chair:
Claire Fox
director, Academy of Ideas; panellist, BBC Radio 4's Moral Maze; author, I Find That Offensive


Produced by
Claire Fox director, Academy of Ideas; panellist, BBC Radio 4's Moral Maze; author, I Find That Offensive
Recommended readings
The Good Pitch

In 2009, we have partnered with the Sundance Institute Documentary Film Program to take the Good Pitch, our 'Dragon's Den' pitching forum for social-justice documentary films, on tour in North America and the UK.

Channel 4 BRITDOC Foundation, 2009

Ted Danson: Diners can save the oceans

Hollywood actor Ted Danson has called on London's restaurants and supermarkets to offer sustainable fish to customers.

Mark Prigg, London Evening Standard, 3 November 2009

Barry Levinson delves into celebs' politics

The director's documentary

Scott Collins, LA Times, 2 November 2009

Six degrees of Ed Norton

Being in the right place at the right time helped Barack Obama go from obscure state senator to president in less than five years. And it helped two newbie film directors get themselves positioned to chronicle his remarkable ascent -- resulting in a behind-the-scenes campaign documentary now getting a splashy launch from HBO.

The Reliable Source, Washington Post, 2 November 2009

Broome sparks international controversy over 'The Cove'

After premiering The Cove, Broome severs ties with its sister city, Taiji, sparking an international controversy that may end dolphin hunting in Japan.

Karl Burkart, Mother Nature Network, 1 September 2009

Supreme Court to Revisit ‘Hillary’ Documentary

The Supreme Court will cut short its summer break in early September to hear a new argument in a momentous case that could transform the way political campaigns are conducted.

Adam Liptak, New York Times, 30 August 2009

The fishy message of The End of the Line

Instead of guilt-tripping Western consumers about overfishing, we should invest our energy in developing aquaculture.

Rob Lyons, spiked, 9 June 2009

Stupid, feckless, greedy: that’s you, that is

spiked reports from the premiere of The Age of Stupid, a cretinous film that unwittingly exposes the elitism and dodgy science of the green lobby.

Brendan O'Neill, spiked, 16 March 2009

Extreme makeover: the changing face of documentary

As a lover of documentaries and films generally, I believe the answer to the question can films change the world is unequivocally ‘no’.

Alan Millar, Battles in Print, 27 October 2007

Spare us the Hollywood luvvies with a conscience

As The Times BFI London Film Festival kicks off this weekend, here’s some advice to the gathered movie stars: nice to see you, but please shut up.

Nathalie Rothschild, The Times, 17 October 2007

Dispatches

Documentaries: Charities should be leading the way

Paul Hoggart, Guardian, 2 July 2007

Black Gold

An articulate documentary causes Wendy Ide to think twice when ordering her morning caffeine hit.

Wendy Ide, The Times, 7 June 2007

Session partners



Battle of Ideas 2009 | session: Post-recession ideologies: what ideas will shape the world after the credit crunch?
Post-recession ideologies: what ideas will shape the world after the credit crunch?

Wednesday 4 November, 4.00pm until 6.00pm, St John's College, University of Oxford

Venue: St John’s College, University of Oxford, St Giles, Oxford, OX1 3JP

Tickets: FREE but to reserve a place e-mail .(JavaScript must be enabled to view this email address). Tickets are available from the Academy of Ideas website.

There will be a drinks reception hosted by PricewaterhouseCoopers LLP (PwC) following this event.


Many commentators have suggested today’s economic problems highlight a crisis in morality as much in the financial sector. It is argued that one of positive outcomes emanating from the shock-waves of the recession is that it opens up a space to assess society’s values. Of course, how we decide on future virtuous behaviour depends on our interpretation of past sins, on what and who we blame and for today’s difficulties.

The economic crisis is regularly presented as ‘payback time’ for human greed. The Labour-left Compass group notes approvingly that ‘In the current recession various corrections are taking place: blanket free-market approaches are being rejected, as are blanket individualistic and materialistic attitudes’. Green thinkers see the crisis as a timely reminder that we must curtail our economic activity and carbon-emitting lifestyles; maybe now we will finally accept the environmentalist mantra that less is more. Many argue for ‘Post-Crunch Corporate Ethics’ to rein-in risky ventures and penalise big business excesses. Some even argue the inevitable austerity on the horizon could encourage a return to shared values and bring a new social cohesion.

These cultural critiques of capitalism all agree we have over-reached ourselves, allowed economic growth to distort our priorities, and sacrificed the planet, and our own well-being on the altar of ‘filthy lucre’. But might we be learning the wrong lessons? If we demonise the aspiration to wealth as ‘greed’, how will society reward success and encourage the competitive spirit that so often drives social progress? What about innovation and experimentation? If every day, greedy bankers and capitalism-gone-mad are blamed for it all, while trust in politicians and the institutions of government is at historic lows too, who and what do we look to to change society for the better? Can we use the crisis as a spur to re-invent political and economic life?

The event will start by a short welcome introduction from Dr Chris Bickerton, lecturer, politics, University of Oxford; co-editor, Politics Without Sovereignty; blogger, Le Monde Diplomatique.

Watch the session video...

Speakers
Professor Frank Furedi
sociologist and social commentator; author, What's Happened to the University?, Power of Reading: from Socrates to Twitter, On Tolerance and Authority: a sociological history

Dr Maria Grasso
lecturer in politics and quantitative methods, Department of Politics, University of Sheffield; author: Generations, Political Participation and Social Change in Western Europe

Leo Johnson
partner, PwC Sustainability & Climate Change; host, BBC World's Down to Business

Marc Kidson
undergraduate, PPE, St. John's College; comment editor, Cherwell; former president, Oxford University European Affairs Society

Richard Reeves
director, Demos; political columnist, Prospect; author, John Stuart Mill: Victorian firebrand

Chair:
Claire Fox
director, Academy of Ideas; panellist, BBC Radio 4's Moral Maze; author, I Find That Offensive


Produced by
Claire Fox director, Academy of Ideas; panellist, BBC Radio 4's Moral Maze; author, I Find That Offensive
Dr James Panton head of politics, Magdalen College School, Oxford; associate lecturer in politics and philosophy, Open University; co-founder, Manifesto Club
Recommended readings
The Next Culture War

Centuries ago, historians came up with a classic theory to explain the rise and decline of nations. The theory was that great nations start out tough-minded and energetic. Toughness and energy lead to wealth and power. Wealth and power lead to affluence and luxury. Affluence and luxury lead to decadence, corruption and decline.

David Brooks, New York Times, 28 September 2009

Session partners



Battle of Ideas 2009 | session: 2009 End of Festival Party
2009 End of Festival Party

Sunday 1 November, 7.30pm until 11.30pm, Students' Union

Battle of Ideas 2009 End of Festival ‘WRAP’  Party

RCA Student Union Art Bar, Sunday 1 November 7.30pm – late
Carry on the debates informally over bargain price drinks in the festival’s activism and creativity zone, hosted by the RCA student Union

Speakers
Chair:


Produced by
Session partners





Battle of Ideas 2009 | session: Sporty kids and pushy parents
Sporty kids and pushy parents
How much encouragement is too much?

Sunday 1 November, 5.30pm until 6.30pm, Café

Children can benefit from the support of their parents when taking part in sport, just as in their school work or music lessons, but when does loving encouragement spill over into ‘pushy parents’ applying unfair pressure to succeed? Should children from a very young age be pushed to focus on being the swiftest, highest or strongest, or should children’s sport put healthy fun before competitive excellence? Even a success story like diver Tom Daley, who represented Britain at the Olympics last year at the age of 14, has been subject to intense pressure, and bullying about his fame, so is it worth it? Some schools have gone so far as to abandon competitive sports altogether, even scrapping sports days. Meanwhile, the government-backed Child Protection in Sport website warns parents of sporty kids that their approval is important to their children’s self-esteem and so, ‘You should not make negative, personalised comments or punish them in any way’. But is it the place of strangers to lecture parents on how to encourage their own kids? Is there a danger of demonising the kind of impassioned support and feedback that might spur children on to succeed at the sports they enjoy so much?

Commentators often argue it is selfish of parents to put children through hours of training to fulfil their ambition for their child to be a professional tennis player or an Olympic competitor, but top athletes generally think their achievements outweigh the loss of a ‘normal’ childhood. Few children can hope to reach the pinnacle of their sport, but isn’t a competitive spirit essential even to enjoying amateur sport? Is parental encouragement an essential antidote to the unambitious, ‘all must have prizes’ tenor of our times or do pushy parents take the joy out of sport for young people, turning it into a chore rather than a pleasure?

Speakers
Nicola Pearson
freelance journalist, mainly for The Times, Independent and Evening Standard

Dr Katherine Rake
CEO, Family and Parenting Institute

Sally Millard
co-founder, IoI Parents Forum

Dan Travis
director, Brighton Salon; tennis coach; author How to teach Young Children Tennis and In Defence of Competitive Sport.

Chair:
Geoff Kidder
director, membership and events, Academy of Ideas; convenor, IoI Book Club; IoI’s resident expert in all sporting matters


Produced by
Sally Millard co-founder, IoI Parents Forum
Recommended readings
Homecoming parade for diver Daley

Thousands of people have turned out in Plymouth to welcome home diver Tom Daley after he won a gold medal at the World Diving Championships in Rome

BBC News, 31 July 2009

Young tennis tantrums: you cannot be serious

If you used to think John McEnroe’s on-court tantrums were the pits, just wait until you meet today's tennis brats.

Nicola Pearson, The Times, 22 June 2009

Geoff Kidder’s Olympic blog - part five

Whilst many specialist sports schools, and independent schools provide excellent facilities and regular competitive sport, there are many others in which competition has been largely extinguished

Geoff Kidder, Culture Wars, 19 August 2008

The pushy parents and the precious child stars

Antonia Leslie wonders whether, under certain circumstances, Pushy Parent Syndrome can be considered a good thing

Antonia Leslie, Irish Independent, 29 June 2008

Pushy sporting parents: why can't he be more like me?

A father admits to forcing his son into games for which he was unsuited. He has reformed, but is it too late to prevent any damage to his son?

James Sutherland, The Times, 12 May 2008

Manifesto for Competitive Sport

A Manifesto for the reintroduction of competition in schools by a tennis coach

Dan Travis, Manifesto Club

Session partners



Battle of Ideas 2009 | session: Shopping: are we all ethical now?
Shopping: are we all ethical now?

Sunday 1 November, 5.30pm until 6.30pm, Lecture Theatre 1

Our shopping habits have acquired the status of world changing acts. The UK now spends nearly £40bn a year on ethical products. We are told that the tea, coffee, chocolate, clothes or Christmas presents we buy will shape the fate of the poor in the developing world. Closer to home, farmer’s markets, organic foods and reusable bags denote responsible shopping, concern for producers and the planet. The internet is awash with shopping sites for eco-chic and ethical goods and services. Every supermarket parades the provenance of its goods, TV shows reveal the hardships of workers in garment factories in the developing world, and commentators recommend we buy fewer cheap clothes and darn our socks to reduce waste.

The recession has brought with it a plethora of advisors, keen to tell us how to shop, save, cook, eat, and live frugally and responsibly. We may save a few pence or spend a few more but can we effect serious change through our shopping trolleys? Are ethical gifts of goats or hoes for the poor really effective, or symptomatic of low horizons and moral posturing? Should we be counting the air miles on goods we buy or celebrating the great diversity of global goods now within our reach? Is ethical consumption a principled step forward, a retreat from politics, or just better than nothing? Are we all ethical shoppers now?

Speakers
Ceri Dingle
director, WORLDwrite & WORLDbytes

Dan Rees
director, Ethical Trading Initiative; founder and chair, Temporary Labour Working Group

Pauline Tiffen
director, strategic planning, Light Years IP; founder, Cafedirect and The Divine Chocolate Company

Chair:
Saleha Ali
assistant producer, WORLDbytes; co-presenter, Sylvia Pankhurst: Everything is possible


Produced by
Patrick Hayes director, British Educational Suppliers Association (BESA)
Recommended readings
For American Consumers, a Responsibility Revolution

We have always known that heedless self-interest was bad morals,

Richard Stengel, Time, 10 September 2009

Customers call for Whole Foods boycott

'Whole Foods is expensive but people shop here because they identify with the social conscience of the company - now it turns out that ethos was just a marketing exercise.'

Claire Prentice, BBC News, 23 August 2009

The Real Value of Organic Food

The moment organic agriculture began to compete in the numbers game is the moment it began to lose its identity.

James McWilliams, The Atlantic, 18 August 2009

Do we want to shop or to be free? We'd better choose fast

We have become turbo consumers, sacrificing the environment and our own happiness, while losing control of society

Neal Lawson, Guardian, 2 August 2009

Waste not: recession leads to big drop in amount of rubbish we are throwing away

Households are consuming less and recycling more, according to the latest official figures

Rachel Shields, Independent, 10 May 2009

Prosperity for All: Consumer Activism in an Era of Globalization

Do we want more stuff and more prosperity for ourselves, or do we want others less fortunate to be able to enjoy the same opportunities and standard of living that we do? Prosperity for All makes clear that by abandoning a more idealistic vision for consumer society we reduce consumers to little more than shoppers, and we deny the vast majority of the world's population the fruits of affluence.

Matthew Hilton, Cornell University Press, 8 January 2009

Is it the end for the ethical market?

Dan Welch looks at some new evidence from market research which re-inforces our belief that the doom-sayers have got it wrong.

Dan Welch, Ethical Consumer, January 2009

This year’s must-have fashion: pity for Indians

Recent TV documentaries exposing that Primark’s clothes are made by Indian child labourers have been nauseatingly elitist.

Daniel Ben-Ami, spiked, 25 June 2008

Session partners



Battle of Ideas 2009 | session: Head to head debate: Is it the duty of schools to promote community cohesion?
Head to head debate: Is it the duty of schools to promote community cohesion?

Sunday 1 November, 5.30pm until 6.30pm, Henry Moore Gallery

Schools now have a legal duty to promote community cohesion. Education Secretary Ed Balls has called on schools to do more in shoring up a sense of unity in a post 7/7 world, arguing they should be key sites for promoting understanding between communities and combating intolerance and religious extremism. The curriculum is seen as the solution. From September 2009 a new strand known as ‘Britishness and Diversity’ is to be added to the remit of Citizenship teaching. Former head teacher Sir Keith Ajegbo, author of the report that inspired Citizenship education, believes teaching ‘core British values’ will help strengthen national identity. Pupils will be encouraged to think critically about issues of race, ethnicity and religion, whether through current affairs, or historical studies of the legacy of the British Empire, for example. Recognising that ‘many indigenous white pupils have negative perceptions of their own identity’, all pupils will be encouraged to explore their own identity through educational programmes such as ‘Who do we think we are?’

Critics reject this increased role for schools in fostering community and social cohesion, and exploring identity. They argue schools are in danger of seeing their primary role being redefined from one of transmission of knowledge to social engineering; they warn against the ‘corruption of the curriculum’. Professor Frank Furedi argues in his new book, Wasted: Why Education Isn’t Educating, that the curriculum has been overloaded with instrumental demands external to education. Academic disciplines are treated with indifference in an attempt to right social wrongs. The danger is that schools will not only be unable to solve what are in effect broader political and social problems, but that their traditional academic-based aims will be degraded in the process as knowledge-based subjects are hollowed out to make way more explicit and instrumental demands. Is it the job of schools to promote community cohesion or should such a task be outside of the remit of teaching?

Speakers
Sir Keith Ajegbo
education advisor, Department for Children, Schools and Families; chair, School Linking Network

Professor Frank Furedi
sociologist and social commentator; author, What's Happened to the University?, Power of Reading: from Socrates to Twitter, On Tolerance and Authority: a sociological history

Chair:
Kevin Rooney
politics teacher and head of social science, Queen's School, Bushey; co-author, Who's Afraid Of The Easter Rising?


Produced by
Claire Fox director, Academy of Ideas; panellist, BBC Radio 4's Moral Maze; author, I Find That Offensive
Recommended readings
Wasted: Why Education Isn't Educating

Education is praised for its potential contribution to economic development, as a central instrument for encouraging social inclusion and mobility. Increasingly, the promotion of education has little to do with learning as such.

Frank Furedi, Continuum, 30 September 2009

Guidance on the duty to promote community cohesion

The guidance explains how every school will make an important but different contribution to community cohesion, depending on a range of factors including the nature of the school's population and the location of the school.

Teachernet.gov.uk, 1 October 2008

Schools 'must teach Britishness'

Schools in England should teach 'core British values' alongside cultural diversity, a report says.

BBC News, 25 January 2007

Session partners



Battle of Ideas 2009 | session: Novel Pursuits: creative writing and the democratisation of literature?
Novel Pursuits: creative writing and the democratisation of literature?

Sunday 1 November, 5.30pm until 6.30pm, Student Union

‘Everyone has one novel in them’ so the saying goes. Only today the saying seems to have become a reality. Creative writing has taken off with a boom. The first creative writing course arrived in the UK in 1970 at the UEA, becoming a legendary breeding ground for novelists such as Ian McEwan and Kazuo Ishiguro under the tutelage of Malcolm Bradbury. Today there are over 200 postgraduate creative writing courses in the UK. But the creative writing explosion is not confined to the ivory towers of academia. From prisons to shopping malls, creative writing projects are anywhere and everywhere: from the Library of Unwritten Books, which encourages people ‘to spontaneously record their unrealised ideas, fictional tales, and personal histories’, to NaNoWriMo (National Novel Writing Month) that challenges wannabee writers to knock out a 175 pages in a month, declaring that ‘the ONLY thing that matters in NaNoWriMo is output. It’s all about quantity, not quality. The kamikaze approach forces you to lower your expectations, take risks, and write on the fly’. The message seems to be just pick up a pen and express yourself.  Anyone can and should write creatively.

But should everybody try and write? Do more people writing mean more people are engaged with literature? Or are we diluting and dumbing-down the value of great literature by pretending that anyone can be an author? Novelist Jenny Diski had her foreword to an anthology of student writing rejected this year because rather than simply praising the work, she advised young authors to work harder at editing and redrafting. Is it better to take the NaNoWriMo approach and stop being so precious about the great art of writing, taking more risks and allowing more people to write by banishing the ghost of Dostoevsky? What can creative writing courses teach us about the art of writing? Isn’t literary genius something which is innate and can’t be taught? Who decides what great literature is and who can and can’t write anyway?

Speakers
David Bowden
associate fellow, Academy of Ideas; culture writer

Jenny Diski
novelist, Apology for the Woman Writing; essayist; memoirist; author, The Sixties

Adam Foulds
novelist, The Quickening Maze; poet, The Broken Word

Chris Hamilton-Emery
director, Salt Publishing; poet, Radio Nostalgia; author, 101 Ways to Make Poems Sell

Chair:
Dr Shirley Dent
communications specialist (currently working with the British Veterinary Association media team); editor, tlfw.co.uk; author, Radical Blake


Produced by
Dr Shirley Dent communications specialist (currently working with the British Veterinary Association media team); editor, tlfw.co.uk; author, Radical Blake
Recommended readings
Author, author: Advice for young writers-to-be

There was a unique blip in the 1980s and 90s when even writers who weren't producing blockbusters for 'the market' could make a living.Today, most publishers and conglomerate booksellers are run by accountants, and writers are only as good as the profit they deliver.

Jenny Diski, Guardian Books blog, 20 June 2009

'Writing has warped me'

Success has come early to the intense poet-novelist Adam Foulds, thanks in part to a ferocious work ethic. He tells Olivia Laing what drives him

Olivia Laing, Observer, 10 May 2009

Can writing really be taught?

What we need to ask is not can it be taught, but how it can be taught, and can it be taught better? In other words, the questions we should be constantly asking, about the teaching of literature, or medicine, or law, or anything.

Éilís Ní Dhuibhne, Irish Times, 18 April 2009

Kureishi: writing courses are 'new mental hospitals'

'One of the things you notice is that when you switch on the television and a student has gone mad with a machine gun on a campus in America, it's always a writing student.'

Charlotte Higgins, Guardian, 27 May 2008

Interview: Jasper Gerard meets Susan Fletcher

A cry of “how sickening” must be going up in garrets. Infuriatingly for the old buffer huffers, it makes it difficult to harrumph about the good-for-nothing ladette culture in which young women are only good for snorting lines, not writing them.

Jasper Gerrard, The Sunday Times, 9 January 2005

Out with ye olde classics?

Will to Wonka, English is thriving but it isn't all rosy

Claire Sanders, Times Higher Education, 12 March 2004

Session partners



Battle of Ideas 2009 | session: America, Obama and the Recession
America, Obama and the Recession

Sunday 1 November, 5.30pm until 6.30pm, Upper Gulbenkian Gallery Keynote Controversies

President Barack Obama inherited an American economy in severe trouble. Immediately upon entering the White House, Obama introduced the most wide-reaching state-led counter-crisis measures since the New Deal of the 1930s. The Obama administration’s ‘New New Deal’ includes bank bailouts, the largest peacetime economic stimulus package, a ‘toxic asset’ plan, government takeover of General Motors and new financial regulations.

Obama has said that getting the economy back on its feet is his number one priority, and it’s likely that his handling of economic affairs will be a major factor in determining whether his presidency is considered a success. Many praised the new American president for taking bold action and showing dynamic leadership. Polls have showed that Obama’s personal popularity has remained high, but as the recession has dragged on and unemployment has continued to rise, a growing number have begun to question the effectiveness of his policies. Has Obama gone too far in increasing government spending, or not far enough? Are the resulting huge US government deficits a temporary phenomenon, or will they cause a fiscal crisis in the near future? Does his government’s ownership of car companies and banks provide just short-term restructuring assistance, or do such moves herald a greater direct role for the state in the economy?

This session will seek to cut through the superficial assessments about Obama’s popularity and examine to what extent his administration’s initiatives can not only address the immediate downturn, but lay a foundation for longer-term economic growth.


Listen to the session audio…

Other formats are available here

Speakers
James Matthews
management consultant; founding member, NY Salon; writer on economics and business

Professor Iwan Morgan
head of US Presidency Centre, Institute for the Study of the Americas, University of London; author, The Age of Deficits

Carl Mortished
world business editor, The Times

Chair:
Alan Miller
chairman, Night Time Industries Association (NTIA)


Produced by
Alan Miller chairman, Night Time Industries Association (NTIA)
Jean Smith specialist development consultant; co-founder and director, NY Salon
Recommended readings
The promised bland

Reform is badly needed, but people will still be greedy, banks will still need saving and a more stable system will entail less credit flowing through it. Mr Obama is eloquent but too often he does not tell it like it is.

Economist, 15 September 2009

We have averted second Depression, Obama claims

'History can not be allowed to repeat itself', Obama declares

Tim Reid, The Times, 14 September 2009

American public doesn't buy media's characterization of 'Obama recession'

Despite attempts by media figures to pin the blame for the current economic situation on President Obama, a recent ABC poll found that only a minority blame Obama for the recession.

Media Matters, 31 March 2009

America Is from Mars, Europe Is from Venus

As the global economic downturn worsens, the industrialized nations are at odds over how to fight the crisis. Obama wants the Europeans to introduce additional stimulus programs, but Merkel insists Germany is already doing enough.

Christian Reiermann, Michael Sauga and Thomas Schulz, Spiegel Online, 13 March 2009

It takes more than money to revive an economy

Why President Obama’s $787 billion recovery package won’t fire up the US economy — and might even make things worse in the long term.

Sean Collins, spiked, 18 February 2009

Session partners



Battle of Ideas 2009 | session: Is the NHS institutionally ageist?
Is the NHS institutionally ageist?

Sunday 1 November, 5.30pm until 6.30pm, Courtyard Gallery

By 2030 there will be a 50 percent increase in the proportion of the population over 65, and an 80 percent increase in those over 80. As we get better at treating conditions of childhood and mid-life, the main business of health and social care will increasingly be the care of older people, often frail or disabled and often with long term illnesses - care and support rather than cure. Even now, around 60% of bed days in NHS hospitals are in people over 65.

However, there is growing concern that the elderly are increasingly seen as a burden on the system and that cutting-edge medicine and top-quality care is reserved for younger patients. A Daily Mail article this year entitled ‘Why does the NHS hate the elderly so much?’ quoted a British Geriatrics Society survey that found seven out of ten specialists believe the elderly are less likely to receive proper diagnosis and essential treatment. The campaign to lower the age for cervical cancer screening received wide media coverage following Jade Goody’s death. Yet free breast cancer screening stops at 73 even though the likelihood of the disease increases with age. Mental health and old age is a black-hole: in 2007 the Inquiry into Mental Health and Well-Being in Later Life found that older people with mental health problems are often ignored and receive little support.

Have the values and priorities of society, NHS staff and organisations caught up with the reality of an ageing population? Or are we still obsessed with youth, and in collective denial about the realities of ageing? The new Equality Bill will explicitly outlaw age-based discrimination in healthcare for the first time, but in the face of an economic downturn and likely constraints on public spending, is this simply unrealistic? When resources are scarce, perhaps it is only fair that we prioritise the needs of younger people, and let nature take its course with those who have had a ‘fair innings’. Or should we stick to the principles that each patient must be valued the same as any other?

Listen to the session audio…

Other formats are available here

Speakers
Dr Michael Fitzpatrick
writer on medicine and politics; author, The Tyranny of Health

Professor Raanan Gillon
emeritus professor, medical ethics, Imperial College London; author, Philosophical Medical Ethics; senior editor, Principles of Health Care Ethics

Professor David Oliver
national clinical director for older people, Department of Health; consultant physician, Royal Berkshire Hospital; visiting professor, medicine for older people, City University, London

Adam Wishart
award-winning writer and documentary maker, The Price of Life and Monkeys, Rats and Me; author, One in Three: a son’s journey into the history and science of cancer

Chair:
Helen Birtwistle
history and politics teacher, South London school


Produced by
Helen Birtwistle history and politics teacher, South London school
Professor David Oliver national clinical director for older people, Department of Health; consultant physician, Royal Berkshire Hospital; visiting professor, medicine for older people, City University, London
Recommended readings
Why does the NHS hate the elderly so much?

Government NHS policy has placed the emphasis on vote-winning targets such as waiting times, rather than focusing on care

Harriet Sergeant, Daily Mail, 19 March 2009

NHS still ageist after all these years

Despite various promises to the contrary, age discrimination is alive and well in the NHS. Directors from two older people’s charities hope new legislation will change this

Gordon Lishman and Paul Cann, Health Service Journal, 19 February 2009

NHS Ageism: Case studies

Research published by the charity Help The Aged finds that many geriatricians think the NHS is institutionally ageist. Three women recount their experiences with the health service.

BBC News, 27 January 2009

The Imaginary Time Bomb: Why an Ageing Population Is Not a Social Problem

The modern world's growing preoccupation with ageing has little or nothing to do with demography but rather that it is used to justify further reductions in the role of government in the economy and the curbing of the welfare state

Phil Mullan, I B Tauris, 25 January 2002


Festival Buzz

"The Battle of Ideas goes from strength to strength. The intensity, variety and depth of debate, sustained for an entire weekend, makes for a unique experience charging the intellectual batteries for the rest of the year."
Raymond Tallis, emeritus professor of geriatric medicine, Manchester University

Battle of Ideas 2009 | session: Songs of Innocence and Experience: what should today's kids be reading?
Songs of Innocence and Experience: what should today's kids be reading?

Sunday 1 November, 3.45pm until 5.15pm, Lecture Theatre 2

Enter any bookshop today and much professed fears about children and reading dissipate. From Harry Potter to Alex Rider, new writing for children is everywhere. Many have called the 2000s a new ‘Golden Age of Children’s Literature’.

Yet contemporary children’s literature is not an imaginative free-for-all. There is pressure to be relevant to modern children’s lives and this often takes the form of an ethical, as well as imaginative, narrative. From the gritty realism of Melvin Burgess’ Junk to the socially aware alternative world of Malorie Blackman’s Noughts and Crosses, children’s fiction today often reflects a deeply flawed world. But are ethical concerns in children’s literature today the same as the moral fables of yesterday? Peter Hitchens called Philip Pullman ‘the most dangerous author in Britain’, claiming that Pullman was out to dethrone CS Lewis’ classic Narnia tales and supplant them with others that ‘proclaim the death of God to the young’.

But is Lewis’ 20th century view of Christian morality simply out-of-date for today’s kids, living in a de-facto secular and multicultural society? Are there some children’s books that are so out-of-kilter with today’s society and our moral values, they should be consigned to the dustbin of history? And shouldn’t fiction today help children to deal with current social issues and help them develop as responsible citizens? But does such socially concerned literature spell the death of escapism and imagination in children’s fiction? Isn’t it enough if a book simply entertains a child? And do classic children’s tales of the past have anything to offer our children imaginatively and morally?

Speakers
Anne Brogan
children's TV producer; co-director, Kindle Entertainment; former controller, Granada Kids

Anthony Horowitz
author and creator, Alex Rider and Power of Five novels; creator and screenwriter, Midsomer Murders, Foyle's War and Collision; journalist; critic

Chair:
Dr Shirley Dent
communications specialist (currently working with the British Veterinary Association media team); editor, tlfw.co.uk; author, Radical Blake


Produced by
Dr Shirley Dent communications specialist (currently working with the British Veterinary Association media team); editor, tlfw.co.uk; author, Radical Blake
Recommended readings
Maurice Sendak tells parents worried by Wild Things to 'go to hell'

Children's author gives short shrift to concerns that Where the Wild Things Are is too frightening for children

Alison Flood, Guardian, 20 October 2009

Get off of my tuffet, Muffet

I can't lament the demise of nursery rhymes when my three-year-old sings rock'n'roll classics instead.

John Harris, Guardian Comment is free, 15 October 2009

Why more children's books should feature disabled kids

Bullying of disabled people is merely seen as ‘antisocial’. But children’s literature can help to change that.

Tim Rushby-Smith, The Times, 30 September 2009

Are some children's classics unsuitable for kids?

When 'savages' and 'heathens' start appearing, reading the greats my daughter becomes very uncomfortable

Kavitha Rao, Guardian Books blog, 23 July 2009

Jodi Picoult and the Anxious Parent

Picoult’s message is at once cautionary and subverting. As much as her novels underscore the hazards of parental shortcomings, at a certain level they seem to exist to make a mockery of the cherished idea that we ought not to have any.

Ginia Bellafante, New York Times Magazine, 17 June 2009

Enchanted Hunters: The Power of Stories in Childhood

By exploring how beauty and horror operate in children's literature, Maria Tatar explores why little children love listening to stories and why older ones get lost in certain books.

Maria Tatar, W. W. Norton & Co., 19 May 2009

Talking Point: Controversial Classics

Tintin in the Congo was condemned by the Commission for Racial Equality (CRE) for depicting ‘hideous racial prejudice’ and featuring ‘crude racial stereotypes.’ Is this reaction justified? Or is it another example of political correctness gone mad?

writersmarket.co.uk, 23 September 2008

Age out of the question

Alan Garner celebrates the joy of whimsical reading beyond the brackets of age banding

Alan Garner, The Times, 23 August 2008

No to Age Banding?

Do we want to divide our children so clinically into groups of readers by age or do we want to keep the pages of books open to them as they were to us?

Sam Shipman, The Reader Online, 22 August 2008

Reading between the lines

In laying down ever more stringent guidelines about what fiction should contain, and measuring titles old and new by the morals of the day, we may be worrying too much about what adults want from children’s books, and not enough about what children might need.

Olivia Skinner, Catalyst, 15 May 2007

Session partners



Battle of Ideas 2009 | session: Standing up to Supernanny: why we need a Parents' Liberation Movement
Standing up to Supernanny: why we need a Parents' Liberation Movement

Sunday 1 November, 3.45pm until 5.15pm, Café

Everybody these days seems to know best about how to raise children - apart from parents. From politicians issuing statements on how to ‘improve parenting’, to policy initiatives designed to promote better parental behaviour, to countless TV shows and self-help books produced by self-appointed experts, ‘parenting’ has come to be seen as the must-have skill of the twenty-first century. And it is one all parents must learn. But is parenting a skill that can be practised according to the prescriptions of accredited practitioners? Are parents so bad at bringing up their children that they need classes and official support in matters of everyday family life? What accounts for the popularity of parenting advice? Isn’t it really time we stood up for ourselves and our families against the relentless pressure to conform to the prototype of the perfect parent?

This session discusses the new book Standing Up To Supernanny, written by Jennie Bristow with the Academy of Ideas Parents’ Forum. Contributors to the book will join Bristow in a roundtable discussion to launch a Parents’ Liberation Movement - and discuss where that might start.

Speakers
Jennie Bristow
senior lecturer in sociology, Canterbury Christ Church University; author, The Sociology of Generations: New directions and challenges and Baby Boomers and Generational Conflict; co-author, Parenting Culture Studies

Jennifer Howze
founder, BritMums blogging network and BritMums Live! conference

Tracey Jensen
doctoral candidate, Open University; editorial assistant, Studies in the Maternal; researcher into parenting advice, policy and culture

Zoe Williams
columnist, Guardian; author, What Not to Expect When You're Expecting

Chair:
Jane Sandeman
convenor, IoI Parents Forum; contributor, Standing up to Supernanny; director of finance and central services, Cardinal Hume Centre


Produced by
Jennie Bristow senior lecturer in sociology, Canterbury Christ Church University; author, The Sociology of Generations: New directions and challenges and Baby Boomers and Generational Conflict; co-author, Parenting Culture Studies
Jane Sandeman convenor, IoI Parents Forum; contributor, Standing up to Supernanny; director of finance and central services, Cardinal Hume Centre
Recommended readings
The perils of modern parenting - whatever happened to muddling through?

There's a multi-million pound industry out there telling us how to be model parents. Since when did bringing up children become so complicated?

Marianne Kavanagh, Telegraph, 3 October 2009

Let’s stand up to ‘supernanny’

Jennie Bristow’s new book is as engaging and witty as those rebellious ‘bad mum’ memoirs. But it’s far more important, both explaining and critiquing the tsunami of state meddling in family affairs.

Ann Furedi, spiked, 25 September 2009

Standing Up to Supernanny

Parenthood, we are told, requires a massive adjustment to our lives, emotions, and relationships, and we have to be taught how to deal with that. But can it really be so bad that we need constant counselling and parenting classes? It is a myth that today's parents are hopeless and lazy: in many ways, we have become too diligent, too hopeful of great outcomes and clear rewards, to the point where we lose ourselves in trying to provide some kind of professional service to our children.

Jennie Bristow, Imprint Academic, 16 September 2009

Free Range Kids: Giving Our Children the Freedom We Had without Going Nuts with Worry

Skenazy flies the black flag of “America’s Worst Mom,” a title this syndicated columnist and NPR commentator earned by allowing her nine–year–old son to ride the New York City public transit alone in 2008.

Lenore Skenazy, Jossey Bass, 31 March 2009

This is a job for the boys

It's up to men to counter modern risk culture and offer children some inspirational role models

Zoe Williams, Guardian, 21 January 2009

The state is a pretty rotten parent

Before the state goes any further in its attempt to make the rest of us better parents, maybe it should take a look at what is going on in its own back yard

Fiona Millar, Guardian, 11 July 2006

Session partners



Battle of Ideas 2009 | session: The Good Society: virtues for a post-recession world
The Good Society: virtues for a post-recession world

Sunday 1 November, 3.45pm until 5.15pm, Upper Gulbenkian Gallery Keynote Controversies

Prime Minister Gordon Brown responded to the economic crisis by calling in March for ‘a return to the values of the good society’. A true son-of-the-manse, he invoked a time when ‘hard work and effort was valued along with enterprise, honesty and integrity’. Certainly, there is a consensus across British politics that our values are in crisis as well as our economy. The Joseph Rowntree Trust’s Contemporary Social Evils report declares Britain is beset by problems like drink and drug abuse, family breakdown and rampant individualism. Similar concerns about ‘Broken Britain’ led Tory shadow health secretary Andrew Lansley to suggest the recession might be ‘good for us’, because ‘people tend to smoke less, drink less alcohol… and spend time at home with their families’. The predominant critiques suggest today’s crisis is a symptom of our addiction to consumption, and a good society should focus on well-being and happiness instead.

The global crisis is regularly presented as ‘payback time’ for human greed. The Labour-left group Compass notes approvingly that the recession is working as a corrective against ‘individualistic and materialistic attitudes’. Others argue for a ‘new corporate ethics’, with financial risk-taking and rampant capitalism indicted by events. But is the recession really a problem of ethics or morality? Is there a danger the new anti-capitalist ethic amounts to little more than risk-aversion and paralysing regulation? What about innovation and experimentation? If we demonise the aspiration to wealth as ‘greed’, how will society reward success and encourage ambition, and the competitive spirit that so often drives social progress?

We are told to reject ‘me, me, me’ individualism, but must we choose between selfishness and altruistic sacrifice, or might we form bonds of solidarity around collective self-interest? And is a bit of individualism really so bad anyway? Debating what we mean by the Good Society allows us to imagine how society could be rather than accepting the status quo. But as we search for a new kind of politics, will we rekindle idealism or instead adopt ‘post-recession virtues’ that - far from allowing us to move society forward - will reconcile us to less ambition, less freedom and less capacity to shape society?


Listen to the session audio…

Other formats are available here

Speakers
Dr Tristram Hunt
broadcaster; lecturer in modern British history, Queen Mary, University of London; author, The Frock-Coated Communist: the revolutionary life of Friedrich Engels

Luke Johnson
chairman, Channel 4; chairman/owner, Giraffe and Patisserie Valerie/Druckers; chair, RSA; essayist, Financial Times

Professor Susan Neiman
director, Einstein Forum; author, Moral Clarity: a guide for grown-up idealists and Evil in Modern Thought

Brendan O'Neill
editor, spiked; columnist, Big Issue; contributor, Spectator; author, A Duty to Offend: Selected Essays

Chair:
Claire Fox
director, Academy of Ideas; panellist, BBC Radio 4's Moral Maze; author, I Find That Offensive


Produced by
Claire Fox director, Academy of Ideas; panellist, BBC Radio 4's Moral Maze; author, I Find That Offensive
Recommended readings
Society is collapsing because you are greedy

Social crises have always been blamed on the extravagance of the rich. But today, all of us - from wealthy to peasant - are labelled ‘decadent’.

Brendan O'Neill, spiked, 27 November 2009

A flawed philosophy that bolsters the BNP

The chatter of the chattering classes fades to a whisper whenever cultural difference comes up. That’s why extremists flourish.

Antonia Senior, The Times, 23 October 2009

Recession and the new value equation

Post-recession behaviour is rarely the same as what precedes the recession. Alan Treadgold, head of retail strategy at advertising agency Leo Burnett gives a few pointers on the new rules and new thinking retailers must apply.

Alan Treadgold, MarketingWeek, 20 October 2009

The Next Culture War

Centuries ago, historians came up with a classic theory to explain the rise and decline of nations. The theory was that great nations start out tough-minded and energetic. Toughness and energy lead to wealth and power. Wealth and power lead to affluence and luxury. Affluence and luxury lead to decadence, corruption and decline.

David Brooks, New York Times, 28 September 2009

An ideological map

How can we build a “good society”? Four evolving strands of progressive thought and the guiding spirits behind them assessed.

Stuart White, New Statesman, 3 September 2009

Tony Blair: 'More to life than pleasure'

Tony Blair condemned the pursuit of pleasure as 'an end in itself'. He made the case against individualism, linking it to the present financial crisis.

Ruth Gledhill, Times Online, 27 August 2009

‘We want to determine the world, not be determined by it’

Susan Neiman talks to spiked about the death of philosophy, the need for moral reasoning, and how the Enlightenment taught us to live without absolute certainty.

Tim Black, spiked, August 2009

A New Politics of the Common Good

Sandel makes the case for a moral and civic renewal in democratic politics. Recorded at George Washington University in Washington DC, he calls for a new politics of the common good and says that we need to think of ourselves as citizens, not just consumers.

Michael Sandel, BBC Radio 4, 4 July 2009

Contemporary Social Evils

While some evils - like poverty - endure as undisputed causes of social harm, more recent sources of social misery attract controversy. Not least among them are an alleged rise in selfish consumerism driven by economic liberalization, and a perceived decline in personal responsibility and family commitment.

Joseph Rowntree Foundation, Policy Press, 11 June 2009

Moral Clarity: A Guide for Grown-up Idealists

In her commitment to reason and the facts of the world, in her brilliant readings of the Western canon, and above all in her fierce commitment to politics as a moral endeavour, Neiman makes it possible to believe that the Enlightenment is not yet exhausted and that we are free to join it if we wish.

Susan Neiman, The Bodley Head Ltd, 4 June 2009

Against austerity

The proposed ‘Age of Austerity’ is not a rational response to the financial crisis. It is a political campaign to ration our passions.

Brendan O'Neill, spiked, 6 October 2008

Session partners



Battle of Ideas 2009 | session: Solving the Energy Crisis: all about lightbulbs and lifestyle?
Solving the Energy Crisis: all about lightbulbs and lifestyle?

Sunday 1 November, 3.45pm until 5.15pm, Lecture Theatre 1

Energy efficiency and energy saving play a big role in energy policy. Everything from loft insulation to public transport is used as a carrot to encourage us to use less energy and the UK’s energy minister claims that introducing smart meters ‘will empower all consumers to monitor their own energy use’. Meanwhile the ‘stick’ of taxes and rationing threaten in the background. Some campaigners go even further, telling us to cut out flying. Is this about helping consumers to make better choices, breaking our energy ‘addiction’ or is it a patronising and authoritarian intervention in individual choice?

Campaigners urge us to switch our lights off for Earth Hour, while arguments for building new plants are met with a cynicism about energy giants’ profits and cosy corporate relations with government. But when EDF’s ‘Save Today Save Tomorrow’ campaign urges individual consumers to reduce their consumption and British Gas sells energy-saving gadgets alongside power, it seems as if everyone is joining the energy-saving bandwagon. History shows that despite gains in efficiency, growing economies need a lot more energy. Today this point is made by emerging economies in favour of not signing up to stringent carbon-reduction agreements. But is it time to change the expectation that economic growth means more energy use? Proposals for a Green New Deal argue jobs and growth can be found through maximising efficiency, while some even argue that more provision merely encourages carefree, even luxuriant, energy use. Meanwhile, an energy crisis looms, only delayed by the recession itself.

As the developing world uses more energy, are we using more than our fair share? Does increasing energy use in China and India make personal sacrifice here irrelevant or does it make it more urgent? Is changing our energy lifestyles a necessity, unrealistic, or unacceptably authoritarian? And what about a future where we are not obsessed with reducing consumption?

Listen to the session audio…

Other formats are available here

Speakers
Dr Brenda Boardman
emeritus fellow, Environmental Change Institute, University of Oxford; author, Home Truths: a low-carbon strategy to reduce UK housing emissions by 80%

Professor Jacquie Burgess
professor of environmental risk and head of school, environmental sciences, University of East Anglia

Martin Haigh
energy consultant, Shell; lead consultant, Shell's World Energy Model

Ben Pile
independent researcher, writer, and film-maker

Peter Sammonds
professor of geophysics at UCL; director, UCL Institute for Risk and Disaster Reduction

Chair:
Alex Hochuli
communications consultant, researcher and blogger based in São Paulo


Produced by
Alex Hochuli communications consultant, researcher and blogger based in São Paulo
Recommended readings
Focus on the means

Our present approach to solving global warming will not work. It is flawed economically, politically and also technologically.

Bjorn Lomborg, The Australian, 7 September 2009

Green zealots and muddled ministers are leading Britain to blackouts

The tragedy is that for seven years, politicians of all parties have refused to face up to Britain’s fast-looming energy gap because they have all been bewitched by the great ‘green dream’, that we could somehow save the planet by generating much of our electricity from ‘renewables’, such as building thousands more wind turbines.

Christopher Booker, Daily Mail, 3 September 2009

Wearing thermals won't save the planet

Why is the 10:10 campaign, with its pledges to turn off lights and grow more veg, taken more seriously than geo-engineering?

Brendan O'Neill, Guardian, 2 September 2009

Engineering Earth 'is feasible'

A UK Royal Society study has concluded that many engineering proposals to reduce the impact of climate change are

Pallab Ghosh, BBC News, 1 September 2009

A Dream of Hydrogen

A nation that must drastically reduce its consumption of fossil fuels must be willing to gamble.

Editorial, New York Times, 8 August 2009

Energise!

''If the world could be more thoughtful about energy supply, we could all afford to be thoughtless about our personal use of energy.'

James Woudhuysen and Joe Kaplinsky, Beautiful Books, 22 January 2009

The CFLs are on, but nobody’s home

The mad green war on light bulbs won’t save much electricity - it’s about enforcing moral rectitude in the home.

James Woudhuysen, spiked, 13 January 2009

Infinite Regress

Environmentalists demand an impossibly high standard. Nothing the human race has ever done to improve its conditions has been ’sustainable’. As technologies have changed our lives, and created new problems, so too have new politics arisen out of these changing conditions.

Ben Pile, Climate Resistance, 3 July 2008

Session partners



Battle of Ideas 2009 | session: Recession-proofing: from union militancy to reskilling
Recession-proofing: from union militancy to reskilling

Sunday 1 November, 3.45pm until 5.15pm, Courtyard Gallery

Responses to the economic crisis have ranged from ‘boss-napping’ in France to factory occupations in London and Belfast. It might appear there is a new militancy afoot, but the bigger picture is that responses are typically individualistic, even therapeutic, such as personal grievance procedures against bullying bosses and demands for counselling for over-worked, ‘stressed out’ employees. Unite is even providing personal fitness lessons to Honda workers in Swindon during a four-month shutdown.

Where ‘collective’ responses do occur, they can take a surprisingly altruistic form. A recent survey of distribution workers found they are prepared to be flexible if it will stop colleagues losing their jobs. The Swindon Honda workers voted in May to accept a temporary pay cut to save jobs. Over 400 such ideas have been submitted to the ‘Keep Britain Working’ campaign. Do these initiatives represent a new solidarity, or fatalism and despair? Is it better to be pragmatic than to make demands that seem unrealistic? What role is there for the unions?

Is the best recession-proofing strategy simply to work on one’s CV? Even before the crisis, Lord Leitch wrote in a government report that if ‘skills were once a key lever for prosperity and fairness. Skills are now increasingly the key lever’. The unions agreed, demanding accredited life-long learning and training opportunities for their members. Can qualifications protect us from the recession? In our service-oriented ‘knowledge economy’, the training on offer is often in generic ‘competences’, such as the ability to listen, or work with others. Does up-skilling in these ‘soft skills’ leave workers with anything of value beyond flexibility and compliance? What is the best way for all of us to protect our livelihoods?

Listen to the session audio…

Other formats are available here

Speakers
Michael Skapinker
assistant editor of the Financial Times; FT columnist; editor, FT’s special reports

Paul Thomas
civil servant; qualified FE teacher; organiser, Leeds Salon

Professor Lorna Unwin
professor of vocational education and deputy director, ESRC-funded LLAKES Centre, Institute of Education, University of London

Dr Glynne Williams
senior lecturer in industrial relations, University of Leicester

Chair:
Geoff Kidder
director, membership and events, Academy of Ideas; convenor, IoI Book Club; IoI’s resident expert in all sporting matters


Produced by
Geoff Kidder director, membership and events, Academy of Ideas; convenor, IoI Book Club; IoI’s resident expert in all sporting matters
Recommended readings
They couldn't manage a mail service in a postal office

Behind the UK postal dispute is the spectre of privatisation and the authorities’ inability to take responsibility for basic state services.

Mick Hume, spiked, 21 October 2009

Why are France Télécom employees committing suicide?

A spate of suicides at France Télécom, most recently a young woman in Paris, has highlighted the country’s malaise.

Adam Sage, The Times, 23 September 2009

French transport workers threaten to pollute river Seine

Angry lorry drivers at struggling transportation company threaten to pour more than 8,000 litres of toxic fuel additive into Parisian river unless their demands for redundancy pay-offs are met

Lizzy Davies, Guardian, 20 August 2009

Are Trade Unions back in Fashion?

After decades of steady decline, trade unions face their biggest challenge – persuading a new generation of workers that, in the face of the worst recession since the 1930s, being a union member really will make a difference to their working lives.

Caroline Palmer, Guardian, 1 August 2009

Rift between unions and bosses narrows as recession bites

High-profile industrial disputes are becoming rarer as the economic crisis forces both sides to work together on saving jobs

Tim Webb, Guardian, 3 July 2009

Improving Working as Learning

Interest in learning at work has captured the attention of many people around the world, often taking centre stage in policy debates. This book is about the everyday learning that goes on in workplaces – ranging from offices, factories and shops to gyms, health centres and universities.

Lorna Unwin et. al., Routledge, 16 April 2009

Angry French workers turn to ‘Bossnapping’ to solve their problems

Public opinion is behind the bossnappers. President Sarkozy, fearful of a social explosion of the sort that has rocked France so often in the past, has avoided the suggestion that bossnappings might be wrong and pledged support for protesting workers.

Adam Sage, The Times, 4 April 2009

Re-skilling in a recession: do the shuffle

Should employers try to re-skill staff rather than lay them off? Well, definitely – maybe.

Ross Bentley, Personneltoday.com, 9 March 2009

So whatever happened to shop-floor militants?

The picture of a resurgent union militancy is arguably misplaced despite the latest eruption. Contrast last week's scenes in Britain – of a few localised, disparate groups taking action – with those in France.

Mark Leftly, Independent, 1 February 2009

Session partners



Battle of Ideas 2009 | session: South Africa: 15 Years After Apartheid
South Africa: 15 Years After Apartheid

Sunday 1 November, 3.45pm until 5.15pm, Henry Moore Gallery

The African National Congress (ANC) stormed to victory in the euphoric atmosphere of the first democratic election of 1994 promising ‘Jobs! Jobs! Jobs!’ As they celebrate their 15th anniversary in power and look forward to hosting the World Cup in 2010, the world’s eyes are once again on South Africa and on the ANC. Will they be in the dock for failing to live up to their promise? Or will Jacob Zuma’s government be hailed as a model for other developing democracies? What has happened in 15 long years?

Critics point to the rising crime rate, the modest housing programme, the failure of the education system and the poor quality of public services. Controversy also surrounds the racialised affirmative action programme of Black Economic Empowerment, which led to a ‘brain-drain’ and has failed to live up to its promise of providing jobs for the millions of people who voted for the ANC.

Supporters say the ANC is still dealing with legacy of Apartheid; that 15 years is not long enough to judge their performance and that after the euphoria they are now buckling down to real politics. This year, though, more South Africans voted for opposition parties to rule out the possibility of the ANC changing the constitution with a two-thirds majority. Is the democratic process deepening? Or could South Africa come to resemble Zimbabwe? What prospect is there of Western levels of development for all?

Listen to the session audio…

Other formats are available here

Speakers
John Battersby
UK country manager, International Marketing Council of South Africa; former editor-in-chief, Sunday Independent in Johannesburg

Barrie Collins
researcher and writer, African politics

Andrew Feinstein
former ANC MP; author, After the Party: corruption, the ANC and South Africa’s uncertain future

Professor Keorapetse 'Bra Willie' Kgositsile
poet laureate, South Africa; political activist; author, My Name is Afrika and If I Could Sing; recipient, National Order of Ikhamanga Silver (2008)

Chair:
Sharmini Brookes
freelance writer and blogger based in Johannesburg; contributor Artslink and spiked


Produced by
Sharmini Brookes freelance writer and blogger based in Johannesburg; contributor Artslink and spiked
Recommended readings
It was disappointing to see how quickly we adopted the tawdry norms of African and global politics

Andrew Feinstein, former ANC MP and author of After the Party: corruption, the ANC and South Africa’s uncertain future is interviewed by Sharmini Brookes. Andrew spoke at the Battle of Ideas 2009 debate ‘South Africa: 15 years after apartheid’ chaired and produced by Sharmini.

Sharmini Brookes & Andrew Feinstein, Independent Independent Minds, 19 November 2009

In the black-and-white rainbow nation, colour and class still count

Apartheid may have been excised, but the scars still itch in unequal South Africa

David Smith, Guardian, 8 September 2009

False Start in South Africa

Despite the lessons supposedly learnt and the anc’s heady promises in 1994, there has been a false start of extraordinary proportions in the continent’s most developed state.

RW Johnson, New Left Review, July 2009

South Africa is at the cutting-edge of a new emerging world order

South Africa, now established as something of a bridge between the developing and developed worlds, is set to play an increasingly vital role as global economic and strategic power shifts from the industrialized countries of the G8 to the new economic powers of the south.

John Battersby, South Africa Magazine, June 2009

After the Party: Corruption, the ANC and South Africa's Uncertain Future

An account of the power struggles currently dominating South African politics, and a crucial record of the ANC's record in power.

Andrew Feinstein, Verso, 13 April 2009

Thabo Mbeki: Aloof leader who fell from grace

'What happens to a dream deferred?' The last three words became the title for an authoritative biography of Mbeki. Asked about the book and Mr Mbeki’s presidency one of the best known leaders in the ANC snorted: 'It’s not a dream deferred. It’s a dream derailed.'

Alec Russell, Financial Times, 21 September 2008

Ambiguity and America: South Africa and US Foreign Policy

The reaction in the US to racial oppression and racial discrimination, and the manner in which it shaped the foreign policy of the US with respect to South Africa, reflects a long-standing ambivalence about the promotion of and compliance with international human rights principles.

Richard Goldstone, Social Research, December 2005

China deal: a new day for Africa

The recent acquisition by China's largest bank of 20% of South Africa's Standard Bank is a watershed event in the growing relationship between China and the development of the African continent.

John Battersby, MediaClubSouthAfrica.com

Session partners





Battle of Ideas 2009 | session: Shaping Social Policy: Designers and Health
Shaping Social Policy: Designers and Health

Sunday 1 November, 3.45pm until 5.15pm, Student Union

Healthcare and the NHS are in a state of flux: the shift toward prevention, target-setting and-cost cutting are motivating many to seek new ways of working. A new breed of designers is at the forefront of arguing for the re-designing of the delivery of services based on ‘patient needs’. This means improving their experience of healthcare, and measuring success by ‘patient satisfaction’. This isn’t simply about designing things to be more convenient for patients in hospitals and surgeries, however, but is part of a wider trend towards using design to encourage people to change the way they live, and adopt healthier lifestyles, preventing illness.

Encouraged by a new breed of policy makers, designers believe they are better able than politicians and clinicians to nudge people into making healthier choices, by transforming the physical environment, improving food labelling, creating incentives to lose weight or give up smoking, and even re-thinking how a receptionist answers the phone. It is hoped that of all of this and more will influence how people behave – with regard to their own health and the services they consume. But will services re-designed around a patient’s experience be enough to transform healthcare, and is all of this genuinely about empowering patients to make the right choices, or really about the nanny state making choices for us?

Everyone agrees healthcare needs to be improved, but can attempts to alter patients’ and staff’s behaviour succeed? And will focusing on patient satisfaction be enough to transform the NHS and wider healthcare provision? Or does this only obscure the economic, political and infrastructure problems that underlie the failings of the health service? At a time when healthcare faces drastic cutbacks, some argue it makes economic sense to discourage people from choosing unhealthy lives and becoming a drain on resources. But is it the place of designers to implement such a contentious agenda? Will making patients accept the ‘terms and conditions’ of a health care system before being allowed to access its services be good for anyone?

Speakers
Alastair Donald
associate director, Future Cities Project; architecture programme manager, British Council

Maja Kecman
senior associate, patient safety group, Helen Hamlyn Centre, Royal College of Art; industrial design engineer and consultant

Dr Lynne Maher
interim director, innovation, NHS Institute for Innovation and Improvement; author, Making a Bigger Difference NHS guide

Jason Mesut
experience director, The Team; design specialist, healthcare user experience, NHS and private sector

Professor Joe Kerr
head of Department of Critical & Historical Studies. RCA; author, London from Punk to Blair; bus driver

Chair:
Martyn Perks
digital business consultant and writer; co-author, Big Potatoes: the London manifesto for innovation


Produced by
Martyn Perks digital business consultant and writer; co-author, Big Potatoes: the London manifesto for innovation
Recommended readings
Hospitals to be told to make patients happy

Having acknowledged that the health service is “good but not great”, Andy Burnham, the health secretary, wants hospital budgets to be linked with patient satisfaction.

Isabel Oakeshott, The Times, 13 September 2009

Participating in health care

E-medical records and HSAs are both examples of platforms that encourage participation and that can support an eco-system of innovation that results in untold benefits. Are there other participation-based platforms that might have an impact on health in America?

Tim Brown, Design Thinking, 2 May 2009

Design Bugs Out

The Design Council, Department of Health and NHS Purchasing and Supply Agency brought designers together with clinical specialists, patients and frontline staff to test an innovative approach to procurement.

Design Council

Department of Health to launch design tender

The Department of Health is looking to pioneer the use of design in the fight against hospital ‘superbugs’ such as MRSA.

Design Week, 28 August 2008

Fat chance of designers tackling obesity threat

These days, most packaging doesn't try to hide the guilty secrets of what's inside. Instead, it flaunts it, playing on our weakness for food treats. Gü - need I say more?

Design Week, 21 February 2008

Service design: how does it feel to be our patient?

An unusual change project drafted in anthropologists to explore patients' experiences.

Stuart Shepherd, Health Service Journal, 8 October 2007

Democratic design

Patients, staff and the public should have a say in hospital design, according to the Department of Health. But how can this be done?

Alison Moore, Health Service Journal, 10 July 2003

Session partners



Battle of Ideas 2009 | session: A Space Age Future? Sci-fi film clips and discussion
A Space Age Future? Sci-fi film clips and discussion

Sunday 1 November, 1.45pm until 3.15pm, Lecture Theatre 2

Millions stayed up to share that historic moment on 21 July 1969, when sci-fi dreams became reality as the first human being set foot on the moon. Forty years after Neil Armstrong stepped onto the moon, misty-eyed space enthusiasts are queuing up to demand a return to the Space Age. Why is it so long since Man last went beyond low Earth orbit? What happened to the risk-taking philosophy of early space exploration, to the sense that the conquest of space is a universalist human mission, transcending national boundaries? While some see President John F Kennedy’s 1961 commitment to reach the moon by the end of that decade as an inspirational act of leadership, others draw attention to the political context - the Cold War – pointing out that the ‘space race’ with the Soviet Union was bound up with the arms race. Even at the time, critics argued the moon landing was a waste of money that would have been better spent building hospitals or alleviating poverty.

So are we right to keep our feet on the ground and focus our energies on problems closer to home? Or might reaching for the stars once more give us a new sense of purpose and ambition in all spheres of life? Should we reach even beyond the moon? If the US and Russia are no longer prepared to lead the way, will China and India become the space powers of the 21st century? Is the Space Age a thing of the past, or can and should we expect space travel to be part of our future?

Speakers
Craig Fairnington
associate fellow, Academy of Ideas; university finance and accommodation officer

Dr Chris Riley
writer, broadcaster and film-maker; MD, The Attic Room; producer, In the Shadow of the Moon and Space Odyssey

Louis Savy
founder and organiser, SCI-FI-LONDON, the London International Festival of Science Fiction and Fantastic Film.

Professor John Zarnecki
professor, space science, Open University; member, Planetary & Space Sciences Research Institute, OU

Chair:
Timandra Harkness
journalist, writer & broadcaster; presenter, Futureproofing and other BBC Radio 4 programmes; author, Big Data: does size matter?


Produced by
Timandra Harkness journalist, writer & broadcaster; presenter, Futureproofing and other BBC Radio 4 programmes; author, Big Data: does size matter?
Louis Savy founder and organiser, SCI-FI-LONDON, the London International Festival of Science Fiction and Fantastic Film.
Recommended readings
Water on the Moon may boost Nasa into 21st-century space race

The timing could not have been better. Struggling to overcome chronic underfunding, technical problems and a lack of political commitment, and with public interest waning, Nasa’s plans for sending astronauts back to the Moon seemed at risk of being frozen. News that water may be lurking in the lunar soil could prompt a thaw.

Jacqui Goddard, The Times, 25 September 2009

Manned space flight is ‘over-ambitious and no longer viable’

The space agency has become over-ambitious and critically underfunded in its attempts to blast humans back to the Moon, to Mars and beyond, panel members noted.

Jacqui Goddard, The Times, 11 September 2009

One Giant Leap: Apollo 11 Forty Years on

The first moon landing in July 1969 captured the imagination of the world in a way that no subsequent 'space spectacular' has succeeded in doing. Forty years later, Piers Bizony has produced a stunning, comprehensive visual record of the mission using high-resolution images selected from the entire suite of Apollo 11's on-board film magazines.

Piers Bizony, Aurum Press Ltd, 8 May 2009

The space race is a pointless waste of money

The cash spent on Nasa's leaps for mankind would be better used on Earth

Gerard DeGroot, Daily Telegraph, 25 February 2009

Happy Birthday Earthrise

Forty years ago, the biggest TV audience in history tuned in to watch humankind's first close encounter with another world, as the crew of Apollo 8 reached lunar orbit. Apollo historian and film-maker Dr Christopher Riley explains how that Christmas Eve of 1968 changed the world.

Christopher Riley, BBC News, 24 December 2008

Space exploration at a crossroad

It is time to remember nearly fifty years of piloted spaceflight and re-evaluate the role of humans in space: are they worth the expense?

Claude Lafleur, The Space Review, 6 October 2008

What direction now for US space exploration?

In a time of economic crisis, the space programme presents an easy target for cutbacks. Yet for political and strategic reasons it is an area in which the US seeks to lead the world. With China and other countries leaping forward in space technology, this task will only become more challenging.

David Shiga, New Scientist, 3 October 2008

Spaceflight Revolution

A revolution in spaceflight is likely soon, with the prospect of everyday access to orbit. Costly ballistic missiles used to launch vehicles will be replaced by "spaceplanes", using technology that already exists.

David Ashford, Imperial College Press, 5 February 2003


Session partners



Battle of Ideas 2009 | session: Mr Obama goes to Washington
Mr Obama goes to Washington

Sunday 1 November, 1.45pm until 3.15pm, Henry Moore Gallery

The election of Barack Obama in November 2008 represented to many Americans the promise of real political change. Amid war and economic recession, Obama’s historic inauguration in January drew millions to line the mall in Washington DC and stirred hope in the hearts of a nation.

In the current political climate, such high expectations of a politician are rare. The jury is still out on whether Obama can deliver on the changes he promised. His economic stimulus package has been far from uncontentious and has hardly resolved America’s deep economic problems. Although his foreign policy has struck some conciliatory notes, with overtures towards Iran and the pressing of the ‘reset button’ with Russia, Afghanistan has now become Obama’s war. Back home, Obama’s post-racial stance has been questioned following his choice of Supreme Court candidate and his intervention in the “Gates-gate” fiasco. The president’s flagship policy of healthcare reform has not only met opposition from Republicans, but has also raised questions from Democrats wary of increasing the US budget deficit. Despite claiming on the campaign trail that ‘change comes to Washington’, after six months in office, Congress still has highly unfavourable ratings, even if Obama himself maintains the confidence of a majority of Americans.

One year after his election, has President Obama lived up to the hype? Does his administration really represent a new broom to sweep the cobwebs away – or now that the dust has settled – is there a return to politics as usual at the White House? In new circumstances, what would ‘politics as usual’ even mean? Has Obama set his sights too high… or not been ambitious enough? 

Speakers
James Crabtree
comment editor, Financial Times

Bronwen Maddox
chief foreign commentator, The Times; author In Defence of America

Professor Iwan Morgan
head of US Presidency Centre, Institute for the Study of the Americas, University of London; author, The Age of Deficits

Helen Searls
senior executive producer, Feature Story News

Chair:
Dr Cheryl Hudson
lecturer in American history, University of Liverpool


Produced by
Dr Cheryl Hudson lecturer in American history, University of Liverpool
Recommended readings
Democrats look set to lose key election

Republican candidate surges ahead in the polls, leaving the President facing the prospect of a heavy defeat in Virginia.

Christina Lamb, Sunday Times, 26 October 2009

How power changed a president

Barack Obama pledged to heal America’s divisions. Despite successes in a bruising first year, his promise of change remains unfulfilled, and his country as divided as ever.

James Crabtree, Prospect, 21 October 2009

Barack Obama's Nobel prize: why now?

Giving Barack Obama the Nobel peace prize so early in his presidency could hinder rather than help his diplomatic efforts

Peter Beaumont, Guardian, 9 October 2009

Problems await Obama after Chicago loss

Even before Chicago was eliminated, critics had lampooned Barack Obama’s trip to Copenhagen as a misplaced exercise in “verbal gymnastics”. But Friday’s embarrassing first-round elimination is likely to cause Mr Obama more problems back home.

Edward Luce, Financial Times, 2 October 2009

Lies: Obama, the Republicans, and health care reform

The predominant tone of opposition to the emerging Democratic health-care proposals, and to the President personally, came as a surprise to the White House and a profound shock to many who voted for Barack Obama last November.

Hendrik Hertzberg, New Yorker, 21 September 2009

Why We Need Health Care Reform

America is now engaged in a great debate about the future of health care, but we haven’t heard the voices of the millions of Americans who quietly struggle every day with a system that often works better for the health-insurance companies than it does for them.

Barack Obama, New York Times, 15 August 2009

Obama: the king of low expectations

Healthcare controversies, dumb comments about the arrest of a Harvard professor, and ‘frumpy jeans’: is Obama losing his Midas touch?

Sean Collins, spiked, 29 July 2009

Obama and the politics of abortion

The reaction to the president’s speech at Notre Dame shows how much the debate about abortion has shifted in the United States.

Helen Searls, spiked, 21 May 2009

One hundred days of platitude

President Barack Obama marks his first 100 days in office, occasioning approximately 5,000 articles about this historic milestone event.

Christopher Buckley, Financial Times, 28 April 2009

Festival Buzz

"The Battle of Ideas goes from strength to strength. The intensity, variety and depth of debate, sustained for an entire weekend, makes for a unique experience charging the intellectual batteries for the rest of the year."
Raymond Tallis, emeritus professor of geriatric medicine, Manchester University

Battle of Ideas 2009 | session: The Art of Criticism: judgement in crisis?
The Art of Criticism: judgement in crisis?

Sunday 1 November, 1.45pm until 3.15pm, Upper Gulbenkian Gallery Keynote Controversies

Critics used to be feared and respected for their ability to make definitive judgements on everything from conceptual art to catwalk fashions. This mattered not just for the success – or failure – of the individuals being judged, but for shaping culture more generally. Critical acclaim for 18th-century actor David Garrick changed how we viewed Shakespeare as well as actors. Hazlitt was Romanticism’s critical muse, while Kenneth Tynan championed the post-war realism of plays like John Osborne’s Look Back In Anger. It could even be said that criticism makes us who we are, forming, as Roger Scruton puts it, ‘part of the great transition from youthful enjoyment to adult discrimination’. Today criticism can still – sometimes literally – define our tastes, with the Evening Standard’s Fay Maschler described as the ‘most feared and respected restaurant critic’ in London.

But society often seems to have disavowed its critics today, particularly where high culture is concerned. If anything, tough criticism is less associated with the arts than lifestyle journalism and light entertainment, from Fay Maschler to Simon Cowell. Some fear the dearth of in-depth critical writing reflects something deeper. With teachers wary of criticising students lest they damage their self-esteem, and professional journalism giving way to amateur blogging, are we the midst of a crisis of judgement? From politics to pop, some argue robust debate has collapsed to be replaced by a culture in which everybody’s opinions must be respected.

Are we no longer comfortable with criticism and authority today? Who needs a coterie of ‘official’ critics when anybody can publish a blog or write a reader’s review?  Is this a liberating democratisation, empowering the man and woman in the street? How can we refine our own judgement without a wider culture of criticism? Do we risk reducing critical clarity to a competing cacophony of unexamined prejudices? Isn’t a society that is afraid to make critical judgements one that surrenders to paralysis and puerility? What is the role of the critic and why should we listen?


Listen to the session audio…

Other formats are available here

Speakers
Dr Ronan McDonald
senior lecturer, English, University of Reading; author, The Death of the Critic

Munira Mirza
advisor on arts and philanthropy; former deputy mayor of London for education and culture; author, The Politics of Culture: the case for universalism

James Runcie
novelist, East Fortune; film-maker, Powerhouses and My Father; artistic director, Bath Literature Festival

Gabriella Swallow
cellist, broadcaster and arts commentator

Chair:
Dr Tiffany Jenkins
writer and broadcaster; author, Keeping Their Marbles: how treasures of the past ended up in museums and why they should stay there


Produced by
Dr Tiffany Jenkins writer and broadcaster; author, Keeping Their Marbles: how treasures of the past ended up in museums and why they should stay there
Recommended readings
Critical thinking

The decline of criticism is not democratising: it threatens the development of culture itself.

Tiffany Jenkins, Times Higher Education, 31 October 2009

Is this really peer review? Arts Council seeks theatre assessors

The Arts Council is recruiting 150 theatregoers to help them make funding decisions. But can we rely on their reports?

Lyn Gardner, Guardian Unlimited, 10 September 2009

Bird Brain

Is art criticism so easy that a pigeon can do it?

Morgan Meis, The Smart Set, 26 August 2009

Damning Mozart With Fervid Praise

Mindless, clichéd, indiscriminate cheerleading is the last thing classical music needs just now, as it finds itself increasingly challenged to prove its relevance in the multicultural, anti-elitist, pop-saturated arts climate of the 21st century.

James Oestreich, New York Times, 10 August 2009

Farewell to Judgment

The sciences aim to explain the world: they build theories that are tested through experiment, and which describe the workings of nature and the deep connections between cause and effect. Nothing like that is true of the humanities.

Roger Scruton, American Spectator, June 2009

The Death of the Critic

In an age of book clubs, celebrity endorsements and Internet bloggers, what role is there now for the professional critic as an arbiter of artistic value? Are literature and the arts only a question of personal taste?

Ronan McDonald, Continuum, 23 October 2008

Who Needs Critics?

The reviewer's trade has always enjoyed its teeth-baring and wound-licking moments of 'crisis', but this time there is real pain.

Nick James, Sight and Sound, 1 October 2008

Is it curtains for critics?

An army of arts bloggers is posting internet reviews on subjects from grand opera to soap opera - instant, global and free. US newspapers have begun to ditch their reviewers as digital alternatives flourish. Could it happen here?

Jay Rayner, Observer, 13 July 2008

The Death of the Critic reviewed

McDonald’s careful and engaged critique defends the idea of criticism through a historical discussion of the critics’ changing role, dealing on the way with the ‘democratisation’ of criticism aided by the internet, and its obscurantist elevation into self-reflection by post-structuralists.

Michael Savage, Culture Wars, 21 January 2008

What has happened to art criticism?

The critic is becoming a dandified copywriter, producing 'beautiful writing about beautiful objects and their beautiful makers’.

JJ Charlesworth, spiked, 1 February 2005

Session partners



Battle of Ideas 2009 | session: Shaping Social Policy: Designers and Crime
Shaping Social Policy: Designers and Crime

Sunday 1 November, 1.45pm until 3.15pm, Student Union

Forget the police: a new crime-buster is on the block. Designers claim they can lead the charge in the fight against crime. The government backed Design & Technology Alliance Against Crime is leading a programme ‘to develop innovative design solutions to help prevent robbery, to crime-proof hot new gadgets and to embed public safety in the design of new public spaces’. In schools, design ideas are being developed to reduce bullying, fighting and petty theft. Designers are also working on ways to reduce alcohol-related antisocial and criminal behaviour, while materials experts have designed toughened glasses that lessen the damage caused by glassings in bars. Better design can also reduce traffic violations perhaps better than cameras and policing. The Kensington High Street scheme got rave reviews from design bodies when nearly all guard rails and barriers segregating road users from pedestrians were removed, reducing speeding and accidents.

We can all benefit from such innovations; who wouldn’t want better bike locks or services like ‘Immobilise’ which allows people to register their valuables and have them returned if stolen? But critics object that many of these initiatives involve manipulating the public to change their behaviour whether they like it or not. When crime-busting features are automatically included in products, clothing and even in neighbourhood layouts, are the public not denied choice?

Designers can’t be blamed for working on lucrative government contracts, but is the ‘design establishment’ compromised by aligning itself with explicitly politicised agendas like ‘the war on crime’? Are designers pandering to panics about rising crime levels where in reality, crime is not escalating, despite the headlines? Is there a danger of turning communities into experimental playgrounds for designers? Or is designing out crime simply an opportunity to improve our lives for the better, and even - to quote the Design Council – ‘stop violence and save lives’?

Speakers
Professor Lorraine Gamman
professor, design studies, Central St Martins College of Art and Design, London; director, Design Against Crime Research Centre

Daniel Moylan
former deputy chairman of Transport for London; Conservative Councillor; co-chairman, Urban Design London

Martyn Perks
digital business consultant and writer; co-author, Big Potatoes: the London manifesto for innovation

Dr Stuart Waiton
lecturer in sociology and criminology, Abertay University; author, Snobs' Law: criminalising football fans in an age of intolerance

Chair:
Dolan Cummings
associate fellow, Academy of Ideas; author, That Existential Leap: a crime story (forthcoming from Zero Books)


Produced by
Martyn Perks digital business consultant and writer; co-author, Big Potatoes: the London manifesto for innovation
Recommended readings
A transparent attempt at social engineering

Design cannot solve every problem. But if we continue to support this new breed of design police, we may well have to suffer the consequences of their ill-thought-through actions.

Martyn Perks, spiked, 10 September 2009

Councils to cut crashes with ‘naked streets’

Motorists and pedestrians will be forced to jostle for space under plans being drawn up by councils to strip roads of traffic lights, kerbs and white lines.

Chris Gourlay, The Sunday Times, 6 September 2009

Lorraine Gamman Answers Your Questions

'The Design Against Crime Research Centre (DACRC) was set up partly because I took down the life story of Shirley Pitts, a professional shoplifter and was astonished at what I learned - how easy it was to shoplift.'

Carli Pierce, Design21, 3 September 2009

Crime Prevention Through Environmental Design

CPTED is a crime prevention philosophy based on the theory that proper design and effective use of the built environment can lead to a reduction in the fear and incidence of crime, as well as an improvement in the quality of life.

mesaaz.gov, 2009

£1.6m for Designing Out Crime

The Design Council, the Home Office and the Design and Technology Alliance have unveiled a major expansion of the Designing Out Crime initiative.

Design Week, 4 November 2008

Designs on crime

This thorough, broad and yet detailed approach will help to prevent crime and have a direct impact on the quality of our environment.

Kees Dorst, Curve, July 2008

Session partners





Battle of Ideas 2009 | session: Policing the Playground: do anti-bullying campaigns do more harm than good?
Policing the Playground: do anti-bullying campaigns do more harm than good?

Sunday 1 November, 1.45pm until 3.15pm, Café

Monday 16 November is the start of the Anti-Bullying Alliance’s (ABA) 2009 Anti-Bullying Week, focusing on ‘cyberbullying’ by text and on the internet. The ABA aims to ‘reduce bullying’ and ‘create a safer environment for children’. But why has bullying become such a big issue in recent years? The notion that children can be ‘scarred for life’ as a result of insults hurled at them by their fellow pupils has become accepted as common sense. As a result, the raft of behavioural codes that now regulate playground behaviour, and the increasingly interventionist role of adults in children’s disputes, is seen as a necessary and humane development. Anti-bullying initiatives are widely considered an unquestionable good thing, since critics would appear to be apologising for bullies. But with the definition of bullying expanding to include electronic name-calling and even exclusion from particular friendship groups, is the issue less clear-cut than it seems? And do anti-bullying campaigns really work anyway?

Critics suggest anti-bullying initiatives can do more harm than good. If teachers are encouraged to protect pupils from every playground spat, could it undermine children’s ability to to handle difficult events in the future? Does the concern with cyberbullying reflect an unhelpful broadening of the definition of bullying? Or is it imperative that adults try to nip potential problems in the bud before they escalate?

Speakers
Dr Simon Knight
senior youth work practitioner; vice chair, Play Scotland

Margaret Morrissey
founder, ParentsOutloud.com; chairman of a PTA; champion of parent’s views and parental involvement in education since 1980s

Jenni Russell
columnist and broadcaster; writer, Evening Standard, Sunday Times and Guardian; 2011 winner of Orwell Prize for Political Journalism

Professor Peter K Smith
head, Unit for School and Family Studies, Goldsmiths, University of London; co-editor, Bullying in Schools: how successful can interventions be?

Mark Vickers
educational consultant, Olive Education and Anti-Bullying Aliance; project lead, 'Tackling Bullying in the Playground'

Chair:
Beverley Marshall
volunteer, The Samaritans


Produced by
Beverley Marshall volunteer, The Samaritans
Recommended readings
School seeks dinner lady. Humans need not apply

With its stealthy erosion of adults' powers to deal with children, the state is creating a menace beyond anyone's control

Jennie Russell, Guardian, 24 September 2009

Cyberbully Keeley Houghton gets 3 months for Facebook death threats

On July 12 this year Houghton wrote: 'Keeley is going to murder the bitch. She is an actress. What a f***ing liberty. Emily F***head Moore.'

Kaya Burgess, The Times, 22 August 2009

When self-love is out of control

The 'because I'm worth it' generation put themselves first and the rest nowhere. No wonder more boys are calling ChildLine

Anne Perkins, Guardian, 27 July 2009

Rise in teen girl bullies hits Ireland

Experts say equal society and ladette culture may be to blame for confusing role models

Sarah McInerney, The Times, 26 July 2009

Reclaiming Childhood: freedom and play in an age of fear

Teasing, conflict and even fighting are all normal and necessary parts of children’s lives, shows Helene Guldberg in her new book. It’s the safety-first attitude of adults that risks doing far more damage to children’s development.

Helene Guldberg, Routledge, 29 January 2009


Session partners



Battle of Ideas 2009 | session: A New Nuclear Age?
A New Nuclear Age?

Sunday 1 November, 1.45pm until 3.15pm, Lecture Theatre 1

Nuclear energy is being embraced by some as the best solution for meeting rising power needs and respecting the environment. New nuclear plants are under construction in China, India and elsewhere, although in the UK and USA they remain on the drawing board. Across Europe the question of new nuclear plants has been put on the agenda and countries are considering reversing previous commitments to close their nuclear reactors.

People want green energy, but are worried about risks - from waste, proliferation and accidents. Nuclear’s potential is often overshadowed by its destructive history – from Hiroshima through to Chernobyl. But are governments too ambivalent today about nuclear to give it the support it needs to succeed? Although political opposition seems to have slackened, with leading environmentalists now voicing their support for nuclear energy as a response to climate change, other difficulties stand in the way: a lack of engineers, shortage of funds for investment and sundry barriers to development. The possibility of nuclear fusion – producing energy by joining atomic nuclei rather than splitting them – holds out the promise of cheap power without the waste produced by existing fission technology. Yet the promise of cheap clean energy has not been universally welcomed. Some argue that the dream of fusion is a mirage that encourages us to ignore the problems of climate change.

Is nuclear power a disaster waiting to happen or could it help create a more resilient energy system and bring energy to the developing world? What does the current climate of thinking on fusion research tell us about today’s attitudes to energy? Is the new nuclear age an exciting solution to energy challenges or a dangerous threat to the future of mankind and the planet?

 

Listen to the session audio…

Other formats are available here

Speakers
Paul Brown
journalist; fellow, Wolfson College, University of Cambridge; author, Voodoo Economics and the Doomed Nuclear Renaissance

Malcolm Grimston
honorary senior research fellow, Imperial College Centre for Environmental Policy; author, The Paralysis in Energy Decision Making: European Energy Policy in Crisis

Dr Joe Kaplinsky
assistant professor, DTU Nanotech; co-author, Energise! A Future for Energy Innovation

Dr Alexandra Penn
life sciences interface research fellow, Science and Engineering of Natural Systems Group, University of Southampton

Chair:
Dr Dominic Standish
author, Venice in Environmental Peril? Myth and Reality; lecturer, University of Iowa's CIMBA campus, Venice


Produced by
Alex Hochuli communications consultant, researcher and blogger based in São Paulo
Dr Dominic Standish author, Venice in Environmental Peril? Myth and Reality; lecturer, University of Iowa's CIMBA campus, Venice
Recommended readings
The world needs more energy

We need more energy. The energy debate risks missing this simple point. The emphasis is on energy security and climate change. We do need to keep the lights on and, in the long term, bring climate under control. But by these measures success would amount to survival rather than to progress.

Joe Kaplinksy, The Times Eureka Zone, 27 October 2009

In Finland, Nuclear Renaissance Runs Into Trouble

As the Obama administration tries to steer America toward cleaner sources of energy, it would do well to consider the cautionary tale of this new-generation nuclear reactor site.

James Kanter, New York Times, 28 May 2009

The myth that New Labour is pro-nuclear

Everyone from big business to greens imagines that British government policy favours nuclear energy. It doesn’t.

James Woudhuysen and Joe Kaplinsky, spiked, 30 April 2009

Environmentalists change minds over nuclear

Britain must build new nuclear power stations if it is to meet climate change targets, according to leading environmentalists.

Louise Gray, Daily Telegraph, 23 February 2009

Nuclear Fusion and the Future of Energy

Battle of Ideas, FORA.tv, 2 November 2008

Voodoo Economics and the Doomed Nuclear Renaissance

The economics of new nuclear power stations for the UK do not add up. It is not possible to achieve what the Government says it will do – build a new generation of nuclear stations in England without public subsidy.

Paul Brown, Friends of the Earth, 1 June 2008

A New Generation of Nuclear Power Stations

There would seem to be a remorseless logic pointing to the steady and swift development of nuclear power world-wide, but such a development could be frustrated by lack of political will and shortage of skilled manpower; one is easier to put right than the other.

Ian Fells, Fells Associates, February 2008

Ten myths about nuclear power

‘It's dangerous, wasteful and too expensive!’ Greens are busily putting the case against nuclear, but there is not a spark of truth in their arguments.

Rob Johnston, spiked, 10 January 2008

Session partners



Battle of Ideas 2009 | session: Working for the State: public service or gravy train?
Working for the State: public service or gravy train?

Sunday 1 November, 1.45pm until 3.15pm, Courtyard Gallery

The state is one of the UK’s biggest employers. Even with calls for major cuts in the midst of recession, most jobs today seem to be in the public sector, either directly or in state-supported quangos and social enterprises. With the effective nationalisation of major banks, the state looks to be colonising the world of work. What does this mean for Britain’s working culture? A recent survey found many public sector workers derive satisfaction from the sense they are playing a socially useful role, but detractors complain public sector jobs are overprotected and public sector workers have it easy. The private sector is seen as more self-interested and ruthlessly cut-throat, but also more efficient and enterprising, as well as being the real source of wealth. How significant are the differences between the two working cultures?

In recent years, the distinction between the state and the market has become blurred, with the introduction of the market into the NHS and education, and the development of the Private Finance Initiative. Many more jobs are ultimately supported by the state – from jobs in the arts to those in NGOs and charities, which don’t necessarily share the traditional culture of the public sector. Meanwhile, some say relentless form-filling, a target culture, performance-related incentives, privatisation and outsourcing have all but destroyed the public service ethos. They argue employees now have the worst of both worlds – lower pay and endless bureaucracy, but also greater scrutiny and insecurity rather than professional pride and a sense of being valued. And in the private sector, the new agenda of ‘corporate social responsibility’ means businesses and their employees are also concerned with the ‘public good’.

What effect have these developments had on Britain’s working culture, and is it the right one to kick-start economic growth? Commentators sometimes praise hard-working immigrants, prepared to go beyond the 9 to 5, unlike overpaid, municipal jobsworths and work-to-rule public sector trade unionists. But are British workers really so bad? And is private sector discipline the only way to foster entrepreneurialism and quality?

Listen to the session audio…

Other formats are available here

Speakers
Professor Frank Furedi
sociologist and social commentator; author, What's Happened to the University?, Power of Reading: from Socrates to Twitter, On Tolerance and Authority: a sociological history

Martin Horton
director, development and leadership, SOLACE Enterprises

Tim Smart
CEO, King’s College Hospital NHS FT; former CEO, BT Global Services UK

Chair:
Toby Marshall
A Level Film Studies Teacher; PhD researcher in sociology of education, UCL Institute of Education


Produced by
Toby Marshall A Level Film Studies Teacher; PhD researcher in sociology of education, UCL Institute of Education
Recommended readings
In Defence of Targets

As NHS targets fall out of political fashion, journalist Michael Blastland argues that they could be good for our health.

Michael Blastland, BBC Radio 4, 27 September 2009

Public Sector Staff remain enthusiastic

Despite high sickness levels and pressure to work harder, civil servants show defiant enthusiasm for public services

Jane Dudman, Guardian, 15 July 2009

A New Politics of the Common Good

Sandel makes the case for a moral and civic renewal in democratic politics. Recorded at George Washington University in Washington DC, he calls for a new politics of the common good and says that we need to think of ourselves as citizens, not just consumers.

Michael Sandel, BBC Radio 4, 4 July 2009

Getting more for Less: Efficiency in the Public Sector

For the next decade the most urgent public policy question will be: how can public services achieve more for less - providing services that meet people’s needs, while costing less?

Jamie Bartlett, Demos, July 2009

Forget the north-south divide, this time it's private sector versus public

Under this scenario, the role played previously by comfortable Southerners has been taken on by those employed by the State, from teachers to nurses to policemen. Put-upon Northerners become the battered employees of the private sector, from the City to the construction yard.

Jill Sherman, Grainne Gilmore and David Rose, The Times, 19 March 2009

Class acts: Why public sector careers are more attractive than ever

The charity, voluntary and public sectors offer a good work/life balance, competitive salaries and benefits.

Kate Hilpern, Independent, 19 February 2009

State Security

Traditionally viewed as bureaucratic and staid, public sector careers are back in fashion as new jobseekers seek safer alternatives to corporate uncertainty

Julie Ferry, Guardian, 31 January 2009

Session partners



Battle of Ideas 2009 | session: A Green New Deal: can environmentalism save the economy?
A Green New Deal: can environmentalism save the economy?

Sunday 1 November, 12.30pm until 1.30pm, Lecture Theatre 1 Lunchtime Debates

Humanity seems beset on three fronts: rising temperatures, a deepening energy crisis and the global financial downturn. But perhaps this triple whammy can be turned to our advantage. Some think tackling climate change and thinking afresh about energy could also be the key to working our way out of the recession. Advocates of green energy see investment in wind farms and other renewables as the way forward. Other proposals to create ‘green jobs’ include recruiting an army of energy efficiency advisers to go door to door offering tips on how to keep our bills down. Meanwhile, Trade Minister Peter Mandelson has called for ‘less financial engineering and more real engineering’ and sees developing ‘green technologies’– especially in the car industry – as a possible solution to Britain’s economic woes. In the US, President Barack Obama is bidding to create a ‘Green New Deal’. Through state support for investment in green technology, Obama thinks he can push America into an ecologically friendly future and also dig its struggling economy out of a recession. He declares, ‘The nation that leads in the creation of a clean energy economy will be the nation that leads the 21st century global economy’. Germany is another nation bidding to do just that, and already has the largest wind electricity generating capacity in the world, having been promoting green technology for many years. Most dramatically, the Chinese are starting to invest in the production of green energy on a scale that might dwarf anything the West can do.

Can the Green New Deal stave off a global depression? Will there be serious investment in new technology, or will we end up with no more than make-work schemes? Can the state really save us from a global downturn and a much-threatened ecological crisis? Can the ‘low-impact and low-carbon’ vision that informs much green technological investment really deliver the change we need? As many environmentalists see economic growth itself as the problem, can a new environmentally friendly capitalism really be mean, lean and green?

Listen to the session audio…

Other formats are available here

Speakers
Jenny Bird
research fellow, Institute for Public Policy Research; author of IPPR report, Green jobs: Prospects for creating jobs from offshore wind in the UK

Alexander Horn
economics editor, NovoArgumente; consultant (logistics, production and organisation), German automotive industry

Sam Robinson
social responsibility manager, eaga (the UK's leading provider of residential energy efficiency solutions)

Chair:
Dr Robert Clowes
chair, Mind & Cognition Group, Nova Institute of Philosophy, Lisbon University; chair, Lisbon Salon


Produced by
Recommended readings
Green Jobs: Prospects for creating jobs from offshore wind in the UK

The imperative to tackle climate change and drastically reduce emissions of greenhouse gases means that we need to have a radical rethink of how the UK economy will be structured in the future.

Jenny Bird, ippr, 14 April 2009

What would you pay for 400,000 new green jobs?

This New Green Deal is gonna cost

Ben Pile, The Register, 2 April 2009

A Green New Deal for saving America's soul

Thomas Friedman’s Hot, Flat, and Crowded captures the extent to which green thinking is ingrained in the psychology of the Western elite, especially in that seat of has-been power: the United States.

Josie Appleton, spiked, March 2009

7 Myths About Green Jobs

A team of US researchers surveyed the green jobs literature, analyzed its assumptions, and found that the special interest groups promoting the idea of green jobs have embedded dubious assumptions and techniques within their analyses.

Andrew P. Morriss, William T. Bogart , Andrew Dorchak and Roger E. Meiners, U Illinois Law & Economics Research Paper, 11 March 2009

A green fix?

If it was not environmentally incorrect to use the expression, it would probably be referred to as killing two birds with one stone.

Daniel Ben-Ami, Fund Strategy, 2 March 2009

Green new deal could ease triple crunch in finance, environment and resources

The UK economy faces a triple crunch: a recession triggered by a major credit crisis, the looming reality of runaway climate change and critical resource depletion. As a result we face serious challenges to our livelihoods and increasing threats to our fuel and food security.

Andrew Simms, new economics foundation, 21 July 2008

The Power of Green

How do our kids compete in a flatter world? How do they thrive in a warmer world? How do they survive in a more dangerous world? Those are, in a nutshell, the big questions facing America at the dawn of the 21st century.

Thomas Friedman, New York Times, 15 April 2007

Session partners





Battle of Ideas 2009 | session: Setting an Example: should teachers be role models?
Setting an Example: should teachers be role models?

Sunday 1 November, 12.30pm until 1.30pm, Lecture Theatre 2 Lunchtime Debates

The prevailing idea of a good teacher today seems to be a responsible person who ‘models good practice’ in private life as well as at work, acting as a ‘role model’ to children who would otherwise fall short or go off the rails in the face of the myriad temptations of modern British cities. (No drugs! No drink! No arguments!) This breaks with previous understandings of teachers as inspiring individuals, and even rebels with a cause to liberate the minds of the young from the dead weight of old ideas – a view captured in a film like Dead Poets Society or a play like Alan Bennett’s The History Boys. Socrates himself was charged with corrupting the young of Ancient Greece before he took the hemlock, but most of us still seem to think he was performing a useful public service. Recent disciplinary findings at the General Teaching Council, and the institutionalisation of Criminal Records Bureau checks, imply teachers must now focus as much on what type of characters they are as on what kind of lessons they deliver.

This all raises many interesting questions. Is a CRB certificate now more important that a PGCE?  Should all teachers ‘suit up’ and model ‘good practice’ and ‘interpersonal relations’ to their students? Can a teacher be irresponsible in private but responsible at work?  Indeed, should teachers even expect to have a division between their private and public lives when they do such an important job for society? Do the new ‘role model’ approaches work, or do they subtly impose a new conformity on teacher-student relations? And what does all this mean for the changing aim of education in modern Britain?

Speakers
Sarah Ebner
editor, Times Online education blog, School Gate; journalist and broadcaster.

Martin Johnson
deputy general secretary, Association of Teachers and Lecturers; author, Subject To Change: new directions for the school curriculum

Kevin Rooney
politics teacher and head of social science, Queen's School, Bushey; co-author, Who's Afraid Of The Easter Rising?

Chair:
Dr Mark Taylor
vice principal, East London Science School; London convenor, IoI Education Forum


Produced by
Kevin Rooney politics teacher and head of social science, Queen's School, Bushey; co-author, Who's Afraid Of The Easter Rising?
Dr Mark Taylor vice principal, East London Science School; London convenor, IoI Education Forum
Recommended readings
A bar too far? Drunkenness off duty won't do

It may not constitute a grave threat to academic freedom, but the freedom of academics to get drunk in their own time is being curtailed at Cardiff University.A new policy that warns against drunken behaviour out of hours has led to complaints that managers are trying to impose a teetotal lifestyle on staff.

Melanie Newman, Times Higher Education, 1 October 2009

Fifteen months for a foolish affair?

The jailing of a teacher who had a lesbian affair with a 15-year-old girl is a victory for legalism rather than justice.

Tim Black, spiked, 24 September 2009

Teaching feminism difficult considering today's role models

It’s hard to get children to become feminists when the teachers aren’t feminists themselves, but there is a way forward

Ellie Levenson, TES, 14 August 2009

The new code of conduct: is it wanted or needed?

GTC faces accusations that it’s extending its reach into teachers’ private lives

David Marley, TES, 17 July 2009

Incoming chair of teacher regulator warns on privacy

There must be no place for prying in redefined GTC remit, she vows

David Marley, TES, 29 May 2009

How important are role models?

A teacher, pupil and parent each express their views

Hester Lacey, Guardian, 11 November 2008

The potential of role-model education

Daniel Rose examines the role and potential of the educator as a role-model within both formal and informal education

Daniel Rose, the encyclopedia of informal education, 2004

Session partners



Battle of Ideas 2009 | session: From Macpherson to the rise of the BNP: Race Today?
From Macpherson to the rise of the BNP: Race Today?

Sunday 1 November, 12.30pm until 1.30pm, Student Union Lunchtime Debates

It is 10 years since the 1999 Macpherson Report in response to the murder of Stephen Lawrence. Equalities and Human Rights Commission Chief Trevor Phillips has said the Metropolitan Police is no longer ‘institutionally racist’ and that Britain is ‘by far the best place in Europe to live if you are not white’. There certainly seems to be less everyday racist violence and abuse now than there was 10 years ago. The Macpherson Report led to an explosion of ‘official anti-racism’, codes of conduct and race awareness training throughout British institutions. People can now be charged with ‘racially aggravated’ offences; race-hate is illegal; multiculturalism is on the school curriculum. More informally, those who exhibit what Macpherson called ‘unwitting prejudice, ignorance, thoughtlessness and racist stereotyping’ – whether they are Big Brother contestants, politicians, or TV presenters – are often hounded out of public life.

Yet many still worry that racism is a growing problem. The recent mini-upsurge of support for the far-right British National Party, and the election of two BNP MEPs, has caused concern, especially in the context of the recession. In July, the Home Affairs Committee contradicted Phillips by accusing the Met of continued ‘institutional racism’. Black people are even more likely to be stopped and searched by police today than in 1999, while 30% of black men are on the National DNA Database compared with about 10% of white men. Government ministers and teachers unions have launched campaigns against an alleged increase in racist bullying in schools, especially of Muslim children. Trevor Phillips himself argued Barack Obama would never have been elected prime minister in this country because of ‘institutional racism’ in the Labour Party.

Is racism on the rise and taking new forms, or is it an exaggerated bogeyman? Is the solution to prejudice and inequality legislative, is it cultural, or is it individual? If racism really is ‘unwitting’, then might we all unknowingly be (in Macpherson’s word) ‘infected’ by the disease? Is ‘racial awareness’ counterproductive?

Speakers
Karen Chouhan
race equality consultant; founder and director, Equanomics-UK; founder member and board director, 1990 Trust Roots Research Centre

Kenan Malik
writer and broadcaster; author, The Quest for a Moral Compass: A Global History of Ethics and From Fatwa to Jihad

Jack Tan
president, Students' Union, Royal College of Art

Chair:
Dr Shirley Dent
communications specialist (currently working with the British Veterinary Association media team); editor, tlfw.co.uk; author, Radical Blake


Produced by
Dr Shirley Dent communications specialist (currently working with the British Veterinary Association media team); editor, tlfw.co.uk; author, Radical Blake
Recommended readings
The new divide in British politics: Us and Him

Question Time was no victory for rigorous and free debate – it merely confirmed Nick Griffin’s elevation as the voodoo doll of public life.

Brendan O'Neill, spiked, 23 October 2009

Who's afraid of the BNP?

With two seats in the European Parliament the BNP has made a leap towards the political mainstream. But, asks Kenan Malik, should those who have so far shunned the party now engage with them?

Kenan Malik, BBC NewsMagazine, 29 September 2009

State-enforced ‘equality’ is damaging democracy

Yes, the BNP should be free to appear on Question Time, but there’s another, harder argument to be made: it must also be free to exclude non-whites.

Brendan O'Neill, spiked, 14 September 2009

Minister warns of 1930s-style fascists on Britain's streets

'Parallels' between rightwing groups planning protests in Muslim neighbourhoods and Oswald Mosley's incendiary marches

Paul Lewis, Matthew Taylor and Robert Booth, Guardian, 11 September 2009

Why I wouldn't ban BNP members from being teachers

Perhaps it's a foul thought, but barring people from jobs is the first step to witch-hunting in Britain

Nick Cohen, Observer, 28 June 2009

Censorship is the wrong way to combat BNP

Claire Fox argues that an illiberal obsession with silencing Nick Griffin and the British National Party in the run up to elections has won the party undeserved publicity. Andy Newman (editor, Socialist Unity) responds Claire Fox, Andy Newman, Index on Censorship, June 2009

Strange Fruit: Why Both Sides are Wrong in the Race Debate

A genetic study claims that Jews are more intelligent because of their history of money lending. There has recently been a massive upsurge in scientific racial research, and in "Strange Fruit", Malik reveals this rise is paradoxically due to the efforts of liberal anti-racism; a movement that celebrates human difference over human commonalities.

Kenan Malik, Oneworld Publications, 1 May 2009

In Macpherson's footsteps: a journey through British racism

After Stephen Lawrence's murder, a former High Court judge travelled round the country to produce the most significant report on racism in Britain for a generation. Ten years on, how much has changed?

Hugh Muir, Guardian, 21 February 2009

Twenty Years of Free Speech Wars

Malik and Modood give lectures exploring the impact of the Rushdie affair on our perceptions of free speech, multiculturalism and Islam; followed by reactions from Jo Glanville, Stephen Law, Amol Rajan, Mahelia Malik and Inayat Bunglawala. (audio) IoI event page

Institute of Ideas, Bishopsgate Institute, Index on Censorship, Internet Archive, 12 February 2009

The Macpherson report: summary

Macpherson's 70 proposals to take on our 'institutionally racist' police

Guardian, 24 February 1999

Session partners



Battle of Ideas 2009 | session: The Human Rights Act: litigation or emancipation?
The Human Rights Act: litigation or emancipation?

Sunday 1 November, 12.30pm until 1.30pm, Henry Moore Gallery Lunchtime Debates

The Human Rights Act 1998 enshrines in UK law the articles of the European Convention for the Protection of Human Rights and Fundamental Freedoms, which guarantees numerous individual rights, from the right to a fair trial to freedom of assembly. While most people support these things in principle, critics object to the Act on several grounds. Many are concerned that the convention weakens our capacity to deal effectively with crime and terrorism, while others object that the Act encourages a litigious culture, by codifying dubious entitlements. Some feel that making British law subject to a convention originating outside the country undermines national sovereignty, and have proposed a Bill of Rights to be drawn up in Britain itself, reflecting real public concerns. Still others believe the problem is that the Human Rights Act gives too much power to judges and lawyers at the expense of elected and accountable politicians. Supporters of the Act say that despite any imperfections, it does more to protect liberty than any alternative, and that without it our human rights would not be protected.

How has the Human Rights Act contributed to the wider debate about liberty? Has the codification of certain freedoms in the statute books galvanised or restricted society’s idea of freedom?  Is the human rights movement still effective in preserving human dignity, or is it now just a nice little earner for altruistic lawyers and NGOs? Have legal appeals taken the place of political activism? What is next for the debate on freedom and does the Human Rights Act have a place?

Speakers
Jean Candler
head of policy and public affairs, British Institute of Human Rights

Jonathan Cooper
human rights barrister, Doughty Street Chambers; editor, European Human Rights Law Review

John Fitzpatrick
professor of law and director, Kent Law Clinic, University of Kent, Canterbury

Joshua Rozenberg
legal commentator; columnist and blogger, Standpoint; columnist, Law Society Gazette; presenter, BBC Radio 4

Chair:
Luke Gittos
criminal lawyer; director of City of London Appeals Clinic; legal editor at spiked; author, Why Rape Culture is a Dangerous Myth: From Steubenville to Ched Evans


Produced by
Luke Gittos criminal lawyer; director of City of London Appeals Clinic; legal editor at spiked; author, Why Rape Culture is a Dangerous Myth: From Steubenville to Ched Evans
Recommended readings
Q&A with John Cooper

John Cooper is a member of the criminal and human rights Bar and is considered one of the leading barristers in London. He was recently nominated as Human Rights Barrister of the Year. John spoke to trainee barrister and Battle of Ideas committee member, Luke Gittos.

Luke Gittos & John Cooper, Independent Independent Minds, 19 November 2009

Enough poison about the Human Rights Act. It is Churchill's legacy

Instead of binning this maligned legislation, David Cameron should embrace it. It is thoroughly Conservative – our own bill of rights.

Peter Oborne, Guardian Comment is free, 5 October 2009

Moving on the human rights debate

Are human rights still the best mechanism for ensuring personal freedom, or are they now so insinuated into state institutions that they have lost their power to be subversive?

Luke Gittos, Culture Wars, 19 June 2009

Why human rights are wrong

As the Universal Declaration of Human Rights turns 60, many seem unsure whether to criticise Western governments for breaching it or to urge them to enforce it. The end result is that our understanding of rights has become degraded.

Philip Hammond, spiked, 25 December 2008

I'm ready to rip up Human Rights Act, declares Cameron

"In too many cases it has become close to impossible to deport foreign nationals that may pose a threat to the UK. It is wrong to undermine public safety by allowing the human rights of dangerous criminals to fly in the face of common sense."

Graeme Wilson, Daily Telegraph, 13 May 2006

Human rights win wider recognition in Britain

The issue of human rights is becoming part of our everyday lives, though public perception of what it means can often still remain hazy

Jason Bennetto, Guardian

Session partners



Battle of Ideas 2009 | session: Should physician-assisted dying be legalised?
Should physician-assisted dying be legalised?

Sunday 1 November, 12.30pm until 1.30pm, Upper Gulbenkian Gallery

The question of assisted dying has not been out of the media spotlight in recent months. Although the Assisted Dying for the Terminally Ill Bill was blocked by the House of Lords in 2006, a spate of TV dramas and documentary films have revived the debate about introducing a change to the law to assist terminally ill patients who request the ‘right to die’. Former Health Secretary Patricia Hewitt’s recent campaign to amend the Coroners and Justice Bill, campaigner Debbie Purdy’s recent legal victory, and Gordon Brown’s announcement that he is firmly opposed, have kept the issue in the headlines.

Proponents of assisted dying aim to give people the ability to control their destiny. But many are also concerned that loosening the law would be a slippery slope leading to an increasing prevalence of assisted suicide, and would open the door to euthanasia. Others worry a change to the law would signal a cultural acceptance of suicide more generally. Critics, both secular and religious, oppose any new legislation. They emphasise the value of life and argue for a focus on prolonging life or on palliative care, suggesting that legalising assisted dying would irretrievably transform the relationship between doctors and patients. Advocates of assisted dying retort that legalisation would allow the practice to be publicly regulated and scrutinised. Does the right to die at the time and manner that one wishes follow directly from the right to choose how one lives? Or should suicide always be discouraged? How does the concept of ‘dignity’ fit in to this discussion? And why has the assisted dying debate come to assume such cultural and political importance in recent years?


Listen to the session audio…

Other formats are available here

Speakers
Brendan O'Neill
editor, spiked; columnist, Big Issue; contributor, Spectator; author, A Duty to Offend: Selected Essays

Debbie Purdy
board member, Dignity in Dying; leading campaigner for right to assisted dying

Professor Raymond Tallis
fellow, Academy of Medical Sciences; author, philosopher, critic and poet; recent books include NHS SOS and Aping Mankind; chair, Healthcare Professionals for Assisted Dying

Dr Kevin Yuill
senior lecturer, history, University of Sunderland; author, Assisted Suicide: the liberal, humanist case against legalization

Chair:
Helen Birtwistle
history and politics teacher, South London school


Produced by
Helen Birtwistle history and politics teacher, South London school
Recommended readings
Why I changed my mind on assisted dying

As a doctor I used to think palliative care was the answer. Now I realise that keeping people alive can be unspeakably cruel.

Raymond Tallis, The Times, 27 October 2009

For pity’s sake, keep the assisted suicide law unclear

The terminally ill Chris Woodhead wants a way out but says the new guidelines may hinder rather than help.

Chris Woodhead, Sunday Times, 27 September 2009

It’s my life and I demand to end it when I want

Seventy years ago Sigmund Freud’s doctor helped him to die. Now more and more of us want that same final choice.

David Aaronovitch, The Times, 23 September 2009

Assisted suicide: the real slippery slope

A court case in Montana suggests that once you give the ‘right to die’ to terminally ill people, others will want it, too.

Kevin Yuill, spiked, 8 September 2009

'Physician assisted suicide should remain illegal'

Debating Matters Topic Guide: 'Ultimately, the debate is a moral one which, aside from the legal and medical issues, asks us to decide whether it is ever right for doctors to assist someone in bringing about their own death.'

Helen Birtwistle, Debating Matters, 1 September 2009

Should we have the right to die?

Debbie Purdy on why the 'right to die' ruling will help her live her life, while Brendan O'Neill says the right-to-die lobby is now a cause celebre and that assisted suicide is admitting defeat and killing hope...

Debbie Purdy and Brendan O'Neill, Big Issue, 13 August 2009

We need to take a wider view of 'the right to die'

It is right that doctors should fear the approbation of society when they take a life, for whatever reason. Society can be sympathetic when someone is on the edge of the bridge. But society should not cheer the push that sends that person to their death.

Shirley Dent, Independent Minds blog, 3 August 2009

Why I’m opposed to legalising assisted suicide

I will take my death into my own hands. The State has no business giving me the authority to die – or the authority to live

Matthew Parris, The Times, 1 August 2009

Huge public support for change in law to allow the right to die

Almost three quarters (74 per cent) of people want doctors to be allowed to help terminally ill patients to end their lives. Support is particularly strong among those aged 55 to 64.

Rosemary Bennett, The Times, 25 July 2009

Neither euthanasia nor suicide, but end-of-life choice

Emotive denunciations have blurred the issue. We need clear laws that allow assisted death as a rational, humane option

Sarah Wootton, Guardian, 23 June 2009

Session partners



Battle of Ideas 2009 | session: India's Future: Slumdogs or Millionaires?
India's Future: Slumdogs or Millionaires?

Sunday 1 November, 12.30pm until 1.30pm, Courtyard Gallery Lunchtime Debates

While India is showing signs of economic dynamism, its development is not without problems. Cities like Bangalore and Mumbai are implementing slum clearance, decanting large numbers of people into newly-built homes, a process involving costly infrastructure development as well as causing unrest. Some condemn this as gentrification; others argue the city should develop organically; still others suggest if it ain’t broke, why fix it? National Geographic explored Dharavi, the massive slum at the heart of Mumbai, and found ‘once you get accustomed to sharing 300 square feet of floor with 15 humans and an uncounted number of mice, a strange sense of relaxation sets in’. Following the success of Slumdog Millionaire, slum tourism has taken off, with highlights including gawping at a stall of six toilets serving 16,000 people.

Urban strategist Jeb Brugman says negative views of the slums reflect ‘a Raj or British period mentality’. For him, slums are centres of creativity and dynamism; necessary precursors to development. Indeed, the slum economy provides a sixth of India’s GDP, and slum-dwelling is no barrier to economic development. With the new Four Seasons hotel towering over the nearby shanty-towns, and land prices in Mumbai reaching record levels, change is certainly underway in Dharavi, but the contradictions of the Maximum City are clear, with bosses in luxury on one side of the road and slum-dwellers facing them in squalor.

In his best-selling book Imagining India: Ideas For A New Century, IT entrepreneur Nandan Nilekani notes ‘with a factory worker costing 80 per cent lower than averages in developed markets, India can become the next big source of manufacturing labour in the world’. So is India creating a society of equals, or relying on inequality and cheap labour to survive? Speaking symbolically of India’s relationship with the world, as well as its internal difficulties, Deepak Chopra echoes Aravind Adiga and asks whether ‘the slumdogs will one day rise up against the millionaires’. Will economic development raise the standards of living of the poorest in society or merely exacerbate income disparities? And is this merely an unfortunate but necessary stage of economic and social development that is nobody’s business but India’s?

Listen to the session audio…

Other formats are available here

Speakers
Parminder Bahra
poverty and development correspondent, The Times

Professor Stuart Corbridge
head, Development Studies Institute, LSE; co-author, Seeing the State: governance and governmentality in India

Dr Sunand Prasad
senior partner, Penoyre & Prasad LLP; immediate past president, RIBA

Chair:
Austin Williams
associate professor in architecture, XJTLU University, Suzhou, China; director, Future Cities Project; convenor, Bookshop Barnies; founding member of New Narratives


Produced by
Austin Williams associate professor in architecture, XJTLU University, Suzhou, China; director, Future Cities Project; convenor, Bookshop Barnies; founding member of New Narratives
Recommended readings
Two million slum children die every year as India booms

Save the Children says state-run health system is failing to give skilled care to poor.

Gethin Chamberlain, Observer, 4 October 2009

Slumdog Entrepreneurship

Westerners need to scratch beyond the surface of the films and superficial criticism. They need to see the real stories of heartbreak, innovation, and perseverance that make these harsh and unbending slums potential incubators of economic dynamism.

Samuel R Stanley, New Geography, 4 June 2009

It’s time to protect economic growth and safety of the poor

The popular, strong and stable government in Delhi raises the expectations of disaster victims and vulnerable households across India. Am Admi and Am Aurat expects progressive policies and firm decisions.

Mihir R Bhatt, Economic Times (India), 31 May 2009

Imagining India: Ideas for a new century

Nilekani reveals why India's huge population has now become her greatest strength; how information technology is bringing the benefits of globalization; why rapid urbanization is transforming social and political life; and how we can learn from India's difficult journey towards a single internal market.

Nandan Nilekani, Allen Lane, 30 April 2009

The Boom from The Bottom

Isolated from world trends, India's aspiring middle will help it grow through the credit storm

Jason Overdorf, Newsweek, 14 February 2009

Mumbai's slum solution?

The poor get a home in a block in a prime location, the companies make money and Mumbai's residents get a posh new city quarter. Theoretically at least, everyone wins.

Mukul Devichand, BBC News, 14 August 2008

The economics of violence: Growth with inequality

The World Bank claims that poverty in Asia has been halved between 1990 and 2003. But the story looks good only until you see the underbelly of this economic growth – growing inequality, violence and pollution.

John Samuel, infochange, April 2008

Session partners



Battle of Ideas 2009 | session: Abundant, Cheap, Clean... Contentious? Why is energy a battlefield today?
Abundant, Cheap, Clean... Contentious? Why is energy a battlefield today?

Sunday 1 November, 10.45am until 12.15pm, Lecture Theatre 1

On the campaign trail Obama declared America’s ‘addiction to foreign oil’ was destabilising both the Middle East and the climate and that the resulting ‘threat goes to the very heart of who we are as a nation, and who we will be.’ Energy has gone from being a technical question to a very public one, with everyone seemingly having an opinion on the issue. From environmental to security concerns, everything seems to boil down to energy – how much, where from and what type?

Coal is too dirty, oil is running out, gas is controlled by unreliable regimes, nuclear is too risky, biofuels push up food prices, big dams displace the poor, wind and solar seem too far off to make a difference now. Is it true that there are no good options? Do China’s ambitious new renewables targets point the way forward or is this just a drop in the ocean of a bigger energy quagmire?

Energy is basic to human industry, essential for everything from running computers to transport. The development of new energy sources has traditionally not been the subject of public concern and has at most been met with muted excitement, such as with the discovery of North Sea oil fields. Is it a positive development that such a practical problem has today infused discussions on everything from foreign policy and the environment to the ethics of personal behaviour? There is certainly demand for more energy. But even if this can be is secured, will it boost human prosperity by helping overcome scarcity, or will it simply accelerate the destruction of the planet?

 

Listen to the session audio…

Other formats are available here

Speakers
Thomas Deichmann
editor, NovoArgumente; author, Die Steinzeit steckt uns in den Knochen: gesundheit als erbe der evolution

Duncan McLaren
chief executive, Friends of the Earth Scotland; co-author, Tomorrow's World: Britain's share in a sustainable future

David Strahan
award-winning investigative journalist and documentary film-maker; author, The Last Oil Shock: a survival guide to the imminent extinction of petroleum man

Dr Jim Watson
director, Sussex Energy Group, University of Sussex; deputy leader, Tyndall Centre Climate Change and Energy Programme; co-author, China's Energy Transition

James Woudhuysen
visiting professor, London South Bank University

Chair:
Rob Lyons
science and technology director, Academy of Ideas; convenor, IoI Economy Forum


Produced by
Alex Hochuli communications consultant, researcher and blogger based in São Paulo
Recommended readings
Kill Oil

A carbon strategy the world can afford.

Peter W. Huber, Wall Street Journal, 17 September 2009

Britain facing blackouts for first time since 1970s

The looming problem in Britain is caused by the scheduled closure by 2015 of nine oil and coal-fired power plants. They are the victim of an EU directive designed to cut pollution.

Andrew Porter, Daily Telegraph, 31 August 2009

‘Peak Oil’ Is a Waste of Energy

We can’t let the false threat of disappearing oil lead the government to throw money away on harebrained renewable energy schemes or impose unnecessary and expensive conservation measures on a public already struggling through tough economic times.

Michael Lynch, New York Times, 24 August 2009

New Labour's power vacuum

The UK government's obsession with energy self-sufficiency and renewables looks set to lead to blackouts in the next few years.

James Woudhuysen, spiked, 19 August 2009

How long till the lights go out?

Thanks to its posturing politicians, Britain will soon start to run out of electricity. What should it do?

Economist, 6 August 2009

A Government still addicted to petrol

Why not bet on true sustainability: get serious about energy efficiency, renewables, electrification of transport and a European supergrid, and commit the sort of money they have recently been throwing at the banking industry?

David Strahan, Independent, 26 April 2009

Energise!

''If the world could be more thoughtful about energy supply, we could all afford to be thoughtless about our personal use of energy.'

James Woudhuysen and Joe Kaplinsky, Beautiful Books, 22 January 2009


Session partners



Battle of Ideas 2009 | session: We don't need no Sex Education
We don't need no Sex Education

Sunday 1 November, 10.45am until 12.15pm, Café

Sex education continues to be a controversial area of public policy. Jim Knight, the schools minister, now wants personal, social and health education (PSHE) to become a compulsory part of the syllabus for children from the age of five. Its aim is to support the development of ‘emotional literacy’ and ensure young people are better equipped ‘to navigate the complexities of modern life’. Consequently there will be an emphasis on teaching children to talk about personal relationships, and ‘outside professionals’ will be brought into schools to support this initiative. All this is on top of the existing programme of sex education that schools must deliver anyway, despite disagreements over its aims and usefulness.

Can sex education in schools address the various agendas inherent within it? What role should schools and parents play in socialising children in this regard? Are there areas of children’s lives where teachers should perhaps ‘leave those kids alone’?

Speakers
Simon Blake
chief executive, Brook; chair, Compact Voice, the voluntary sector network

Dr Hera Cook
lecturer, modern history, University of Birmingham; author, The Long Sexual Revolution: English women, sex and contraception 1800-1975

Dr Jan Macvarish
associate lecturer and researcher, Centre for Parenting Culture Studies, University of Kent; author, Neuroparenting: The Expert Invasion of Family Life

Professor David Paton
professor, industrial economics, Nottingham University Business School

Chair:
Bríd Hehir
writer, researcher and traveller; retired nurse and fundraiser


Produced by
Bríd Hehir writer, researcher and traveller; retired nurse and fundraiser
Recommended readings
Sex education must not be statutory

As the government's consultation on making sex education compulsory draws to a close, the director of the Family Education Trust, argues that the move would seriously undermine the role of parents.

Norman Wells, Daily Telegraph, 21 July 2009

Unbiased sex education is a child's right

Allowing faith schools to skew the curriculum in order to argue against homosexuality and sex before marriage is a mistake

Andrew Copson, Guardian, 28 April 2009

Independent Review of the proposal to make PSHE education statutory

Most schools have a strong commitment and have also made a considerable investment in their current practice and model of delivery. The effectiveness of these different models need further evaluation, but we want schools to retain the flexibility to deliver PSHE education in a way that best meets the needs of their pupils, whilst promoting and spreading good practice.

Sir Alasdair Macdonald, Healthyschools.gov.uk, 1 April 2009

Teenage girls don't choose pregnancy

The success of Hackney and Blackburn's sex education scheme disproves the link between deprivation and teen mums.

Madeleine Bunting, Guardian, 26 February 2009

Stopping sex-crazed children from becoming teenage parents

A teacher writes from the classroom on her struggle to stop her sex-crazed young charges from becoming teenage parents like 13-year-old Alfie Patten

Kate Sawyer, Sunday Times, 22 February 2009

Government Response to the Report by the Sex and Relationships Education (SRE) Review Steering Group

'The implementation of the actions set out in this response will be an important factor in our efforts to promote all children and young people’s well-being and to maximise the contribution that schools make to helping children and young people achieve the 5 Every Child Matters outcomes.'

DCSF, 1 February 2008

Sex and Relationships Education Framework

The Sex and Relationships Education Framework is the core document of the Sex Education Forum. It is also for professionals who work with children and young people in all settings and who want to support the effective development of SRE policy and practice.

Sex Education Forum, November 2003

Session partners



Battle of Ideas 2009 | session: Lording It Over Us: the political rise of the judiciary
Lording It Over Us: the political rise of the judiciary

Sunday 1 November, 10.45am until 12.15pm, Henry Moore Gallery

The rise of judicial activism is controversial. Increasingly judges speak out against government decisions such as the proposal to extend the detention period for terrorist suspects to 42 days. Is this good for justice or bad for democracy?

Can we trust the judges? will explore the traditional relationship between the judiciary and Parliament, their work in interpreting the law irrespective of political pressures, in a fair and impartial way. Speakers will argue whether judicial activism is an important safety valve in a democracy or a step too far in their role.

In the past decade laws have been passed which have undermined the role of the judges by laying down sentencing rather than allowing for judicial discretion. It is argued that many changes in the justice systems around the world were spearheaded by judges taking a stand against bad laws. Are English judges protecting us and upholding justice more than politicians?

The new Supreme Court allows judges more independence from politics. But will judicial power undermine justice? Lord Woolf’s view that ‘there are even limits on the supremacy of parliament which it is the courts’ inalienable responsibility to identify and uphold’. Should democrats be worried?

Speakers
John Cooper
leading criminal and human rights barrister; regular columnist, The Times and Observer; editor, Criminal Bar Quarterly

John Fitzpatrick
professor of law and director, Kent Law Clinic, University of Kent, Canterbury

Alex Novarese
editor, Legal Week

Joshua Rozenberg
legal commentator; columnist and blogger, Standpoint; columnist, Law Society Gazette; presenter, BBC Radio 4

Chair:
Tessa Mayes
investigative journalist; director, The Queen & Us


Produced by
Tessa Mayes investigative journalist; director, The Queen & Us
Recommended readings
Our new supreme court is a judge short – but far from underpowered

The fear expressed by critics is that the new court will try to assert its power over parliament and to confront the executive. In theory, that should not happen.

Marcel Berlins, Guardian, 28 September 2009

Festival Buzz

"The Battle of Ideas goes from strength to strength. The intensity, variety and depth of debate, sustained for an entire weekend, makes for a unique experience charging the intellectual batteries for the rest of the year."
Raymond Tallis, emeritus professor of geriatric medicine, Manchester University

Battle of Ideas 2009 | session: Nudge Nudge, Nag Nag: the new politics of behaviour
Nudge Nudge, Nag Nag: the new politics of behaviour

Sunday 1 November, 10.45am until 12.15pm, Upper Gulbenkian Gallery Keynote Controversies

The question of whether it is legitimate for governments to coerce people for their own good has long been an important one in politics. Ever since the birth of liberal thought, some critics have worried that, freed from the constraints of authority or tradition, people will make the ‘wrong choices’. From censorship of ‘dangerous’ books and ideas to prohibition of alcohol and restrictions on smoking, there is a long tradition of authoritarian intervention to save people from themselves. Thaler and Sunstein’s influential 2008 book, Nudge, sparked an ongoing debate about a new brand of ‘libertarian paternalism’. Rather than actually coercing people, the authors argue that by giving thought to ‘choice architecture’, governments can nudge people into making better decisions for themselves, society and the environment.

From setting defaults to encourage employees to pay into pension funds, to using psychological tricks to encourage recycling, the authors suggest various ways of encouraging desired behaviour without compromising autonomy. Is it childish to object to such ‘nudges’, as long the final decision rests with us, or do they represent a patronising affront to our individual autonomy? Is this really libertarian, or just a more subtle form of the ‘nanny state’, as confident as ever that the experts knows best? Who decides what kind of behaviour is desirable or otherwise? Shouldn’t such questions be subject to open debate rather than handed over to geeky ‘choice architects’ who treat the public as lab rats? Is ‘nudging’ a means of governing without winning any arguments? Or should we be happy to go with the flow in such trivial matters?


Listen to the session audio…

Other formats are available here

Speakers
Philip Collins
chair of the trustees, Demos; deputy chief leader writer, The Times; senior visiting fellow, LSE; co-author, The Liberal Republic

Dr Stuart Derbyshire
reader in psychology, University of Birmingham; associate editor, Psychosomatic Medicine and Pain

Tim Montgomerie
co-editor, ConservativeHome; co-founder, ConservativeIntelligence.com; member, advisory board, Centre for Social Justice

Peter Taylor-Gooby
professor of social policy, University of Kent, Canterbury; director, ESRC Social Contexts and Responses to Risk programme; author, Reframing Social Citizenship

Chair:
Claire Fox
director, Academy of Ideas; panellist, BBC Radio 4's Moral Maze; author, I Find That Offensive


Produced by
Claire Fox director, Academy of Ideas; panellist, BBC Radio 4's Moral Maze; author, I Find That Offensive
Dolan Cummings associate fellow, Academy of Ideas; author, That Existential Leap: a crime story (forthcoming from Zero Books)
Recommended readings
Nudging Recycling From Less Waste to None

Across the nation, an antigarbage strategy known as “zero waste” is moving from the fringes to the mainstream, taking hold in school cafeterias, national parks, restaurants, stadiums and corporations.

Leslie Kaufman, New York Times, 19 October 2009

A nudge too far

Rewarding people for healthy living has earned results but the long-term implications are alarming.

Libby Brooks, Guardian Comment is free, 15 October 2009

So just how is Cameron going to give power to the people?

There's a paradox in aiming to improve services even as the Government does less.

Steve Richards, Independent, 9 October 2009

Cash incentive for slimmers more effective than diets, study claims

Paying people to lose weight works better than diet plans, research suggests. A scheme being trialled by the NHS that rewards slimmers with cash or shopping vouchers could be more than twice as effective, it is claimed.

David Rose, The Times, 5 October 2009

No smoking. Do not obstruct the doors. Mind the gap......Oh, do stop nagging!

Nagging Britain: When you walk out of the front door, suddenly you're surrounded by beeps and announcements telling you how you should behave.

Harry Mount, Daily Mail, 2 September 2009

Don’t bank on the City optimists being right

Forecasts and figures are a confidence trick. Bankers have a lot riding on us believing things are getting better – or worse.

Antonia Senior, The Times, 7 August 2009

Obama's Nudgers Vs. Evil Health-care Lobby

If Obama's nudgers are the 'Benevolent Nudgers', who are those 'Evil Nudgers'? The GOP? Or everyone who opposes the President? Or are both sides 'Evil Nudgers' in disguise? Yes, and here's why.

Paul B Farrell, Fox Business, 13 July 2009

Nudge Nudge, Think Think: Two Strategies for Changing Civic Behaviour

To be a successful practitioner of 'nudge' it appears you might need to understand what makes deliberation work and to be an effective practitioner of 'think' you may need to understand the dynamics of 'nudge'.

Peter John, Graham Smith and Gerry Stoker, The Political Quarterly, July 2009

Nudge: Improving Decisions About Health, Wealth and Happiness

Every day we make decisions: about the things that we buy or the meals we eat; about the investments we make or our children’s health and education; even the causes that we champion or the planet itself. Unfortunately, we often choose poorly...

Richard H Thaler & Cass R Sunstein, Penguin, 4 March 2009

‘Nudging’: the very antithesis of choice

‘Libertarian paternalism’ represents a retreat from political debate, and the rise of a base psychological agenda that wants to make us conform on green, health and lifestyle issues.

Martyn Perks, spiked, 19 December 2008

Session partners





Battle of Ideas 2009 | session: Can the arts save the economy?
Can the arts save the economy?

Sunday 1 November, 10.45am until 12.15pm, Student Union

In 1998 the DCMS placed the ‘creative industries’ at the heart of the nation’s economic future. Over ten years later, in the midst of recession, Prime Minister Gordon Brown declared, ‘In the coming years, the creative industries will be important…for our national prosperity’. The recent Creative Britain Strategy aims to move the creative industries from the margins to the mainstream of the UK economy. This is cited as good news for the arts world, in the face of impending savage cuts. Now the arts seem keen to rebrand themselves as wealth creators rather than a sectional interest in need of state subsidy. While there has been something of a backlash against this ‘instrumentalist’ approach to the arts, the Old Vic’s Kevin Spacey was widely applauded for provocatively stating: ‘The question is not “What can the economy do for our arts?” but “What can the arts do for our economy?”’. Spacey claimed artists have neglected using ‘the economic impact of arts and culture as the centrepiece’ of appeals for support.

Research from Nesta suggests the ‘cultural sector’will grow by 4% between 2009 and 2013 - double the estimate for the rest of the economy. But critics argue this is this more a reflection of the weakness of British economic activity, rather than of a dynamism to the arts per se. Lord David Puttnam’s famous boast that ‘Our rock musicians contribute more to the balance of payments than the steel industry’ is telling. Moreover, James Heartfield points out in the book Culture Vultures that early estimates of creative industry earnings were inflated by counting the likes of computer software (nearly half the total). Today the arts are grouped together with a range of commercial and often non-artistic activities – advertising, design, publishing, video games, television and radio – under the heading ‘creative industries’.

What about the value of art in its own terms? Can the arts shoulder the burden of regenerating economic life? Can the ‘creative industries’ save the economy, or is this just wishful thinking and special pleading? What are the problems with expecting culture to be commercially successful?

Listen to the session audio…

Other formats are available here

Speakers
James Boyle
former controller, BBC Radio 4; founder, Edinburgh UNESCO City of Literature and Glasgow UNESCO City of Music; chair, British Council Scotland

Dr Richard Howells
reader in Culture, Media and Creative Industries, King's College London

Angus Kennedy
convenor, The Academy; author, Being Cultured: in defence of discrimination

Karl-Erik Norrman
founder and secretary-general, European Cultural Parliament; former Swedish ambassador; author, The Gala Concert, Verdi/Wagner 200 years

Douglas Slater
writer; critic; political strategist and policy advisor; co-founder, Stonewall

Chair:
Dr Tiffany Jenkins
writer and broadcaster; author, Keeping Their Marbles: how treasures of the past ended up in museums and why they should stay there


Produced by
Dr Tiffany Jenkins writer and broadcaster; author, Keeping Their Marbles: how treasures of the past ended up in museums and why they should stay there
Recommended readings
Tracey Emin: Stuff your 50% tax, I’m taking my tent to France

Tracey Emin, one of the leading lights of the Britart movement, is preparing to quit the country because of Gordon Brown’s 50% tax rate for the wealthy.

Richard Brooks, The Times, 5 October 2009

Boris Johnson calls for voluntary museum charges as he joins Kevin Spacey for arts boost

Boris Johnson has called for voluntary museum charges on the American model to combat the effects of the recession.

Ben Bailey, London Evening Standard, 22 September 2009

Is this really peer review? Arts Council seeks theatre assessors

The Arts Council is recruiting 150 theatregoers to help them make funding decisions. But can we rely on their reports?

Lyn Gardner, Guardian Unlimited, 10 September 2009

The University’s Crisis of Purpose

The world economic crisis and the election of Barack Obama will change the future of higher education. Even as universities, both public and private, face unanticipated financial constraints, the president has called on them to assist in solving problems from health care delivery to climate change to economic recovery.

Drew Gilpin Faust, New York Times, 1 September 2009

New Endowment Chairman Sees Arts as Economic Engine

“When you bring artists into a town, it changes the character, attracts economic development, makes it more attractive to live in and renews the economics of that town”

Robin Pogrebin, New York Times, 7 August 2009

I won't apologise for defending the arts

It’s not charity or empty philanthropy. It’s an investment in jobs and our collective soul.

Kevin Spacey, The Times, 9 May 2009

Is it Art?

From the economic point of view, this was the year video games overtook music and video, combined, in the UK. The industries’ respective share of the take is forecast to be £4.64 billion and £4.46 billion.

John Lanchester, London Review of Books, 1 January 2009

Creative Britain - New Talents for the New Economy

Creative Britain: New Talents for a New Economy is a strategy document for the Creative Industries: it documents 26 commitments, which outline how the Government will take action to support the creative industries.

DCMS, DCMS, February 2008

Culture Vultures: Is UK Arts Policy Damaging the Arts?

Politicians and policy-makers take every opportunity to talk up the arts' importance to society...the arts are now not only good in themselves, but are valued for their contribution to the economy, urban regeneration and social inclusion.

Munira Mirza (ed.), Policy Exchange, 3 January 2007


Session partners





Battle of Ideas 2009 | session: Philosophy 4 Children: can kids do Kant?
Philosophy 4 Children: can kids do Kant?

Sunday 1 November, 10.45am until 12.15pm, Lecture Theatre 2

Philosophy for children (P4C) is a growing movement that seems to many teachers to restore faith in the education system. It is said to be able to create ‘little big minds’ and to enable children to become critical, caring, creative and collaborative.  No more learning by rote for endless tests; here is a chance to develop young minds to think for themselves.  Philosophy is employed as a key resource to improve the quality of children’s thinking and to help them explore ‘how things are’ and ‘who they are’, to ‘learn more from [their] experience and make better use of [their] intelligence’. Its popularity has increased since the introduction of SEAL (Social and Emotional Aspect of Learning) programmes in schools, which, along with other initiatives, attempts to develop critical thinking.  When Education minister Ed Balls overhauled the primary curriculum recently, cutting the number of traditional subjects to make room for ‘concept-based’ lessons, many saw this as a chance to embed the new ‘personal, learning and thinking skills’ (PLTS) into teaching. 

Various training schemes present philosophy for children as a way of introducing them to rigorous thinking, but some critics see it as another example of the therapeutic turn in education – a recent trend towards prioritising self-esteem and emotional well-being rather than traditional subject-teaching. When children’s ‘personal development’ is given equal status to English and maths, is there a danger that philosophy is reduced to little more than infantile ‘self help’ mantras?  Others think philosophy is simply too difficult for children. How realistic is it for children to ‘do philosophy’ when traditionally the subject has been withheld from the young until at least university level precisely because it requires levels of abstract thinking way beyond the average pre-pubescent youth, let alone infants?  Will the P4C movement wise up children or dumb down philosophy? 

Speakers
Dr James Gledhill
fellow in political theory, LSE; co-convenor, IoI Postgraduate Forum

Dr Joanna Haynes
senior lecturer, education, University of Plymouth; author, Children as Philosophers

Dr Stephen Law
head, Centre for Inquiry UK; senior lecturer in philosophy, Heythrop College, University of London; author, The War for Children’s Minds

Chair:
Professor Dennis Hayes
professor of education, University of Derby


Produced by
Professor Dennis Hayes professor of education, University of Derby
Recommended readings
Young Philosophers

When Socrates pondered the immortality of the soul, Gopnik argues, he should have considered the sort of afterlife that parents can obtain through their children.

Anthony Gottlieb, New York Times, 6 August 2009

Philosophy for Children

Philosophy prior to high school seems relatively uncommon around the world. This may suggest that serious philosophical thinking is not for pre-adolescents, for two principal reasons. However, both of these can be challenged.

Stanford Encyclopedia of Philosophy, 8 June 2009

Children as Philosophers

This book was written with the belief that philosophy, the use of reason and argument in seeking truth and knowledge of reality, can assist with children's thinking, speaking and listening skills as well as providing a stimulus and structure for morals enquiry within the PSE/citizenship curriculum.

Joanna Haynes, Routledge, 22 November 2001


Session partners



Battle of Ideas 2009 | session: The changing meaning of work – from work-life balance to unemployment
The changing meaning of work – from work-life balance to unemployment

Sunday 1 November, 10.45am until 12.15pm, Courtyard Gallery

For years, it has been argued that employees need to adjust their ‘work-life balance’ in favour of leisure and family life. Policy has been preoccupied with ‘workaholics’, work-related stress, ‘presenteeism’ and employers’ responsibility to ensure employees did not neglect their parenting duties or personal lives. Patricia Hewitt, when Secretary of State for Trade and Industry, called over-working a British disease. Today’s economic climate has thrown this question into relief, however. The prospect of the enforced leisure of unemployment or compulsory four day weeks might take the gloss off ‘work-life balance’. As India Knight wrote in The Sunday Times, we don’t know what work is until we lose it. Others look for a silver lining to the recession: Patrick Collinson, editor of Guardian Money, suggests we ‘imagine what an extra 52 days off each year would do to your work-life balance’. After all ‘what’s the point of economic growth if we can’t have more leisure?’ Perhaps we should see the crisis as an opportunity to restructure our lives, to downshift and realise there’s more to life than work. 

In his book The Pleasures and Sorrows of Work, Alain de Botton argues work gives us a sense of identity, allows us to make friends outside of our private life and – lo and behold – can even be ‘full of flirtation and erotic drama’! The meaning we attach to work changes over time, however. The Protestant work ethic and portfolio career-building are both telling of their particular times. When modern women demanded equal rights and full-time jobs, they recognised work as an escape from the private world of domestic drudgery. Today, demands for flexible working hours have been championed as a feminist solution for working mums against the ‘macho’ environment of work, work, work. Is it time to reassess the meaning of work? Should we challenge today’s view of work as problematic, even toxic, and make the case for the real importance of work? Are individuals more creative in their private lives or in the sphere of work? How is the recession changing our relationship with work?

Listen to the session audio…

Other formats are available here

Speakers
Professor Julia Hobsbawm
honorary visiting professor, Cass Business School; founder, Editorial Intelligence

Stephen Overell
associate director, The Work Foundation; project leader, The Good Work Commission; journalist and author, Inwardness: the rise of meaningful work

Michael Owens
commercial director, Bow Arts Trust; owner, London Urban Visits; formerly, head of development policy, London Development Agency

Dr John Philpott
public policy director and chief economist, Chartered Institute of Personnel and Development; economist and labour market analyst

Chair:
Para Mullan
senior project manager, Chartered Institute of Personnel and Development; FCIPD


Produced by
Para Mullan senior project manager, Chartered Institute of Personnel and Development; FCIPD
Recommended readings
Bosses to be told to offer more part-time work for parents

Work and pensions secretary Yvette Cooper wants firms that advertise in jobcentres to consider part-timers.

Gaby Hinsliff, Observer, 25 October 2009

Work/ life balance good for the bank balance

Companies that foster a good work/ life balance enjoy a 20% earnings boost, a study claims...

Management Today, 14 October 2009

The recession could trigger a shift in our thinking about work and families

What do the global recession, MPs' expenses and greed more broadly have to do with working families? They are symbols of our time that have the potential to trigger a radical rethink of prevailing assumptions and values - about how work is done, how it affects families, communities and other institutions in everyday life, and how fundamental changes could be made.

Suzan Lewis, Human Resources, 7 October 2009

We don’t know what work is – until we lose it

It’s funny how, even a few months ago, talking about work outside the office was the dullest form of interaction, on a par with asking adults whether they had any hobbies or pets. All that has changed. At parties or dinners, work is the sole topic of conversation.

India Knight, The Times, 5 April 2009

The benefits of a four-day week

Henry Ford brought the five-day week to the US. Might Toyota, through expediency rather than design, now be bringing the three-day weekend to Europe?

Patrick Collinson, Guardian, 28 March 2009

About time for change

The smartest and most forward-looking organisations will see that by putting work-life balance at the heart of their cultures and their strategic plans they will not only be satisfying employees and creating more equitable workplaces, but increasing their productivity and responding competitively to significant changes, such as our growing 24/7 lifestyle.

Alexandra Jones, The Work Foundation, 1 June 2003

Session partners



Battle of Ideas 2009 | session: The Jury's Out: juries and the future of justice
The Jury's Out: juries and the future of justice

Sunday 1 November, 9.45am until 10.30am, Henry Moore Gallery Breakfast Banter

Earlier this year a criminal trial took place without a jury for the first time in an English Crown Court. This was made possible by a change to the law in 2007, one of several key changes in recent years to the way trials are conducted in the UK. The anonymity of witnesses is now enshrined in statute, the family courts have widened their doors to the public, and a series of high profile cases has raised questions about the extent to which the media may negatively influence trial proceedings. Like other changes, the proposal to do without juries in some cases is presented as a practical response to changing circumstances. Does an expansive media environment make impartiality impossible, for example? Or are some cases too complicated for ordinary citizens to understand?

Critics argue that the right to be tried by a jury of one’s peers is essential to justice. The principle that we should be judged by our fellow citizens – people like us – rather than patrician and often aloof judges has long been cherished as the mark of a free society. But is the idea that justice is best arrived at by ‘twelve good men and true’ (or even women) simply unrealistic in trials involving ever-more complicated legal, financial and scientific details? Is justice best left to the experts? Or should society’s notions of a fair trial not be chopped and changed in response to problems faced by our justice system? Should we feel protective over the traditional rights of the courtroom?  Do we need further legislation to control what information reaches a jury, rather than abolishing juries altogether? What changes if any should be made to the jury system? How is the administration of justice changing, and is it still fair? 

Speakers
Marcel Berlins
columnist, Guardian; writer & presenter, Law in Action; visting professor, media law, City University and Queen Mary's College

Rob Lyons
science and technology director, Academy of Ideas; convenor, IoI Economy Forum

Marguerite Russell
barrister, specialising in human rights and criminal law; founder member, Garden Court Chambers

Chair:
Luke Gittos
criminal lawyer; director of City of London Appeals Clinic; legal editor at spiked; author, Why Rape Culture is a Dangerous Myth: From Steubenville to Ched Evans


Produced by
Luke Gittos criminal lawyer; director of City of London Appeals Clinic; legal editor at spiked; author, Why Rape Culture is a Dangerous Myth: From Steubenville to Ched Evans
Recommended readings
Lord Judge calls for jury system that caters for computer generation

The jury system is threatened by the internet generation, who no longer get their information from listening to people speaking, the Lord Chief Justice warned yesterday.

Frances Gibb, The Times, 21 October 2009

Jurors find it hard to tell right from wrong, says study

The legal standard for dishonesty needs to be reviewed because jurors’ widely different views may be affecting the outcome of trials, criminologists say.

Mark Henderson, The Times, 8 September 2009

Trial by jury? Not in these two cases

Should we be worried? Is this yet another instance of the threatened erosion of the right to jury trial, as evidenced by the government's attempts – so far resisted – to withdraw long fraud trials from juries?

Marcel Berlins, Guardian, 22 June 2009

A new politics: Direct democracy

In court, the jury system works. Why not bring unelected people into public bodies too?

Julian Glover, Guardian, 20 May 2009

Juries on trial: can we trust these people?

Roy Amlot, QC, a former Bar Council chairman, argues that independent juries are essential to the democratic process

Roy Amlot, The Times, 1 July 2003

Twelve angry men can be wrong

The jury system is seen as a pillar of English justice. But does that mean we can't challenge its decisions?

Louis Blom-Cooper, Observer, 21 October 2001

Judge without jury: Diplock trials in the adversary system

What would become of the criminal trial if the jury was taken out of the picture? This is precisely what occurred in Northern Ireland in 1973, after a Commission recommended that cases connected with the 'troubles' be tried by a judge alone.

John Jackson and Sean Doran, Oxford University Press, 1995

Juries in Cases of Serious and Complex Fraud

We have been debating the use of juries in complex fraud trials on and off for 20 years. However, the discharge of the jury in the Jubilee Line corruption trial, after sitting for 18 months without returning verdicts, has put the question back under the spotlight.

George Staple QC, The Barrister

Session partners



Battle of Ideas 2009 | session: The Ugly Game? The Old Firm, football rivalry and the politics of behaviour
The Ugly Game? The Old Firm, football rivalry and the politics of behaviour

Sunday 1 November, 9.45am until 10.30am, Café Breakfast Banter

Glasgow’s ‘Old Firm’ have the oldest enduring rivalry in club football. Rangers and Celtic emerged as two of the most successful teams in Scotland in the late nineteenth century, and their city rivalry was later intensified by social tensions in the West of Scotland between the Protestant working class and Irish Catholic immigrants, especially after the First World War. Sectarian divisions arguably consolidated each club’s support, ensuring their dominance of Scottish football for most of the 20th century and into the 21st. The Old Firm have thus become emblematic of sectarianism, described as ‘Scotland’s secret shame’, and numerous politicians, church leaders and campaigners have sought to put an end to the offensive songs and chants, from IRA slogans to ‘The Sash’ and the ‘Famine Song’.

Does the Old Firm rivalry still reflect sectarianism in Scottish society, or is ‘football sectarianism’ simply a variation of the normal football rivalry found in other cities across the world? Is abusive behaviour at football matches a harmless ‘safety valve’ for pent up aggression, or an expression of dangerous passions in need of policing? Is there a danger of sanitising football, and ruining the enjoyment of fans in a bid to stifle ultimately meaningless banter?

Speakers
Kieron Brady
equality consultant, Celebrate Identity, Challenge Intolerance; former Republic of Ireland international footballer

Dolan Cummings
associate fellow, Academy of Ideas; author, That Existential Leap: a crime story (forthcoming from Zero Books)

Kevin Rooney
politics teacher and head of social science, Queen's School, Bushey; co-author, Who's Afraid Of The Easter Rising?

Chair:
Dr Tim Black
editor, Spiked Review


Produced by
Kevin Rooney politics teacher and head of social science, Queen's School, Bushey; co-author, Who's Afraid Of The Easter Rising?
Dolan Cummings associate fellow, Academy of Ideas; author, That Existential Leap: a crime story (forthcoming from Zero Books)
Recommended readings
Cowardly Rangers turn a blind eye to bigotry

Following Sunday's Old Firm game at Ibrox I find myself with a highly unusual dilemma on my hands, which is this: should a journalist report a supporter for indulging in bigoted or racist chanting?

Graham Spiers, Times Online, 6 October 2009

Amazon withdraws Man U chants CD

Amazon have withdrawn a CD of Manchester United chants from sale on its website because of complaints that some of the lyrics are offensive.

Newsbeat, BBC Radio 1, 4 September 2009

Banning order over Famine song

A Rangers fan has been given two years probation and a football banning order for singing the 'Famine Song'.

BBC News, 16 December 2008

Murray: 'Obsession' is harming football

Sir David Murray believes an 'obsession' with sectarianism and racism is having a detrimental effect on Scottish football, and has called for a focus on the positive aspects of the game.

Martin McMillan, Herald Scotland, 4 November 2008

Defending Rangers from football’s Thought Police

A lifelong supporter of Celtic explains why he’s opposed to the intensified policing of Rangers fans’ chants and behaviour by a gang of moralistic politicians, cops and commentators.

Kevin Rooney, spiked, 27 February 2008

It's Rangers for Me?

There are relatively few serious books about Rangers FC. This is surprising given the current upsurge in sports studies and sports writing. 'It's Rangers For Me?' seeks to fill the gap

Ronnie Esplin and Graham Walker (eds.), Fort Publishing, 22 October 2007

How I rattled the deniers

The venom that greeted my speech on religious prejudice was the work of Scotland's bigoted press.

James MacMillan, Guardian Comment is free, 7 August 2006

No surrender to UEFA bureaucrats

What is UEFA's Control and Disciplinary Body based in Nyon, Switzerland, doing debating the content of Rangers FC's chants?

Dolan Cummings, spiked, 25 April 2006

Festival Buzz

"The Battle of Ideas goes from strength to strength. The intensity, variety and depth of debate, sustained for an entire weekend, makes for a unique experience charging the intellectual batteries for the rest of the year."
Raymond Tallis, emeritus professor of geriatric medicine, Manchester University

Battle of Ideas 2009 | session: The Battle over Video Games
The Battle over Video Games

Sunday 1 November, 9.45am until 10.30am, Courtyard Gallery Breakfast Banter

Opinion is divided as to the value of video games. For many social critics games like ‘Grand Theft Auto’ and ‘Manhunt’ are a ‘toxic’ influence, corrupting both young and not-so-young by conveying antisocial messages and diverting them from more ‘healthy’ outside pursuits. There are regular calls for particularly violent games to be censored. Others are more positive. They argue that video games are a unique form of entertainment, their interactivity opening up enormous possibilities. Jonathan Blow goes so far as to suggest that they ‘inherently teach’; others argue that they act as a ‘mind gym’, and games are even being developed for use in school lessons. Some advocates of video games are more positive still, taking steps toward making an art form of it. Compelling experiments with setting are being performed, and groups like the American ‘Kokoromi’ are exploring how game rules can deliver an artistic statement and directly evoke emotion.

Do video games have a significant effect on society? If they do, can we trust and encourage their makers to use their abilities responsibly? Or will gaming, no matter what how commercially successful, remain a shallow and even dangerous hobby?

Listen to the session audio…

Other formats are available here

Speakers
David Cooke
director, British Board of Film Classification

Dr Dan Pinchbeck
researcher, game design and analysis, University of Portsmouth; director, thechineseroom (game development team)

Alice Taylor
commissioning editor, education, Channel 4; former vice president, digital media, USA West Coast, BBC Worldwide; blogger, Wonderland

Hamish Todd
doctoral student; software developer and biologist at the Center for Systems and Sythetic Biology, University of Edinburgh

Chair:
Toby Marshall
A Level Film Studies Teacher; PhD researcher in sociology of education, UCL Institute of Education


Produced by
Toby Marshall A Level Film Studies Teacher; PhD researcher in sociology of education, UCL Institute of Education
Hamish Todd doctoral student; software developer and biologist at the Center for Systems and Sythetic Biology, University of Edinburgh
Recommended readings
Call Of Duty: Modern Warfare 2 leaked footage analysis

However shocking the leaked footage of Call Of Duty: Modern Warfare 2 is, we should reserve judgement until all the facts are in.

Tom Hoggins, Telegraph, 29 October 2009

The Xbox factor: gaming's role in future assessment

In a proposal that will be music to many students' ears, a vice-chancellor has suggested that computer games should play a greater role in assessment.

Melanie Newman, Times Higher Education, 1 October 2009

Average video gamer is 35, fat and depressed

Playing video games is often regarded as a pastime for children and teenagers. But the average age of players is now 35 - and it seems they have similar problems to their younger counterparts, according to researchers.

Daily Mail Reporter, Daily Mail, 21 August 2009

Gaming for Glory at Greenbelt

Doubtless there will be critics who see gnostic heresy in the eternal and complex battle between dark and light in the fantasy worlds of video games. But in an era where it has become a new heresy to judge that there is any qualitative difference at all between individuals, especially children, a medium that teaches that there are indeed such things as good and bad, right and wrong, has in my view to be Good News.

Ruth Gledhill & Paul Govan, Times Online, 13 August 2009

Is it Art?

From the economic point of view, this was the year video games overtook music and video, combined, in the UK. The industries’ respective share of the take is forecast to be £4.64 billion and £4.46 billion.

John Lanchester, London Review of Books, 1 January 2009

The Game Design of Art

Many of Ebert's opponents have unwittingly invoked a fragment of Ebert's argument in defense of games: Anything can be art, therefore games are art. End of discussion.

Jason Rohrer, The Escapist, 24 August 2008

Who Says Video Games Have to be Fun? The Rise of Serious Games

Headline-grabbing subjects like global warming or third-world poverty aren’t the only ones tackled in serious games. Some of the genre’s most captivating offerings take on topics that are a bit further from the limelight.

Bryan Ochalla, Gamasutra, 29 June 2007

Are Video Games Art?

While many video games probably should not be considered art, there are good reasons to think that some should be, and that the debates concerning the artistic status of chess and sports offer some insights into the status of video games

Aaron Smuts, Contemporary Aesthetics, 2 November 2005

Copycat arguments

Claims that videogames such as Manhunt can provoke players to commit violence have been made many times before – but they remain unproven.

Graham Barnfield, spiked, 30 July 2004

Are Videogames Art?

The debate of whether or not games are an art form is a lively one, but it's not unique. The same debate has raged from the early to late 20th century with the Ready-made art objects of Marcel Duchamp to the controversial photographs of Robert Mapplethorpe.

Chi Kong Lui, Gamecritics.com, 27 May 2003

Reality Bytes: Eight Myths about Video Games debunked

A large gap exists between the public's perception of video games and what the research actually shows. The following is an attempt to separate fact from fiction.

Henry Jenkins, PBS

Session partners



Battle of Ideas 2009 | session: Risky Business: does financial engineering add up?
Risky Business: does financial engineering add up?

Sunday 1 November, 9.45am until 10.30am, Lecture Theatre 1 Breakfast Banter

We are living through the most severe recession since the 1930s, a recession that is understood by many as having its roots in the activity of financial services.
It is still unclear how the fall out of the credit crunch will affect financial activity in the years to come. George Soros, echoing the views of Warren Buffett, has famously described Credit Default Swaps as financial weapons of mass destruction. The world’s governments are looking to regulate derivative trading, which is deemed too risky to be left to merely the self-interest of shareholders to monitor.

While blaming the banks for taking on too much risk, it is easy to forget that over recent decades the role of the world’s financial centres has increasingly involved the better management of risk. The length and stability of the global economic boom ending in the credit crunch was in no small part attributed to the ability of these financial centres to help businesses generate higher returns for lower levels of risk. Those days are gone.

Financial products are designed to transfer risk from businesses to the financial sector, or to reallocate risk more efficiently within the market. So a financial intermediary – for a fee – will assume or pass on to others the risks of the volatile oil markets, leaving airlines to concentrate on flying goods and passengers around the world. Has this type of activity now been discredited altogether? Have the legitimate business drivers behind financial activity been swamped by financial activity with no purpose? As Gao Xiqing, an adviser to the Chinese premier, remarked in 2000, ‘if you look at every one of these [derivative] products, they make sense. But in aggregate, they are bullshit’. Were we merely too ambitious in the pretence that financial engineers could not only hedge away the risk of volatile commodities markets, but also hedge away the systemic risk of a global slowdown?

Speakers
Dr Paul Wilmott
researcher and educator, finance and risk management; author, editor and consultant, quantitative finance and mathematics; founding partner, Caissa Capital hedge fund; founder, Applied Mathematical Finance

Chair:
Stuart Simpson
financial services professional; researcher and writer, emerging economies and quantitative finance


Produced by
Stuart Simpson financial services professional; researcher and writer, emerging economies and quantitative finance
Recommended readings
Three cheers for the death of old economics

The orthodox mathematical model took no account of reality. The new George Soros institute should bring back some sanity.

Anatole Kaletsky, The Times, 28 October 2009

Risky Business: Paul Wilmott on the financial sector and the economic crisis

'The Duke of York said recently that the bonuses are minute in the scale of things, but that misses the point. It's not the size of the bonuses that matters it's the behaviour of the bankers that results from these bonuses.'

Stuart Simpson, Independent Independent Minds, 28 October 2009

Do not ignore the need for financial reform

The efficient market hypothesis holds that financial markets tend towards equilibrium and accurately reflect all available information about the future. Deviations from equilibrium are caused by exogenous shocks and occur in a random manner. The crash of 2008 falsified this hypothesis.

George Soros, Financial Times, 25 October 2009

Wanted: new model for markets

Don Putnam, designer of investment products since the 1970s, points to the most fundamental of lessons learnt from last year’s global financial implosion: markets are “defined by their participants as much as they are by their mechanics” and it is people’s motivations that ultimately count.

John Authers, Financial Times, 30 September 2009

In defence of financial innovation

Many appear to think that the increasing complexity of financial products is the source of the world financial crisis. In response to it, many argue that regulators should actively discourage complexity.

Robert Shiller, Financial Times, 28 September 2009

How Did Economists Get It So Wrong?

Few economists saw our current crisis coming, but this predictive failure was the least of the field’s problems. More important was the profession’s blindness to the very possibility of catastrophic failures in a market economy.

Paul Krugman, New York Times, 2 September 2009

How toxic finance created an unstable world

We still lack a conclusive theory about the global financial crisis, but we know a lot more than we did in August 2007. We know, for example, that simple monocausal explanations are at best insufficient and most likely paranoid and lazy.

Wolfgang Münchau, Financial Times, 23 August 2009

Revenge of the Nerd

Over the past decade, and increasingly since the crash, Wilmott has cultivated a loyal following of truth-seeking converts from the failed school of thought that the entire world can be turned into Greek symbols, plugged into equations, priced and predicted.

Matthew Philips, Newsweek, 29 May 2009

Fool's Gold: How Unrestrained Greed Corrupted a Dream, Shattered Global Markets and Unleashed a Catastrophe

Part real-life thriller, part investigation and expose, this searing narrative takes us deep inside the shadowy world of complex finance - a perfect storm for the credit crunch

Gillian Tett, Little, Brown, 30 April 2009

In Plato's cave: A special report on the future of finance

Mathematical models are a powerful way of predicting financial markets. But they are fallible

The Economist, 22 January 2009

Financial Modelers' Manifesto

A spectre is haunting Markets – the spectre of illiquidity, frozen credit, and the failure of financial models.

Paul Wilmott, Paul Wilmott's blog, 8 January 2009

Paul Wilmott Introduces Quantitative Finance

An accessible introduction to the classical side of quantitative finance specifically for university students. Iincludes carefully selected chapters to give the student a thorough understanding of futures, options and numerical methods.

Paul Wilmott, John Wiley & Sons, 29 June 2007

Cowardly Capitalism: The Myth of the Global Financial Casino

Given the usual depiction of capitalism as an all-devouring monster, it comes as something of a shock that it might be thought of more as the lily-livered lion in The Wizard of Oz.

Daniel Ben-Ami, John Wiley & Sons, 9 March 2001

wilmott.com FORUMS

Wilmott is the leading resource for the Quantitative Finance community; presenting the very latest thinking in derivatives, risk modeling and quantitative techniques, and bringing together both academics and practitioners to further develop these ideas, share information, and critique theory through practice. Discussion occurs through a very active online forum.

wilmott.com

Session partners



Battle of Ideas 2009 | session: The Empty Staffroom: has teaching lost its magic?
The Empty Staffroom: has teaching lost its magic?

Sunday 1 November, 9.45am until 10.30am, Lecture Theatre 2 Breakfast Banter

On the face of it, when you walk around schools at break-time, or glance into classrooms during lessons, they look just as they always did. But things have changed. Schools are not the places they were. In many schools, teachers no longer socialise or discuss education informally in the staffroom, meeting instead in formal meetings where the agenda is set. They communicate with colleagues by email, or have brief interchanges in the cupboard they call the departmental office. In class, their lessons have become more formulaic and their relationships with pupils have due regard for the ‘boundaries’ prescribed by school policies. Even the way teachers dress is more formal, in keeping with the business ethos many schools promote. What has driven these changes, and what effect do they have on education? Is the idea of teaching as an inspiring vocation a thing of the past?

Speakers
Dr Gerry Czerniawski
senior lecturer, secondary education, Cass School of Education, University of East London; author, Successful Teaching 14-19: theory, practice and reflection

Richard Swan
writer and academic

Dr Mark Taylor
vice principal, East London Science School; London convenor, IoI Education Forum

Chair:
Dr Shirley Lawes
researcher; consultant and university teacher, specialising in teacher education and modern foreign languages; Chevalier dans l’ordre des Palmes Académiques


Produced by
Dr Shirley Lawes researcher; consultant and university teacher, specialising in teacher education and modern foreign languages; Chevalier dans l’ordre des Palmes Académiques
Recommended readings
Waving the white flag for history risks a self-fulfilling prophecy

Recent debates on the teaching of history imply a subject under attack and on the defensive with claims that it is in danger of being merged into a kind of humanities

Mark Taylor, TES, 2 October 2009

Keep teachers’ personal lives private

Teachers should resist the General Teaching Council’s new code of conduct telling them how to behave outside of work.

David Perks, spiked, 9 September 2009

Teachers face MOT every five years to prove fitness to teach

Government introduces new licence to teach amid widespread changes to English school system

Polly Curtis, Guardian, 30 June 2009

Expel these managers from UK schools

Labour’s targets culture in schools means hefty salaries for managers and uninspiring education for kids.

David Perks, spiked, 3 June 2009

Why we do what we do

'Returning to the game last year, I was struck by how assessment for learning has become a viral philosophy'

Phil Beadle, Guardian, 21 April 2009

The Corruption of the Curriculum

Traditional subject areas have been hi-jacked to promote the government's social goals, instead of imparting a body of academic knowledge to their students according to this new report

Frank Furedi, Shirley Lawes, Michele Ledda, Chris McGovern, Simon Patterson, David Perks and Alex Standish, Civitas, June 2007

Overcoming the resistances to innovation in the classroom

The classroom and the school have become multi-disciplinary, dynamic and nurturing spaces for learning and education. Well, this may seem unproblematic, but on closer inspection this perception of education in UK classrooms becomes more troubled.

Nick Soucek, Futurelab, 1 February 2007

Festival Buzz

"The Battle of Ideas goes from strength to strength. The intensity, variety and depth of debate, sustained for an entire weekend, makes for a unique experience charging the intellectual batteries for the rest of the year."
Raymond Tallis, emeritus professor of geriatric medicine, Manchester University

Battle of Ideas 2009 | session: Question Time: What Next?
Question Time: What Next?

Sunday 1 November, 6.40pm until 7.30pm, Upper Gulbenkian Gallery What next for...?

The 2009 Battle of Ideas will finish with a question time session, where five of the festival speakers will be asked to name the two biggest challenges they think society will face over the next year, before taking questions from the audience.

The Battle of Ideas is more than a ‘talking shop’, or even a festival. It’s a declaration: that ideas matter and it’s time to get serious. If we are really to shape the future through debate, however, we need to think about challenges beyond the festival weekend itself. As the aim of the festival is to understand the world with a view to changing it for the better, we need to identify the key social trends affecting every aspect of life, without getting bogged down in the minutiae of everyday policy.

Speakers and audience alike will be asked to initiate a conversation that will carry on over the coming year about what matters and what needs to be investigated, interrogated and challenged.


Listen to the session audio…

Other formats are available here

Speakers
James Boyle
former controller, BBC Radio 4; founder, Edinburgh UNESCO City of Literature and Glasgow UNESCO City of Music; chair, British Council Scotland

Anthony Horowitz
author and creator, Alex Rider and Power of Five novels; creator and screenwriter, Midsomer Murders, Foyle's War and Collision; journalist; critic

Professor Susan Neiman
director, Einstein Forum; author, Moral Clarity: a guide for grown-up idealists and Evil in Modern Thought

Dr Katherine Rake
CEO, Family and Parenting Institute

Dr James Panton
head of politics, Magdalen College School, Oxford; associate lecturer in politics and philosophy, Open University; co-founder, Manifesto Club

Chair:
Claire Fox
director, Academy of Ideas; panellist, BBC Radio 4's Moral Maze; author, I Find That Offensive


Produced by
Claire Fox director, Academy of Ideas; panellist, BBC Radio 4's Moral Maze; author, I Find That Offensive
Session partners



Battle of Ideas 2009 | session: Battle of Ideas 2009 festival drinks reception
Battle of Ideas 2009 festival drinks reception

Saturday 31 October, 6.45pm until 9.30pm, Royal College of Music

The Royal College of Music, one of the world’s leading conservatoires, will host the Battle of Ideas 2009 reception in its recently renovated Grade II listed Concert Hall with live performances from some of the College’s most talented young performers.

18.45-21.00
Royal College of Music Amaryllis Fleming Concert Hall

19.15
Welcome speeches by Claire Fox (director, Academy of Ideas), Professor Colin Lawson (director, RCM), Elaine McCrimmon (alcohol policy manager, SABMiller), Drs Astrid Wissenburg (director of communications and information, ESRC), and Dr Tom Ziessen (public engagement adviser, Wellcome Trust).

19.30-19.50
Performance by Ilya Movchan (violin) and Yulia Vorontsova (piano)

Elgar’s ‘Sonata for Violin and Piano op. 82’
-‘Romance (Second movement)’

‘Concert Fantasy on themes from Porgy and Bess (George Gershwin)
(1898-1937)
Arrangement by Igor Frolov (b 1937)

PRODUCED BY: Mary Cosgrave and Shirley Dent

Throughout the evening:
Jazz provided by the RCM Jazz Trio

DIRECTIONS to the RCM from the Battle of Ideas


View Larger Map

Speakers
Claire Fox
director, Academy of Ideas; panellist, BBC Radio 4's Moral Maze; author, I Find That Offensive

Professor Colin Lawson
director, Royal College of Music; period clarinettist; author, Mozart: Clarinet Concerto and Brahms: Clarinet Quintet

Elaine McCrimmon
alcohol policy manager, SAB Miller

Drs Astrid Wissenburg
director, communications and information, ESRC

Dr Tom Ziessen
senior national programmes adviser, Wellcome Trust

Chair:


Produced by
Mary Cosgrave Professional Relations Manager, Royal College of Music.
Dr Shirley Dent communications specialist (currently working with the British Veterinary Association media team); editor, tlfw.co.uk; author, Radical Blake
Session partners







Battle of Ideas 2009 | session: Revolutions Balloon Debate
Revolutions Balloon Debate

Saturday 31 October, 5.15pm until 6.30pm, Student Union

Three hundred years after the Industrial Revolution, there’s no doubt it has changed almost everything about our lives, from food to how often we talk to our Mum. Since then, there have been many other revolutions – French, American, Russian, for a start…

The ‘green revolution’ that transformed 20th century agriculture means we can feed billions easier than our ancestors fed thousands, and the internet revolution makes instantaneous, planet-wide communication something we take for granted. Fifty years ago, the Cuban revolution established a challenge to the American Way on its own doorstep, and the Sexual revolution sent shockwaves though Western morality that are still rumbling. But which revolution, social, political or technological, has done most to transform human life?

Our revolutionaries are:
- Sexual Revolution: Maria Grasso
- Industrial Revolution: Lee Jones
- English Revolution: Tara McCormack
- Scientific Revolution: Robin Walsh
- French Revolution: Charlie Winstanley
- American Revolution: Kevin Yuill

Speakers
Dr Maria Grasso
lecturer in politics and quantitative methods, Department of Politics, University of Sheffield; author: Generations, Political Participation and Social Change in Western Europe

Dr Lee Jones
lecturer, international relations, Queen Mary, University of London

Dr Tara McCormack
lecturer in international politics, University of Leicester; author, Critique, Security and Power: the political limits to emancipatory approaches

Robin Walsh
graduate medical student; co-founder, Sheffield Salon

Charlie Winstanley
history student, University of Sheffield; former member, Socialist Workers' Party

Dr Kevin Yuill
senior lecturer, history, University of Sunderland; author, Assisted Suicide: the liberal, humanist case against legalization

Chair:
Timandra Harkness
journalist, writer & broadcaster; presenter, Futureproofing and other BBC Radio 4 programmes; author, Big Data: does size matter?


Produced by
Timandra Harkness journalist, writer & broadcaster; presenter, Futureproofing and other BBC Radio 4 programmes; author, Big Data: does size matter?
Session partners







Battle of Ideas 2009 | session: Africa and Aid: the Effects of the Recession
Africa and Aid: the Effects of the Recession

Saturday 31 October, 5.15pm until 6.30pm, Lecture Theatre 1

The global economic crisis is hitting the poorest parts of the developing world hard. The relatively high growth Africa has enjoyed in recent years is slowing as demand for the continent’s resources wanes, and foreign direct investment barely trickles in. There is a danger that the downturn will kill off the possibility of economic growth and leave Africa dependent on aid, just as NGOs and aid agencies fear donors will put aid on the back burner as the recession hits their own bank balances. But while some worry that the era of aid for international development is over, critics argue that it doesn’t help anyway, and that in order to spur development, Africans should just say no to aid and build up their own economies. Zambian economist Dambisa Moyo, for example, argues that Western aid simply perpetuates poverty in Africa, and calls instead for trade with China, accessing capital markets, and microfinance.

Critics say aid breeds corruption, fosters dependency and stifles growth. Meanwhile some aid agencies reject the idea that economic growth is the only means to develop. Others make aid conditional on ‘good governance’. With aid budgets under threat, with aid agencies be still more beholden to Western government agendas? Should we call for more aid, or kiss it goodbye and look to investment instead, even in the context of global recession? Should we be less concerned about the form the cash takes and where it’s from as long as it’s there? What kind of external assistance might help or hinder development?

Listen to the session audio…

Other formats are available here

Speakers
Benny Dembitzer
international development consultant; co-director, Ethical Events; author, The Attack on World Poverty

Ceri Dingle
director, WORLDwrite & WORLDbytes

Gibril Faal
chairman, African Foundation for Development; founder, RemitAid

Chair:
Viv Regan
managing editor, spiked


Produced by
Viv Regan managing editor, spiked
Recommended readings
The Attack on World Poverty: Going Back to Basics

This book tries to look squarely at some of the problems of development that everyone - from the South and from the North - has tried, and is still trying, to address, and some that we are avoiding altogether.

Benny Dembitzer, Green Print, 9 November 2009

Do starving Africans a favour. Don’t feed them

There is famine in Kenya and Ethiopia again. Sending food and emergency relief will make things worse in the long term.

Sam Kiley, The Times, 23 October 2009

East Africa hit by hunger crisis as aid agencies run short of funds

As needs rise, the ability of aid agencies to respond is being limited by the global economic downturn, which has led some donor governments to scale back aid, and by the higher priority other donors attach to the crises in Afghanistan and Pakistan.

Barney Jopson and Javier Blas, Financial Times, 29 September 2009

Bill Gates: Don't cut aid due to recession

ONE, the advocacy group backed by Gates and rock musicians Bob Geldof and Bono released a report attacking several G8 nations for meeting financial aid goals, set in 2005, to countries in sub-Saharan Africa.

CNN, 11 June 2009

Foreign aid: Recession renews donor debate

Rather than phasing out aid, it is becoming clear that western governments will be asked to increase significantly the scope of support to avoid stagnation and a reversal of recently improved social indicators.

Richard Lapper, Financial Times, 1 April 2009

Dead Aid: Why aid is not working and how there is another way for Africa

In this provocative and compelling book, Dambisa Moyo argues that the most important challenge we face today is to destroy the myth that Aid actually works. In the modern globalized economy, simply handing out more money, however well intentioned, will not help the poorest nations achieve sustainable long-term growth.

Dambisa Moyo, Allen Lane, 29 January 2009


Session partners



Battle of Ideas 2009 | session: Debating Matters Competition showcase debate: "Copyright Benefits the Arts"
Debating Matters Competition showcase debate: "Copyright Benefits the Arts"

Saturday 31 October, 5.15pm until 6.30pm, Café

Involving sixth form students from two schools experienced in the Academy of Ideas and Pfizer Debating Matters Competition, the debate will showcase its innovative format with a debate on the role of copyright law.

300 years since the Statute of Anne first enshrined copyright as a concept in UK law, the development of the internet has sharpened the debate on the value of intellectual property. None more so in the field of the arts, where Picasso’s maxim ‘Great artists steal’ has been plagiarised by more than one artist down the years.

In July 2009 Amazon sparked uproar when it remotely deleted thousands of sold copies of 1984 from its users’ new Kindle e-book, on the basis it violated the book’s copyright. JK Rowling and Damien Hirst have both recently come under fire as for suing other artists for plagiarising or mocking their ideas. The Design and Artists Copyright Society (DACS) argue that such wealthy artists are the exception, and that small royalty payments are often the only way for struggling artists to support themselves.

This year Lord Carter’s long-awaited Digital Britain report has proposed rigorous laws to fight online piracy. It follows shortly after the Gowers Review of Intellectual Property which argued that copyright is needed to ‘incentivise’ creativity. But with more and more artists giving their work away for free online under agreements such as Creative Commons, is this necessarily true? Do we need to defend copyright to allow artists the freedom to flourish, or condemn it for limiting their creativity

FOR: Kings Norton Girls’ School, Birmingham. Teacher: Helen Rickard

AGAINST: Woodhouse College, London. Teacher: Margery Gretton

Judges

Cory Doctorow (novelist; co-editor, boingboing.net; author, Content: selected essays on technology, creativity, copyright and the future of the future)

Marcus Lanyon (artist, writer and musician; finalist, Saatchi Gallery & Channel 4’s 4 New Sensations)

Sandy Starr (communications officer, Progress Educational Trust)

 

Speakers
Isobel Bates
student, Kings Norton Girls' School

Anna Muncey
student, Kings Norton Girls' School

Joe Edwards
student, Woodhouse College, London

Brook Hewett
student, Woodhouse College, London

Chair:
Justine Brian
director, Debating Matters Competition


Produced by
Justine Brian director, Debating Matters Competition
Recommended readings
Denying physics won’t save the video stars

Technology is making file sharing easier and easier. It will take more than unfair laws and harsh punishments to stop it.

Cory Doctorow, The Times, 30 October 2009

Shorter copyright would free creativity

If we want to nurture Britain's amazing creative talents then we must have much shorter copyrights to bring into the public domain millions of orphaned books to reduce prices and to enable music, books and films to be enjoyed and reworked by others.

Victor Keegan, Guardian, 7 October 2009

Advantage Google

Three hundred years ago, Daniel Defoe offered a memorable image for the relationship between authors and their work: “A Book is the Author’s Property, ’tis the Child of his Inventions, the Brat of his Brain.”

Lewis Hyde, New York Times, 2 October 2009

Lily Allen: my message for big stars who back piracy...

‘It’s all right for established musicians, but file sharing will strangle new talent’

Lily Allen, The Times, 16 September 2009

Copyright benefits the arts DMC Topic Guide

An article about the recent J.K. Rowling court case reported that ‘Judge Robert Patterson looked a little bemused that a case on copyright law had turned into a discourse on the writer’s art.’ But art’s relationship to both its creator and wider society are at the heart of copyright.

David Bowden, Debating Matters, 2 January 2009

Copyright in a Digital Age

FORA.tv, 2 November 2008

Content: Selected Essays on Technology, Creativity, Copyright and the Future of the Future

Readers will discover how America chose Happy Meal toys over copyright, why Facebook is taking a faceplant, how the Internet is basically just a giant Xerox machine, why Wikipedia is a poor cousin of "The Hitchhikers Guide to the Galaxy", and how to enjoy free e-books.

Cory Doctorow, Tachyon Publications, 1 January 2008


Session partners



Battle of Ideas 2009 | session: Rethinking Therapy Culture: changing the subject?
Rethinking Therapy Culture: changing the subject?

Saturday 31 October, 5.15pm until 6.30pm, Upper Gulbenkian Gallery Keynote Controversies

According to the latest British Social Attitudes survey, fears that Britain has become a ‘therapy culture’ are completely unfounded. Its research found that although more adults and young people like to talk about their emotions compared to the past, and think this is a good thing, there is no evidence that they are using higher levels of therapeutic support. The survey therefore concludes that fears of a ‘therapy culture’ are unfounded.

Arguably, however, this misses the point about what a therapy culture is. If ‘therapy culture’ does not stand out as a distinct aspect of contemporary society, perhaps this is because it has become internalised in all areas of life. In Britain and America, therapeutic assumptions permeate lifestyle magazines, television and popular literature, with therapeutic ‘problem-solving courts’ in the US, interventions to develop emotional well-being and resolve conflict in schools, colleges and universities, parenting and anger management classes, courses in emotional literacy and well-being. Counselling is even touted as a suitable response to rising unemployment in the face of recession. Meanwhile, therapeutic assumptions and practices are embedded in aid interventions, truth and reconciliation commissions, reconstruction programmes in war-torn countries and rehabilitation programmes for soldiers.

There is very little criticism of these developments, or even recognition that they represent a distinct cultural trend. Are people simply becoming more empowered and responsible for their emotional well-being? What are the positive benefits of interventions for emotional well-being here and abroad? Is attention to emotional well-being a progressive sign of social justice? Or does it undermine our capacity to cope with life without official support?


This session is co-sponsored by the ESRC with Oxford Brookes University and the University of Birmingham.

Listen to the session audio…

[NB: Poor quality audio from 00:50 to 2:10. Opening speeches from 08:15]
Other formats are available here

Speakers
Nicola Barden
head of counselling, University of Portsmouth; former chair, British Association for Counselling and Psychotherapy

Kathryn Ecclestone
professor of education, University of Sheffield; author, Governing Vulnerable Subjects in a Therapeutic Age (forthcoming)

Professor James L Nolan
professor of sociology; chair of department of anthropology and sociology, Williams College; author, The Therapeutic State: justifying government at century's end

Professor Andrew Samuels
professor, analytical psychology, University of Essex; training analyst, Society of Analytical Psychology

Chair:
Professor Dennis Hayes
professor of education, University of Derby


Produced by
Kathryn Ecclestone professor of education, University of Sheffield; author, Governing Vulnerable Subjects in a Therapeutic Age (forthcoming)
Recommended readings
Therapy Culture? Attitudes towards emotional support in Britain

Has Britain actually witnessed the

Simon Anderson, Julie Brownlie and Lisa Given, SAGE Publications, 2009

Legal Accents, Legal Borrowing: The International Problem-Solving Court Movement

Why are American criminal justice innovations so influential even in countries characterized by strong dislike of American cultural imperialism? When legal institutions are imported from abroad is it possible to filter out wider cultural assumptions and practices?

James L. Nolan, Princeton University Press, 21 April 2009

The tyranny of emotional etiquette

The critique of Frank Furedi’s Therapy Culture in the current British Social Attitudes survey misunderstands the thrust of Furedi’s argument, and the extent to which emotional conformism has gripped modern Britain.

Jennie Bristow, spiked, 22 March 2009

The Dangerous Rise of Therapeutic Education

The silent ascendancy of a therapeutic ethos across the education system and into the workplace demands a book that serves as a wake up call to everyone.

Kathryn Ecclestone & Dennis Hayes, Routledge, 4 July 2008

Therapy culture

In recent decades virtually every sphere of life has become subject to a new emotional culture. Professor Furedi suggests that the recent cultural turn toward the realm of the emotions coincides with a radical redefinition of personhood.

Frank Furedi, Routledge, 2002

The Therapeutic State: Justifying Government at Century's End

An analysis of the commingling of the therapeutic and political cultures in America looking at trends such as the emotivist ethic, the pathologization of human behavior and the rise of a new priestly class in the state.

James L. Nolan, New York University Press, 31 January 1998


Session partners







Battle of Ideas 2009 | session: School Science Education: an experiment gone wrong?
School Science Education: an experiment gone wrong?

Saturday 31 October, 5.15pm until 6.30pm, Courtyard Gallery

Peter Mandelson, Secretary of State for Business, Innovation and Skills, used the Science Museum’s 100th birthday celebrations in June to argue that ‘the future competitiveness of this country depends on the excellence of its science’. Gordon Brown too wants to shift the UK economy away from financial services and towards science and technology; he has vowed not to let science become a ‘victim of the recession’. Specifically he identified school science as key and pledged to ensure 90% of state schools teach physics, chemistry and biology as separate subjects within five years so Britain can produce ‘the great scientists of tomorrow’.

Yet it is barely three years since the introduction of the 21st century science GCSE curriculum throughout state secondary schools, which many argue bowdlerised science subjects. Intended to make the subject more ‘relevant’ to teenagers, the GCSE includes class discussions on climate change and cloning. But what about hard science? The new qualification gives priority to the analysis of media representations of science rather than the school laboratory experiment. Exam watchdog Ofqual has suggested reforms have dumbed down science. A recent study by Score, (the Science Community Representing Education), found some exam questions required no scientific knowledge whatsoever: chairman Sir Alan Wilson said the amount of maths in involved was ‘woefully inadequate’, and some ‘correct’ answers ‘did not reflect correct science’.

Is politicians’ rhetorical commitment to school science dependent on the idea that science will rescue UK plc from recession? Is the only defence of academic science its economic utility rather than the value of studying science for its own sake? Have we lost our belief in the importance of science as a universal approach to the study of nature?

Listen to the session audio…

Other formats are available here

Speakers
David Perks
founder and principal, East London Science School; director, the Physics Factory

Professor Peter Main
director, education and science, Institute of Physics

Alexandra Ballard
head of science, Castle School, Thornbury, South Gloucestershire

Dr Simon Foster
science teacher, Wentworth College; runner-up, NESTA FameLab 2009

Charlie Carter
head of chemistry, Emanuel School, South West London

Chair:
Craig Fairnington
associate fellow, Academy of Ideas; university finance and accommodation officer


Produced by
Claire Fox director, Academy of Ideas; panellist, BBC Radio 4's Moral Maze; author, I Find That Offensive
David Perks founder and principal, East London Science School; director, the Physics Factory
Recommended readings
A science education experiment gone wrong?

The recent review of the National Curriculum for 11-14 year olds means there is now no formal requirement to test scientific knowledge and understanding whatsoever prior to GCSEs. The entire Key Stage 3 science assessment regime asks teachers to assess pupils so called skills rather than knowledge and understanding.

David Perks, The Times Eureka Zone, 29 October 2009

Teach science for science's sake

Replacing physics, chemistry and biology with lessons in 'scientific literacy' will make children more wary of science in general.

David Perks, spiked, 15 August 2006

Session partners



Battle of Ideas 2009 | session: Rhyme, Rhythm and Blues: poets and lyricists in perfect harmony?
Rhyme, Rhythm and Blues: poets and lyricists in perfect harmony?

Saturday 31 October, 5.15pm until 6.30pm, Henry Moore Gallery

‘Read some Byron, Shelly and Keats
Recited it over a Hip-Hop beat
I’m having trouble saying what I mean
With dead poets and drum machines’

Natasha Bedingfield’s ‘These Words’ provokes much mirth from literature scholars. But despite the occasional cringe, song lyrics have traditionally had a close relationship with poetry. Evelyn Waugh enjoyed Cole Porter’s ‘Kiss Me, Kate’ as much as ‘The Taming of the Shrew’, while countless modern musicians, from Paul McCartney to Tupac Shakur, have published poems.

When once rock singers such as Patti Smith or Jim Morrison would search for gravitas by reaching for lines from Blake or Rimbaud, now it is poets who seem eager to return the favour. Former Poet Laureate Andrew Motion has long campaigned for Bob Dylan’s lyrics to be studied as part of the literature syllabus, while live literature evenings frequently mix the two forms together. Meanwhile award-winning poets like David Harsent and Sean O’Brien have been lauded for their libretti for recent operas.

With the popularity of rap and confessional singer-songwriters having blurred the lines between poetry and lyrics, can we separate the two as art-forms? Many would argue that the words don’t matter if the tune is good: but what are the possibilities or limitations for wordsmiths in a generation reared on pop and dominated by the iPod?

Speakers
Siddhartha Bose
poet; performer; PhD student on the grotesque in the School of English and Drama at Queen Mary, University of London.

Inua Ellams
poet; award-winning playwright; graphic artist; geek

David Harsent
poet; Forward Prize winner 2005, Legion; visiting professor, Sheffield Hallam University

Barb Jungr
singer, writer and performer; CDs include, The Man in the Long Black Coat and From Stockport to Memphis

Chair:
David Bowden
associate fellow, Academy of Ideas; culture writer


Produced by
David Bowden associate fellow, Academy of Ideas; culture writer
Recommended readings
Standing up for pure poetry

As Joanna Lumley records an album of poetry, and more performance poets are taking to the stage, is verse undergoing a revival?

Iain Hollingshead, Telegraph, 9 October 2009

A life in poetry: Roger McGough

'We got cheesed off at being referred to as the pop brigade - I suppose because the poetry could be appreciated by my mother or my aunties'

James Campbell, Guardian Books Blog, 22 August 2009

Adrian Mitchell – a poet who made things happen

He was for me an essential inspiration and example of the intimate relationship between poetry and song.

John Burnside, Guardian Books Blog, 24 December 2008

Lyrics poetry?

Songs and poems began life as inseparable twins, but they are now - for the most part - thoroughly estranged

Rob Woodard, Guardian Books Blog, 20 December 2007

Andrew Motion explains why Bob Dylan's lyrics should be studied in schools

Bob Dylan's debut on the schools curriculum could be just what's needed to turn pupils who listen to rock music on to the full range of poetry

Andrew Motion, The Times, 22 September 2007

Ripping yarns

On his new LP, Mike Skinner - aka The Streets - talks about eating a burger, washing his jeans and charging up his mobile. Literature professor John Sutherland says these narratives put him up there with Dostoevsky and Pepys

John Sutherland, Guardian, 30 April 2004

Session partners



Battle of Ideas 2009 | session: Unlimited Ltd: Economic growth and its discontents
Unlimited Ltd: Economic growth and its discontents

Saturday 31 October, 3.30pm until 5.00pm, Courtyard Gallery

What kind of economic future can we imagine? In the past recessions have led to real clean-outs in existing industries and to innovative advances in new sectors: gales of Schumpeterian creative destruction. There is a hesitant and indecisive quality, however, in the responses to this recession, which seem to duck or defer difficult decisions. Should the US, for example, allow General Motors to fail and invest instead in American bio-technology while China takes over automobile production? It is impossible, in addition, for many to countenance a future in which China mass-produces billions of cars for domestic and international consumption.

Over the last twenty years anti-growth ideology in every sphere has become more and more fashionable. Will it represent more of a barrier to continued growth than the actual state of the economy? Some, like the environmentalist Peter Victor, argue that ‘we can either design a slower-growth economy over the next few decades, or we’ll get there suddenly, through environmental disaster’. In many quarters GDP growth has become an index of all that is wrong with our greed driven societies: as Richard Layard, the happiness economist, puts it ‘many policies to drive up income harm precisely those things from which we derive our quality of life’.

Can we imagine a place for the kind of innovation and investment in R&D that might lead to genuine economic advances? Technological innovation rather than the relentless rise of financial innovation and public spending? In June the British government published Digital Britain, a policy framework for the communications and technology and media sector that represents a shift towards ‘industrial activism’. With a £6 per head levy top-sliced off the BBC licence fee, it aims to put in place 2Mbps broadband to every home by 2012. Given that South Korea is aiming at 1Gbps over the same time frame, this seems to represent incredibly low horizons. Is this really the kind of industrial activism that the British economy needs in the wake of recession? While the UK remains the world’s sixth largest manufacturer for now, can we imagine this remaining the case in the future or even its standing improving?

Listen to the session audio…

Other formats are available here

Speakers
Rob Killick
CEO, Clerkswell; author, The UK After The Recession

Lord Robert Skidelsky
emeritus professor, political economy, Warwick University; member, House of Lords; author, Keynes: the return of the master

Professor Robert Wade
professor of political economy, LSE; winner, Leontief Prize in Economics 2008; author, Governing the Market

Martin Wright
writer, editor and adviser on environmental solutions and sustainable futures

Chair:
Kirk Leech
interim director, European Animal Research Campaign Centre; government affairs, Association of the British Pharmaceutical Industry


Produced by
Kirk Leech interim director, European Animal Research Campaign Centre; government affairs, Association of the British Pharmaceutical Industry
Recommended readings
Move Review: Capitalism: A Love Story (2009)

Greed Is Good? Michael Moore Begs to Differ

Manohla Dargis, New York Times, 25 September 2009

Keynes to the rescue?

Robert Skidelsky's latest book on Keynes gives a clear and concise account of the current economic crisis, but its faith in Keynes as the 'master' of economic debate is seriously misplaced.

Sean Collins, spiked, 25 September 2009

Sarkozy attacks focus on economic growth

French president urges more emphasis on quality of life; report criticises 'gross domestic product fetishism'

Lizzy Davies, Guardian, 15 September 2009

Towards a better measure of well-being

Advances in research enable us now to develop broader measures of well-being. Health, education, security and social connectedness all are important to quality of life – but are not adequately reflected in GDP.

Joseph Stiglitz, Financial Times, 13 September 2009

Keynes: The Return of the Master

In the current financial crisis Keynes has been taken out of his cupboard, dusted down, consulted, cited, invoked and appealed to about why events have taken the course they have and how a rescue operation can be effected. Why have we gone back so emphatically to the ideas of an economist who died fifty years ago?

Robert Skidelsky, Allen Lane, 3 September 2009

A wind farm is not the answer

The green movement's fixation with technology reveals that we are asking the wrong questions

Paul Kingsnorth, Guardian commentisfree, 31 July 2009

Barriers to innovation and change

Our society has become tremendously risk averse at every level. Common sense tells us it is unlikely that we can create a more dynamic and innovative economy when we are afraid to send our children to the park on their own, and how likely are these over protected children to become confident risk takers as they grow up?

Rob Killick, UK After the Recession, 22 May 2009

Even capitalism’s fan club is losing faith

Why have free marketeers joined greens and ‘anti-capitalists’ in arguing that economic growth is a bad thing?

Daniel Ben-Ami, spiked, 11 August 2008

Session partners





in association with

Battle of Ideas 2009 | session: Three’s a crowd? The battle over population and reproduction
Three’s a crowd? The battle over population and reproduction

Saturday 31 October, 3.30pm until 5.00pm, Lecture Theatre 1

A high-profile campaign by the Optimum Population Trust, supported by such luminaries as government advisor Jonathon Porritt and broadcaster David Attenborough, seeks to encourage couples worldwide to limit their families to two children. The ‘Stop At Two’ campaign is premised on the idea that unrestrained population growth will damage the environment. But some argue that fears about the environmental effects of population growth represent a new form of Malthusianism, the old idea that population growth will push society up against natural limits.

Critics of the ‘Stop At Two’ campaign point out that Malthusianism was discredited by historical developments, and suggest the same will be true of today’s fears. They argue that we can tackle environmental problems without limiting the world population, and that ‘reproductive choice’ should mean people make decisions about having children based on their own desires and circumstances. Some worry that Western NGOs campaigning for contraception and sex education in the developing world under the banner of women’s rights are in fact promoting a Malthusian agenda, pointing to the repressive history of state population control programmes. But sympathisers with the ‘Stop At Two’ campaign stress this is about individuals making choices; and what is wrong with encouraging them to take the environment into account?

Where does ‘family planning’ stop being about individuals and couples making their own reproductive decisions and become a moral imperative that people should make the ‘right choices’? Are fears about population growth a new form of an old panic, or is the expanding carbon footprint a problem we need to address by limiting population growth? What circumstances and concerns do people take into account when they plan their families today?



Listen to the session audio…

Other formats are available here

Speakers
Dr Austen Ivereigh
Catholic commentator; joint co-ordinator, Catholic Voices

Dr Ellie Lee
reader in social policy, University of Kent, Canterbury; director, Centre for Parenting Culture Studies

Adrian Stott
principal, Enable Solutions; trustee, Optimum Population Trust

Professor Sir Mark Walport
director, Wellcome Trust; Government Chief Scientific Adviser (from April 2013)

Chair:
Tony Gilland
associate fellow, Academy of Ideas


Produced by
Tony Gilland associate fellow, Academy of Ideas
Recommended readings
Population reduction: a war on women’s bodies

Pro-choice activists must defend women’s reproductive rights against those who say we should curb population growth to save the planet.

Jennie Bristow, spiked, 7 October 2009

There’s more to parenting than egg production

Family planning is supposed to be something that women, and their partners, do in order to shape their childbearing choices around their lives. The way the concept is promoted today often implies that the planning should be done for us, or despite us, according to an abstract set of rules; and that we adults should be shaping our childbearing choices around the babies we do not yet have.

Jennie Bristow, spiked, 21 September 2009

Fewer Emitters, Lower Emissions, Less Cost

The report, Fewer Emitters, Lower Emissions, Less Cost, commissioned by the Optimum Population Trust from the London School of Economics, concludes that “considered purely as a method of reducing future CO2 emissions”, family planning is more cost-effective than leading low-carbon technologies. It says family planning should be seen as one of the primary methods of emissions reduction.

Thomas Wire, Optimum Population Trust, 9 September 2009

Shanghai urges 'two-child policy'

Officials in Shanghai are urging parents to have a second child, the first time in decades the government has pushed for more babies.

BBC News, BBC News, 24 July 2009

The Big Question: Is Britain going to be able to support an ever-expanding population?

The annual Social Trends study published earlier this week by the Office for National Statistics states that the number of people in the UK is growing by 1,000 a day. There are 61 million people officially resident in Britain today and this is expected to grow by 4.4 million by 2016.

Steve Connor, Independent, 17 April 2009

Mixing with Malthusians

spiked editor Brendan O’Neill ventured into a pit of population-controllers, and found himself holding his nose.

Brendan O'Neill, spiked, 1 April 2009

Population growth is a threat. But it pales against the greed of the rich

It's easy to blame the poor for growing pressure on the world's resources. But still the wealthy west takes the lion's share

George Monbiot, Guardian Comment is Free, 29 January 2008

Three's a crowd

The more children we have, the more stress we put on an already overburdened planet, say campaigners. Observer environment correspondent Juliette Jowit meets the modern Malthusians who, for the sake of the planet, are choosing to 'stop at two'

Juliette Jowit, Observer, 11 November 2007

UK needs a two-child limit, says population report

Families should restrict themselves to having a maximum of two children to stabilise the effect on the environment of Britain's rapidly growing population, a thinktank warns today.

John Vidal, Guardian, 11 July 2007

Population Control: A Really Bad Idea

Since the beginning of time, one of the clearest markers of an enlightened society has been the moral status it attaches to human life. And outwardly, at least, twenty-first-century Western societies express an unprecedented degree of respect for human life.

Frank Furedi, spiked, 18 June 2007

Session partners





Battle of Ideas 2009 | session: The Rise of Populism in Europe: we the people or them the mob?
The Rise of Populism in Europe: we the people or them the mob?

Saturday 31 October, 3.30pm until 5.00pm, Student Union

Recent crises across Europe, from the expenses scandal in the UK to the ex-PM of Hungary admitting lying to the electorate, not to mention the ongoing antics of Silvio Berlusconi in Italy, have further discredited traditional political institutions. Meanwhile, the economic crisis has cast doubt on the establishment’s ability to manage the economy. Low turnout in the recent European elections further confirms that the European people are disenchanted with old-style politics. Although the elections were formally a victory for the centre-right across Europe, the real story is a swing away from mainstream parties, especially the Socialists, and perhaps towards sundry fringe parties. Prior to the election, elite fears focused on a potential breakthrough for far-right parties, a concern seemingly confirmed by the gains for the BNP in the UK and Jobbik in Hungary, as well as others in Holland, Italy and Austria. But popular revolts against the political class go beyond votes for neo-fascists. The rise of marginal parties, from Greens to the Pirate Party in Sweden, hints at a broader, free-floating anti-elite feeling that was also apparent in the ‘No’ votes to the EU Constitution and the Lisbon Treaty in France, Holland and Ireland

Many observers worry that while this sentiment can result in harmless support for independent celebrity candidates, it can also lead to something far more dangerous. The resulting suspicion of ‘populism’ even raises doubts about democracy per se, something seen most starkly in the EU’s telling the Irish people to vote again on the Lisbon Treaty. Given the xenophobic character of some of the parties gaining popularity, is there something genuinely problematic about emerging forms of anti-elitism, and should we be concerned about the lack of clear political programmes coming from fringe parties and charismatic independents? Or are cries of populism no more than an elitist reaction against anything outside the discredited mainstream, born of our rulers’ fears for their own legitimacy? Does ‘populism’ have any positive political content? Is Left and Right giving way to Us and Them? And does this point to a reinvigoration of democracy or its attenuation? Is the new populism the new alternative?

Listen to the session audio…

Other formats are available here

Speakers
David Aaronovitch
columnist, The Times; author, Voodoo Histories; chair, Index on Censorship

Dr Chris Bickerton
associate professor of international relations, Sciences Po, Paris; author, European Integration: from nation states to member states; co-editor, The Current Moment

Dr David Runciman
professor of politics, Department of Politics and International Studies (POLIS), Cambridge University; author, The Confidence Trap: A History of Democracy in Crisis from World War 1 to the Present

Dr Daniel Smilov
programme director, Centre for Liberal Strategies, Bulgaria; visiting professor, Central European University, Hungary

Chair:
Bruno Waterfield
Brussels correspondent, The Times; co-author, No Means No


Produced by
Dr Chris Bickerton associate professor of international relations, Sciences Po, Paris; author, European Integration: from nation states to member states; co-editor, The Current Moment
Recommended readings
A hollow victory for the Yes campaigners

Bruno Waterfield reports from Brussels on how the EU's determination to ëwiní the Irish vote has damaged its standing.

Bruno Waterfield, spiked, 5 October 2009

Europe’s centre-left suffers in the squeezed middle

The right is stealing leftist clothes: an anti-elitist populism in Italy; a co-option of admired figures of the left into government in France; and in Britain, resurgent Tories rail against Labour’s 'top down' and 'bureaucratic' reforms.

John Lloyd, Financial Times, 2 October 2009

The Greengrocer's Revenge

The fall of communism in 1989 was a great relief to most citizens of the eastern bloc. But in parts of the region many people now feel that only the elites were truly liberated—and now populists are playing on people’s dismay.

Ivan Krastev, Prospect, October 2009

Pirate Party launches UK poll bid

The Pirate Party - which won a surprise seat in the European Parliament in Sweden - has launched in the UK.

BBC News, 13 August 2009

Europe’s new politics of hard times

The gains of the far right in the European elections mean a revival not of fascism, but of populism – which is unable to transform people’s anger and mistrust into a new political vision.

Christopher Bickerton, Le monde diplomatique, July 2009

Preening populism has put us off democracy

When ministers trade insults instead of getting things done, I can begin to see what Bernie Ecclestone means about Hitler.

Libby Purves, The Times, 6 July 2009

Session partners





Battle of Ideas 2009 | session: Rethinking Freedom in an Illiberal Age: securing rights or celebrating liberty?
Rethinking Freedom in an Illiberal Age: securing rights or celebrating liberty?

Saturday 31 October, 3.30pm until 5.00pm, Upper Gulbenkian Gallery Keynote Controversies

Earlier this year, the Convention on Modern Liberty brought together over a thousand campaigners, activists and thinkers in London to discuss how best to stand up for freedom in an increasingly illiberal political climate. Should we see liberty primarily as a legal or cultural question, and which issues define freedom for our time? Is it the campaign against detention without trial, or against the ban on smoking in pubs? The introduction of identity cards, or compulsory parenting lessons? The right to protest, or the right to take pictures in public places?

No doubt all of the above are important. But how we challenge attacks on freedom depends a lot on what we understand freedom to be. Is it fundamentally about formal rights, or lived experience? Is there any more to freedom than the right to be left alone? Why does freedom matter anyway? Should we be more concerned with building a fairer and more equitable society than obsessing over individual liberties? Is it self-indulgent to campaign around ‘freedom’ in the West, when we enjoy liberties that are only dreamt of in other parts of the world, from China to Zimbabwe? Campaigners often invoke the spectre of fascism or Orwell’s Big Brother to highlight the need for vigilance, but what about less dramatic, more insidious curbs on freedom? Are we neglecting Britain’s unique contribution to unfreedom in the form of ‘antisocial behaviour orders’, for example, or CRB checks for anyone who goes near children? How important is the idea of freedom to politics in our time?


Listen to the session audio…

Other formats are available here

Speakers
Anthony Barnett
founder, openDemocracy; co-editor, OurKingdom

Jo Glanville
director, English PEN

Mick Hume
editor-at-large, online magazine spiked; author, Trigger Warning: Is the Fear of Being Offensive Killing Free Speech?

Wendy Kaminer
US-based writer on law, liberty, feminism, religion, and popular culture; author, Worst Instincts: cowardice, conformity and the ACLU

Chair:
Dolan Cummings
associate fellow, Academy of Ideas; author, That Existential Leap: a crime story (forthcoming from Zero Books)


Produced by
Dolan Cummings associate fellow, Academy of Ideas; author, That Existential Leap: a crime story (forthcoming from Zero Books)
Recommended readings
We must stop being tolerant of repression

In a recent speech, the libertarian Wendy Kaminer argued that state intervention into everyday life is giving rise to ‘habits of submission’.

Wendy Kaminer, spiked, 12 November 2009

Liberal values have never been more important – or less popular

People everywhere have been too willing to trade freedom for prosperity or security.

John Kampfner, Independent, 21 September 2009

The fight for individual liberty starts here

As the UK parliament votes for detention without charge for 42 days, spiked sets out a 10-point action plan for rescuing democratic rights.

Brendan O'Neill, spiked, 17 June 2009

Conventional liberty; unconventional God

The Convention on Modern Liberty, a gathering of more than a thousand people in central London in February, provided space for a much-needed discussion about liberty, though the most radical ideas came from Christians and academic historians.

Sarah Boyes, Culture Wars, 10 April 2009

The database state we're in

The Joseph Rowntree Reform Trust has published a major report on the UK's Database State. Technology is transforming government, and there is an urgent need to control and understand it.

Anthony Barnett, openDemocracy, 22 March 2009

Database State

In October 2007 Her Majesty’s Revenue and Customs lost two discs containing a copy of the entire child benefit database. Suddenly issues of privacy and data security were on the front page of most newspapers and leading the TV news bulletins.

Ross Anderson, Ian Brown, Terri Dowty et al, Joseph Rowntree Reform Trust, March 2009

Session partners



Battle of Ideas 2009 | session: A cultured ear: why does listening to music matter?
A cultured ear: why does listening to music matter?

Saturday 31 October, 3.30pm until 5.00pm, Henry Moore Gallery

Today it’s often lamented that, though music permeates society, we no longer value the act of listening. Indeed, have we lost touch with how we listen? Why do we listen to music, and how does the way we listen change in different contexts? Whereas the composers of the past wrote pieces for specific reasons, such as dances, coronations or religious ceremonies, music today can seem strangely de-contextualised. Arguably, listening to music as an end in itself is actually quite a new idea, so does it really matter?

Parents-to-be play Mozart to their fetuses in the womb, but this missionary zeal seems to wane when children are old enough to have tastes of their own. Commentators champion ‘participation’ in music for the social benefits they claim it brings, while staying mute on how to listen and make value judgements. With worries over ‘noise pollution’, deafness caused by loud pop concerts, and even concerns that orchestras mustn’t play Sibelius at full blast because it contravenes EU legislation on workplace safety, sound often seems something we’re supposed to protect ourselves from rather than relish.

But can our listening be too safe in a more critical sense? Within our own listening worlds, do we embrace the diverse, new and challenging music that is increasingly available? Enthusiasts insist classical music is better than all the rest, but doesn’t learning how to listen mean being able to appreciate all genres equally? Shouldn’t we be more critical in what we listen to, rather than seeing the same old classics as heritage to be preserved? And isn’t it even more ‘elitist’ to insist classical music is great without explaining why?

This debate is in partnership with ‘Hear Here!’ – the UK’s first classical music project dedicated to listening – presented by the Royal Philharmonic Society and Classic FM and supported by the Paul Hamlyn Foundation.

 

Speakers
Rachel Halliburton
deputy editor, Time Out London; theatre writer, Independent, Financial Times and Evening Standard

Professor Philip Hensher
professor of creative writing, Exeter University; columnist, Independent; novelist; author, The Northern Clemency

Ivan Hewett
chief music critic, Daily Telegraph; professor, Royal College of Music; broadcaster; author, Music: healing the rift

Tom Hutchinson
clarinettist; teacher; arts project manager, Royal Philharmonic Society

Karl-Erik Norrman
founder and secretary-general, European Cultural Parliament; former Swedish ambassador; author, The Gala Concert, Verdi/Wagner 200 years

Chair:
Sarah Boyes
freelance writer and editor; assistant editor, Culture Wars; editor, Battles in Print 2010


Produced by
Sarah Boyes freelance writer and editor; assistant editor, Culture Wars; editor, Battles in Print 2010
Recommended readings
Is anyone out there listening?

In our distracted, noisy world, the art of true hearing has been lost in the din.

John Naish, The Times, 27 October 2009

Damning Mozart With Fervid Praise

Mindless, clichéd, indiscriminate cheerleading is the last thing classical music needs just now, as it finds itself increasingly challenged to prove its relevance in the multicultural, anti-elitist, pop-saturated arts climate of the 21st century.

James Oestreich, New York Times, 10 August 2009

The Epistemology of Elitism

The composer friend I referred to recently who loves most new music but doesn't like Feldman told me why: he doesn't care for his harmony. Well, I had to grant him that. Your typical late Feldman piece starts out with a pitch set like B-C-C#-D, and while sometimes there's a third thrown in so it's C#-A-C-D, he doesn't vary a lot in that respect.

Kyle Gann, Arts JournalPostClassic blog, 7 August 2009

Critic to composer

Paul Morley, a music critic for 30 years, couldn't tell you what a minor chord is. How did a year studying at the Royal Academy change him?

Paul Morley, Observer, 12 July 2009

Big Brother Is Listening

Word came across the transom the other week of a new website called “musoc.org.” Its aggressive stance is that classical music is simply better than other forms of music. Actually, it maintains that other forms of music aren’t music at all.

Anne Midgette, Washington Post The Classical Beat blog, 3 July 2009

Session partners





Battle of Ideas 2009 | session: The Rise of the Philanthrocapitalists: can the rich save the world?
The Rise of the Philanthrocapitalists: can the rich save the world?

Saturday 31 October, 1.30pm until 5.00pm, Café

As the recession bites, the future for the third sector and the arts looks bleak. Much corporate funding for charities and not-for-profit organisations has disappeared down a black hole, the state is cutting back on spending, and the rest of us are cancelling our Direct Debits. The arts have been hit by the global downturn too: an Arts & Business survey in February found great nervousness amongst corporate sponsors of the arts. A&B chief executive, Colin Tweedy, predicted that arts sponsorship would slow until 2013.

In this context, attention is turning more and more to the super-rich, with hopes that ‘philanthrocapitalists’ will offer resources and business experience to transform the third sector and rescue the arts. While the economic crisis means the ranks of the rich can’t keep swelling, there are now 793 billionaires worldwide. As conspicuous consumption becomes culturally distasteful, and popular opinion rails against greedy bankers and fat-cat bonuses, will giving to worthwhile causes become a new way for corporate leaders to remake reputations? Will others follow the example of George Soros, Bill Gates and Warren Buffet, dedicating their time to thinking about how best to give their money away rather than making more? Can their business experience and vast amounts of resources transform the ailing welfare state? With the launch of the Prince of Wales Medal for Arts Philanthropy in 2008, should we look to Rockefellers and Tates to support the arts rather than the state?

Should we apply moral pressure to encourage the super rich to support good causes, or is a more influential role for millionaires at odds with democracy? And if the arts become dependent on philanthrocapitalists, will that mean they get to impose their tastes on the rest of us? Should the state increase its influence over how philanthrocapitalists spend their money?

Speakers
David Cohen
chairman, F&C REIT India; president, United Jewish Israel Appeal UK

Michael Green
freelance writer and consultant on international development; former senior official, Department for International Development; co-author, Philanthrocapitalism: how the rich can save the world

Dr Michael Savage
blogger, Grumpy Art Historian

Colin Tweedy
chief executive, The Building Centre Trust; formerly chief executive, Arts & Business

Chair:
Patrick Hayes
director, British Educational Suppliers Association (BESA)


Produced by
Patrick Hayes director, British Educational Suppliers Association (BESA)
Recommended readings
They're called the Good Club - and they want to save the world

A small, elite group of billionaire philanthropists met in New York recently to discuss solving the planet's problems.

Paul Harris, Observer, 31 May 2009

The recession and US museums

How to compensate for the loss of philanthropic, endowment and visitor incomes.

Adrian Ellis, The Art Newspaper, 12 March 2009

Philanthrocapitalism: How the Rich Can Save the World and Why We Should Let Them

For philanthropists of the past, charity was often a matter of simply giving money away. For 'philanthrocapitalists' - the new generation of billionaires who are reshaping the way they give - it's like business.

Matthew Bishop & Michael Green, A & C Black, 17 November 2008

Nobody has to be vile

The two faces of Bill Gates are exactly like the two faces of Soros: on the one hand, a cruel businessman, destroying or buying out competitors, aiming at a virtual monopoly; on the other, the great philanthropist who makes a point of saying: ‘What does it serve to have computers if people do not have enough to eat?’

Slavoj Žižek, London Review of Books, 6 April 2006

Session partners



Battle of Ideas 2009 | session: Who ate all the pies? Football, greed and the recession
Who ate all the pies? Football, greed and the recession

Saturday 31 October, 3.30pm until 5.00pm, Lecture Theatre 2

Since the 1990s, English football has been awash with money, bringing world class players to delight fans in the stands and those watching on TV. But many observers have worried that the ‘obscene’ amounts of money spent on and earned by players is ruining the game, arguing that super-rich clubs have an unfair advantage, and that fans cannot relate to players on film-star wages. As the recession bites, will football prove immune? And if clubs are forced to tighten their belts, might this be a good thing?

Some clubs are already feeling the pinch, especially in the less glamorous Scottish league. But the takeover of Manchester City, followed by an extravagant spending spree, reminds us there are still rich businessmen willing to splash out on the beautiful game, while Real Madrid continue to pay stellar prices for their galacticos, including the record £80 million acquistion of Christiano Ronaldo from the hardly cash-strapped Manchester United. Can and should football serve as a beacon of plenty in straitened circumstances, providing a welcome diversion for cash-strapped fans? Or would it be better for clubs to introduce wage caps to rein in greedy players and agents, and cultivate local players who have more in common with the fans? The success of clubs like Liverpool in the 1980s was a source of pride for working class fans facing hard times, but will pride turn to resentment as millionaire players cruise through recession-hit cities in their flash cars? Or will fans simply relish the success brought by billionare owners and massive transfers? Is today’s megabucks culture in football sustainable, or are Manchester City likely to go the way of (shudder) Leeds United? How will the recession change the culture of football?

Speakers
Jon Keen
deputy chair, Football Supporters' Federation; lifelong Reading FC fan

Tim Rice
assistant comment editor, The Times

Hilary Salt
actuary; founder, First Actuarial

Philip Walters
chair, Rising Stars (educational publisher), and the GL Education Group; Spurs season ticket holder; member of Middlesex County Cricket Club

Chair:
Geoff Kidder
director, membership and events, Academy of Ideas; convenor, IoI Book Club; IoI’s resident expert in all sporting matters


Produced by
Geoff Kidder director, membership and events, Academy of Ideas; convenor, IoI Book Club; IoI’s resident expert in all sporting matters
Recommended readings
A blame game you can bank on

Alistair Darling’s decision to bash bankers at Labour’s party conference was predictable, misguided and dishonest.

Rob Lyons, spiked, 29 September 2009

Labour and football 12 years on: good intentions but could do better

The government has consistently warned against the dangers of rampant commercialism in football, but could do more to curb it.

David Conn, Guardian Inside sport blog, 24 September 2009

Top clubs triumph on an uneven pitch

Britain’s Home Office operates a surprising policy: helping Manchester United, Arsenal, Chelsea and Liverpool to dominate football’s Premier League whilst also inflating footballers’ wages, so pushing up ticket prices. These all flow from its ill-considered immigration rules.

Chris Cook, Financial Times, 2 September 2009

Fall in Premier League spending

English Premier League clubs have spent about £450m in the summer transfer window - down from last summer's £500m record, a report says.

BBC News, BBC News, 1 September 2009

Record spending turns to record profit for Premier League's top four

The summer trade was a period of collective belt-tightening for all but the spendthrift Manchester City.

Owen Gibson, Guardian, 1 September 2009

The moral hazard of football’s net gains

When clubs in Spain and Argentina are bailed out like banks, is it time for tighter regulation?

Stefan Szymanski, The Times, 12 August 2009

Middlesbrough's Andrew Taylor sets up site to stop players being ripped off

New project started after defender was 'exploited' by salesman: restaurant chain Nobu among trusted companies.

Mikey Stafford, Guardian Unlimited, 10 August 2009

Festival Buzz

"The Battle of Ideas goes from strength to strength. The intensity, variety and depth of debate, sustained for an entire weekend, makes for a unique experience charging the intellectual batteries for the rest of the year."
Raymond Tallis, emeritus professor of geriatric medicine, Manchester University

Battle of Ideas 2009 | session: Welfare Dependency: who benefits?
Welfare Dependency: who benefits?

Saturday 31 October, 1.30pm until 3.00pm, Café

The welfare state was once celebrated as a keystone of post-war Britain, but while the NHS and state education are still widely valued, state benefits are now accused of fostering a dependency culture that traps millions. With cuts in public spending looming as the recession bites, and yet more people likely to need state support, change seems inevitable. The government describes its Welfare Reform Bill as ‘the most radical reform of the welfare state for generations’, aimed at increasing personal responsibility and moving people off benefits and into work.

But is it only the long-term unemployed (and the so-called underclass) who are dependent on the state? Some argue the ideology of welfarism has taken a therapeutic turn, fostering a climate of government intervention into people’s private lives, especially around child-rearing, diet and so on. Others argue the state should attend much more to our psychological and emotional needs, particularly when times are hard. Should reform mean moving from the ‘safety net’ model to an more interventionist one, equipping people with the skills they need for work and life in the 21st century?

What is the role of the welfare state today, and can it (or indeed should it) meet our needs? Is an expansion of its role inevitable in a recession, or is it creeping into areas of our lives we would rather it left alone? Are we becoming more vulnerable and in need of support, or is expanding welfare incompatible with personal freedom and independence, and with the imperative to tighten our belts? No doubt some people are genuinely dependent, and through no fault of their own, with more unemployed likely in the near future. Does welfare reform necessarily mean less compassion? Should the focus be on cash for those who need it, or more intensive intervention to get people working?

Listen to the session audio…

Other formats are available here

Speakers
Dave Clements
adviser to local government; blogger, Guardian, Huffington Post; convenor, IoI Social Policy Forum.

Rowenna Davis
Labour councillor, Southwark; prospective parliamentary candidate for Southampton Itchen; author, Tangled Up in Blue

Andrew Haldenby
director, Reform; former head, political section, Conservative Research Department

Dr Marcus Roberts
director, policy and membership, DrugScope

Chair:
Angus Kennedy
convenor, The Academy; author, Being Cultured: in defence of discrimination


Produced by
Dave Clements adviser to local government; blogger, Guardian, Huffington Post; convenor, IoI Social Policy Forum.
Recommended readings
Pay less tax: hand back your handouts

If national spending is to go down, the middle classes must stop accepting benefits they don’t need.

Andrew Haldenby, The Times, 22 October 2009

Middle-class welfare must go

Spending pledges have been scaled down, but the Conservatives will have to find bigger savings.

Andrew Haldenby, Policy Review, 5 October 2009

The new Tories will stop class becoming caste

Poor people need access to wealth, not welfare. Bring in investment vouchers, worker buy-outs and support for couples.

Phillip Blond, The Times, 5 October 2009

Plugged In

Claire Fox, director of the Institute of Ideas and regular contributor to The MJ, succeeded in fulfilling the brief to do her usual thing and ‘stir it up’ when she spoke at APSE’s recent annual conference in Cardiff.

Paul O'Brien, LocalGov, October 2009

Stop monitoring the public

Do we really expect customers to defend local government against cuts when so many council initiatives are aimed at policing the public?

Claire Fox, LocalGov, 1 October 2009

Gordon Brown to promise crackdown on bad parents

Prime minister attempts to woo Middle Britain with tough line on anti-social behaviour.

Patrick Wintour, Guardian, 29 September 2009

Slash public-sector non-jobs, not power plants, roads and rail links

It is only by investing for the long-term in infrastructure that we can create a strong economy.

Boris Johnson, Telegraph, 22 September 2009

Will recession create another 'lost generation' of British youth?

Almost a million young Britons are now called 'neets' – not in education, employment, or training.

Mark Rice-Oxley, Christian Science Monitor, 20 September 2009

Idle young should be entitled to nothing

There are now 3.3m households — one in six — with no one over the age of 16 in employment and 1.9m children living in families without a parent in work.

Michael Portillo, The Sunday Times, 30 August 2009

Some talk about welfare to work. The poor know it as welfare to destitution

The unemployed are being forced to take huge risks with their security when they move into the world of low-paid labour.

Jenni Russell, Guardian Comment is free, 19 August 2009

Public spending: Where now for middle class welfare?

Why the middle classes should prepare for their welfare entitlement to wither on the vine

Gaby Hinsliff, Guardian Politics Blog, 15 July 2009

No choice but cuts

Recognition across the political spectrum that public spending is out of control has yet to be matched by action

Andrew Haldenby, Guardian, 20 April 2009

Karen Matthews and the underclass thrive on Labour's welfare state

The case of Karen Matthews, convicted of kidnapping her own daughter in order to claim a reward, has again pulled back the curtain to allow us a glimpse of this netherworld of taxpayer-funded fecklessness.

Telegraph View, Telegraph, 7 December 2008

Welfare State - The New Dependency

I suspect the New Right was on to something in the 80s when they complained that Britain was creating a ‘dependency culture’. They only got it half right, and for all the wrong reasons.

Dave Clements, University of Wales, Newport, 2008

Individualists Who Cooperate: Education and Welfare Reform Befitting a Free People

The government is trying to do too much. We need to reframe the constitutional settlement that defines the relationship between the state and the individual in civil society. The state should be confined to the legitimate tasks that are within its competence, thus allowing greater scope for private enterprise and social entrepreneurs to supply public services more effectively.

David Green, Civitas, 2 January 2008


Session partners



Battle of Ideas 2009 | session: When is it right to go to war? Kosovo, Iraq and beyond
When is it right to go to war? Kosovo, Iraq and beyond

Saturday 31 October, 1.30pm until 3.00pm, Henry Moore Gallery

Britain’s string of wars over the past ten years has brought questions of the rights and wrongs of going to war to the forefront of political debate. Ten years ago NATO bombed Yugoslavia to force it to withdraw from the breakaway province of Kosovo, in what the British Prime Minister Tony Blair called a humanitarian ‘war for values’. The 2003 invasion of Iraq was variously described as a campaign of preventive self-defence, or as an intervention to liberate Iraqis from Saddam’s tyranny. The attempt to secure United Nations backing for the Anglo-American invasion also focused attention on the relevance of UN authority and international law to the waging of war.

Today, the chances of another humanitarian intervention being mounted seem diminished because of the chaos that followed the invasion of Iraq. Yet Britain continues to fight a controversial campaign in Afghanistan, based on justifications that range from fighting terrorism to the war on drugs, to supporting women’s rights and Afghan democracy against Taliban oppression. The range of justifications given for Britain’s role in these wars has stoked debate about what it means to fight a just war in the 21st century. Are there valid justifications for waging war beyond those of self-defence and the national interest? Is today’s international environment so different from previous eras that we need to re-think the principles of just war? Does our government bear a ‘responsibility to protect’ individuals and peoples against grave human rights violations by states throughout the world? When is it right to go to war?

Speakers
Professor Chris Brown
professor, international relations, LSE; author, Understanding International Relations

Dr Philip Cunliffe
senior lecturer in international conflict, University of Kent; co-editor, Politics Without Sovereignty: a critique of contemporary international relations.

Douglas Murray
director, Centre for Social Cohesion; author, Neoconservatism: why we need it; political commentator

Benjamin Tallis
curator of Common Spaces, Fakulta Solidarnosoc; former political and strategic advisor/analyst, EU and Organisation for Security and Co-operation in Europe

Chair:
Dr Tara McCormack
lecturer in international politics, University of Leicester; author, Critique, Security and Power: the political limits to emancipatory approaches


Produced by
Dr Philip Cunliffe senior lecturer in international conflict, University of Kent; co-editor, Politics Without Sovereignty: a critique of contemporary international relations.
Recommended readings
Seeking domestic legitimacy through foreign affairs

Under the presidencies of Bill Clinton, George W Bush and now Barack Obama, America has consistently pursued abroad what it lacks at home – moral authority.

Tara McCormack, spiked, 25 September 2009

Humanitarian Intervention - Don't shout at the telly

WORLDbytes, September 2009

Communiste et Rastignac

In mid-May, as the Sri Lankan army completed its rout of the Tamil Tigers, President Mahinda Rajapaksa described the scorched-earth campaign as ‘an unprecedented humanitarian operation’.

Christopher Caldwell, London Review of Books, 9 July 2009

Kosovo was a just war, not an imperialist dress rehearsal

Ten years on, the conflict should be remembered as a responsible western intervention. It is a very different example to Iraq.

David Clark, Guardian Comment is free, 16 April 2009

The legacy of Kosovo? International paternalism

The transformation of Kosovo into a colonial-style protectorate exposes the authoritarianism behind Western governments’ ‘ethical’ foreign policies.

Philip Cunliffe, spiked, 24 March 2009

Just War: The Just War Tradition: Ethics in Modern Warfare

Every society and every period of history has had to face the reality of war. War inevitably yields situations in which the normal ethical rules of society have to be overridden. The Just War tradition has evolved over the centuries as a careful endeavour to impose moral discipline and humanity on resort to war and in its waging, and the tradition deserves our attention now as much as ever.

Charles Guthrie & Michael Quinlan, Bloomsbury, 26 September 2007

Arguing About War

This volume brings together provocative arguments by preeminent political theorist Michael Walzer on contemporary military conflicts - including the Iraq war - and the ethical issues they raise.

Michael Walzer, Yale University Press, 3 January 2006

Sovereignty, Rights and Justice: International Political Theory Today

Surveys the relationship between international relations theory and political theory, showing the way in which these two discourses, once considered separate, are now intertwined.

Chris Brown, Polity Press, 17 May 2002

Humanitarian intervention

I believe that the increasing tendency of states to intervene in others’ affairs, and the idea that it is right and legitimate for them to do so is a very dangerous trend.

Philip Cunliffe, The Browser

Session partners



Battle of Ideas 2009 | session: Bookshop Barnie at the Battle: 'Why We Disagree about Climate Change'
Bookshop Barnie at the Battle: 'Why We Disagree about Climate Change'

Saturday 31 October, 1.30pm until 3.00pm, Lecture Theatre 2

Austin Williams presents a special Battle Bookshop Barnie with Mike Hulme, founding director of the Tyndall Centre for Climate Change Research, on his latest book Why We Disagree About Climate Change: Understanding Controversy, Inaction and Opportunity.

Hulme has set the cat amongst the pigeons by rejecting the notion that there is a ‘consensus’ regarding the science of climate change. He points out there are even disagreements about the nature of scientific knowledge itself. He is also opposed to the politicisation of science. But is he really just worried about the use of ‘the language of fear and apocalypse’? After all, he suggests that we should ‘harness climate change to give new expression to some of the… values that matter to us’. In other words, is this a criticism of the climate change debate… or just spinning the same message in a more pragmatic way?

Challenge the author to explain why we must all ‘come to terms with climate change’

You are not expected to have read the book… but hopefully you will buy a signed copy at the bookstall if you’re convinced.

Listen to the session audio…

Other formats are available here

Speakers
Professor Mike Hulme
professor of climate change, University of East Anglia; founding director, Tyndall Centre for Climate Change Research; author, Why We Disagree About Climate Change: understanding controversy, inaction and opportunity

Chair:
Austin Williams
associate professor in architecture, XJTLU University, Suzhou, China; director, Future Cities Project; convenor, Bookshop Barnies; founding member of New Narratives


Produced by
Austin Williams associate professor in architecture, XJTLU University, Suzhou, China; director, Future Cities Project; convenor, Bookshop Barnies; founding member of New Narratives
Recommended readings
Climate change: no Eden, no apocalypse

Climate change is everywhere. Not only is the physical climate changing, but the idea of climate change is now active across the full range of human endeavours. Climate change has moved from being a predominantly physical phenomenon to being a social one, in the process reshaping the way we think about ourselves, our societies and humanity's place on Earth.

Mike Hulme, New Scientist, 7 September 2009

Why We Disagree About Climate Change: Understanding Controversy, Inaction and Opportunity

Climate change is not ‘a problem’ waiting for ‘a solution’. It is an environmental, cultural and political phenomenon which is re-shaping the way we think about ourselves, our societies and humanity’s place on Earth.

Mike Hulme, Cambridge University Press, 30 April 2009

Amid the financial storm: redirecting climate change

What impact will the global economic downturn have on arguments about climate change? The way to an answer lies through ourselves as much as the weather.

Mike Hulme, openDemocracy, 1 November 2008

Session partners



Battle of Ideas 2009 | session: Rethinking Privacy in an age of Disclosure and Sharing
Rethinking Privacy in an age of Disclosure and Sharing

Saturday 31 October, 1.30pm until 3.00pm, Upper Gulbenkian Gallery Keynote Controversies

The increasing reach of information technology into all areas of life, from social networking websites to data sharing in public services, has thrown up a number of questions about privacy. Information about our medical records, financial circumstances and shopping habits is increasingly likely to be stored in electronic media that are out of our control. Some critics worry more about Tesco’s data-gathering than any ‘surveillance state’. The controversy about Google Maps’ Street View function, which captured thousands of unwitting people walking or standing on the streets, is a reminder that new technology constantly raises new questions about our privacy. So how worried should we be? Does the convenience of easily accessed information outweigh the danger of abuse? How are our conceptions of privacy changing? And following the success of the Pirate Party in Sweden, can we expect privacy to move up the political agenda in the UK too.

These concerns focus on technological development, but arguably there has been a broader cultural transformation, whereby we are loosening up about what we consider ‘private’. From school to the workplace, we are constantly encouraged to discuss our feelings, while public figures in politics as well as showbiz seem ever-anxious not only to be ‘transparent’ about their work, but to reveal intimate details of their private lives. Some argue we are seeing a fundamental shift in attitudes to privacy, with a whole new generation growing up at ease with sharing pictures and information about themselves online with loosely-defined ‘friends’. Meanwhile, we are increasingly suspicious of goings-on ‘behind closed doors’, and the demand for privacy often seems a cranky hang-up of those with something to hide. In this context, what does it mean to insist on a right to privacy? Should we look to privacy laws to protect those who are less keen on sharing all? Where is the line between public and private today? Do we need to redraw this line and why is this so politically important?


Listen to the session audio…

Other formats are available here

Speakers
Peter Barron
director of communications and public affairs, North and Central Europe, Google; former editor, Newsnight

Cory Doctorow
novelist; co-editor, BoingBoing.net; author, Content: selected essays on technology, creativity, copyright and the future of the future

Dr Norman Lewis
director (innovation), PwC; co-author, Big Potatoes: the London manifesto for innovation

Anna Minton
writer and journalist; author, Ground Control: fear and happiness in the twenty-first century city

Chair:
Claire Fox
director, Academy of Ideas; panellist, BBC Radio 4's Moral Maze; author, I Find That Offensive


Produced by
Claire Fox director, Academy of Ideas; panellist, BBC Radio 4's Moral Maze; author, I Find That Offensive
Dolan Cummings associate fellow, Academy of Ideas; author, That Existential Leap: a crime story (forthcoming from Zero Books)
Recommended readings
The right to privacy in the Age of Facebook

In an era of voluntary revelation and involuntary regulation, we must find new ways to defend our private lives.

Norman Lewis, spiked, 10 November 2009

The price of the ‘power tax’ is far too high

Our belief that senior politicians have forgone their right to privacy makes leadership impossible in a modern democracy.

David Aaronovitch, The Times, 13 October 2009

Secrets can be good for you. Ask Dan Brown

The move towards transparency in public life has been a huge advance. But individuals still need their privacy protected.

Ben Macintyre, The Times, 17 September 2009

Facebook forced to tighten up privacy rules

Users' control over personal data will be increased following complaints from Canada's privacy commissioner.

Richard Wray, The Guardian, 27 August 2009

Time to Be Afraid of the Web?

Internet users used to comfort themselves by thinking that to become victims of the pirates of the Web, they had to frequent the online porn circuit or respond to an e-mail from the widowed wife of the former central bank governor of Nigeria.

Eduardo Porter, New York Times, 27 August 2009

How much do we really value our privacy?

Privacy groups are convinced that the personal lives of everyone are quickly becoming threatened from the advancements in technology.

Sam Alderwick, neowin.net, 19 July 2009

Ground Control: Fear and Happiness in the Twenty-First-Century City

When the figures say crime is falling, why are we more frightened than ever? Could our towns and cities be creating fear and mistrust? More property is being built in Britain than at any time since the Second World War – but it’s owned by private corporations, designed for profit and watched over by CCTV.

Anna Minton, Penguin, 25 June 2009

Is 'reality CCTV' a step too far?

Is a digital television service allowing residents of a London borough to watch CCTV footage on their televisions a step too far?

Liam Allen, BBC News, 8 May 2009

The end of privacy?

Forget Street View, there is a far more subtle - and pervasive - invasion of your private life being carried out - this time through your mobile phone.

Pete Warren, The Guardian, 2 April 2009

Little Brother

The ultimate tale of teen rebellion -- one seventeen-year-old against the surveillance state. Big Brother is watching you. Who's watching back? Marcus is only seventeen years old, but he figures he already knows how the system works -- and how to work the system.

Cory Doctorow, HarperVoyager, 13 October 2008

Facebook and the death of privacy

In order for public and private life to thrive, we need spaces that are absolutely free from the prying eyes of officialdom and others.

Facebook and the death of privacy, spiked, 7 February 2008

Festival Buzz

"The Battle of Ideas goes from strength to strength. The intensity, variety and depth of debate, sustained for an entire weekend, makes for a unique experience charging the intellectual batteries for the rest of the year."
Raymond Tallis, emeritus professor of geriatric medicine, Manchester University

Battle of Ideas 2009 | session: Activist revival or aimless hyper-activism?
Activist revival or aimless hyper-activism?

Saturday 31 October, 1.30pm until 3.00pm, Student Union

A revival of activism was augured for 2009, with police warning of a ‘summer of rage’. The G20 demonstrations in April, Plane Stupid’s runway invasions, and ongoing climate camps seem to have fulfilled expectations. Despite alleged student apathy, the year began with 24 campus occupations in protest at Israel’s bombardment of the Gaza Strip. The election of two BNP MEPs later revived egg-throwing ‘anti-fascist’ protests. While we live in a post-ideological age, the FT recently suggested the end of the Cold War has left ‘a great range of issues to protest against’; indeed, protests are as likely to be about international poverty or global warming as the evils of capitalism. But LSE economist Robert Wade suggests the particular issues that provoke protest may be ‘fairly arbitrary’, and ‘the motivating force will be anxiety about employment’. Is the renewal of activism really a response to the recession? What kind of alternative is on offer, then? More critical voices suggest today’s activism is a militant reflection of mainstream cynicism rather than representing a radical challenge.

Demands to ‘stop the killing’ or ‘save the planet’ strike a note of moral outrage rather than collective self-interest like traditional mass movements. Banners on the G20 demos declared ‘Jobs, Justice, Climate’, but what does this mean, and are these goals even compatible? Grievances seem free-floating: much was made of police aggression at the G20 demonstrations, which almost became a retrospective reason for the protests, as victim-activists demanded a public inquiry. Some argue the diffuse nature of the protests is a strength, allowing a more open-ended approach, and that the plethora of small groups without individual leaders indicates the ‘democratisation’ of protest. But there is also an emphasis on tactics, rather than more difficult discussions of strategy: protests seem less about convincing others of a cause than pulling off stunts to snatch the headlines or look good on YouTube. Is this the triumph of form over content?

Do today’s activists lack political depth, or are we seeing the emergence of new forms of politics? Is it cynical to dismiss new-style activism simply because it lacks a political programme? Is the desire just to ‘do something’ an embryonic idealism or an anti-intellectual, immature response to the profound problems facing society?


Listen to the session audio…

 

Other formats are available here

Speakers
Josie Appleton
director, civil liberties group, Manifesto Club; author, Officious: Rise of the Busybody State

Hugo Rifkind
columnist, The Times, Spectator and GQ; author, Overexposure

Andrew Robinson
leader, Pirate Party UK

Jack Tan
president, Students' Union, Royal College of Art

Chair:
Suzy Dean
freelance writer; blogger, Free Society


Produced by
Recommended readings
A new type of activism is being born

Is activism dead – or is it blooming? Some look at the G20 demos or student occupations and see a vibrant youthful movement, taking on the injustices of the day. Others look at the same gatherings and see only a confused bedraggled crowd, a mere shadow of 1960s mobilisations.

Josie Appleton, openDemocracy, 9 November 2009

Move Review: Capitalism: A Love Story (2009)

Greed Is Good? Michael Moore Begs to Differ

Manohla Dargis, New York Times, 25 September 2009

Communiqué from an Absent Future

Like the society to which it has played the faithful servant, the university is bankrupt. This bankruptcy is not only financial. It is the index of a more fundamental insolvency, one both political and economic, which has been a long time in the making.

we want everything, 24 September 2009

France's New Strike Force

France's youthful demonstrators aren't just winning support for their various causes — they're challenging the very social and economic pact that has defined the country for the past 60 years.

Bruce Crumley, Time, 31 August 2009

Why the camp? What’s the real intent?

The climate change protesters haven’t thought this one through.

Hugo Rifkind, The Times, 28 August 2009

An End to Movements

The national healthcare movement was doomed from the start. TV clips of shouting matches at town halls and fear-mongering by cynical politicians may be lamentable, but we are witnessing something more profound than the collapse of civic discourse.

Douglas Rushkoff, arthur, 15 August 2009

Dissenters transform the art of protest

In the 21st century, unconventional protest groups are thriving. Plane Stupid has blockaded runways and scaled Parliament. World Naked Bike Ride members cycle through British cities in the nude to protest against “car culture”.

Julian Flanagan, Financial Times, 1 August 2009

A caricature of a riot

The G20 protest of poseurs against bankers confirmed that anti-capitalism itself has become an empty brand, like KFC or FCUK.

Frank Furedi, spiked, 2 April 2009

Session partners





Battle of Ideas 2009 | session: Whose Right to Choose? Choice, ethics and regulation in 21st-century reproduction
Whose Right to Choose? Choice, ethics and regulation in 21st-century reproduction

Saturday 31 October, 1.30pm until 3.00pm, Lecture Theatre 1

In the 20th century, women’s control over their fertility was revolutionised by the contraceptive pill and the growing availability of legal and safe abortion. In the 21st century, reproductive choice is no longer exclusively about preventing or terminating a pregnancy, but also about overcoming natural barriers to conceiving, and choosing to have children using Assisted Reproductive Technologies (ARTs). While contraception and abortion are accepted as a part of modern life, and everybody knows somebody who has experienced fertility treatment, the clash between choice and regulation are still fraught. Policymakers and commentators fret about there being too many abortions, while the media report on fertility treatment allowing women to have babies in their 60s and 70s, octuplets being born in California, and mothers giving birth to their own grandchildren.

Abortion remains a procedure that cannot be accessed ‘on demand’ – a woman must claim that having a child will damage her mental health, and two doctors must authorise the procedure. Fertility treatment is subject to myriad regulations by the Human Fertilisation and Embryology Authority. Recent guidance about Single Embryo Transfer, which limits the ability of clinics to implant more than one embryo at a time, so as to reduce the likelihood of complications, has been opposed by some women and doctors, who see this as a restriction on their ability to make personal and clinical judgements.

Should we trust people to make the right reproductive choices – or do we need to protect them against the excesses of what is possible? Are there ‘too many abortions’ – or too many people seeking fertility treatment for the wrong reasons? How far should the decisions of official bodies regulate individuals’ decision-making and clinicians’ practice?



Listen to the session audio…

Other formats are available here

Speakers
Professor Peter Braude
head of department, Women's Health, King's College London; director, Centre for Preimplantation Genetic Diagnosis, Guy's and St Thomas Hospital

Ann Furedi
chief executive, British Pregnancy Advisory Service; author, The Moral Case for Abortion

Professor Sally Sheldon
professor of law, Kent Law School, University of Kent; co-author, Fragmenting Fatherhood: a socio-legal study

Chair:
Tony Gilland
associate fellow, Academy of Ideas


Produced by
Tony Gilland associate fellow, Academy of Ideas
Recommended readings
Grievous Choice on Risky Path to Parenthood

It was the last piece of advice Thomas and Amanda Stansel wanted to hear. But their fertility doctor was delivering it, without sugarcoating. Reduce, or you will lose them all, he told them.

Stephanie Saul, New York Times, 11 October 2009

One family’s tragedy, not a political indicator

While commemorating Dr Tiller's life and work, we should be clear about whether his murder has wider meaning for the politics of abortion.

Jennie Bristow, spiked, 3 June 2009

Human Fertilisation and Embryology Act 2008

The Government undertook a review of the law primarily in response to technological developments, such as new ways of creating embryos that have arisen since 1990, and changes in society. The Act updates the law to ensure that it is fit for purpose in the 21st century.

Human Fertilisation & Embryology Bill team, Department of Health, 14 November 2008

The de-moralisation of a woman’s right to choose

Isolated by popular opinion, the anti-choice lobby now uses psuedo-science rather than moral outrage to try to curb access to abortion.

Ellie Lee, spiked, 17 October 2008

Abortion has risks, whatever the research says

Even if the dangers to mental health are slight, how can anyone object to women being counselled about them?

Melanie McDonagh, The Times, 20 August 2008

Making choice easier

Abortion needs to be as safe and accessible as possible. The government should push ahead with plans to offer early abortions at GP surgeries

Ann Furedi, Guardian Comment is Free, 6 December 2007

Beyond Control: Medical Power, Women and Abortion Law

This is a presentation of the case for challenging complacency and reconsidering the extent to which British law has interpreted abortion and constructed a medical model in such a way as to place the control over access to abortion services with the medical profession.

Sally Sheldon, Pluto Books, 13 June 1997


Session partners





Battle of Ideas 2009 | session: You Produce, I Consume: Global Imbalances, Causes and Consequences
You Produce, I Consume: Global Imbalances, Causes and Consequences

Saturday 31 October, 1.30pm until 3.00pm, Courtyard Gallery

In the ongoing playing out of the worst recession anyone can remember, and the first major downturn of the new era of globalisation, ‘the Anglo-Saxon model’ of capitalism stands indicted. One of the key explanations offered is simply that the US has been borrowing too much, its banks taking too many risks, leading the way for a Western consumer-led credit crunch. We hear that we have spent to the limit, maxed our national credit cards and now have to go on an austerity purge to get things back to normal. But the other side of the coin has been export-led growth in Asia, in particular China and India. So must Asians be persuaded to consume more, as we consume less in the West?

For some critics, the world economy is fundamentally out of balance. They warn that recent shifts in flows of global finance must be understood not at the level of consumer habits, but as a reflection of changes in the balance of global production. Are our efforts to reform and spend our way out of recession merely window dressing, obscuring more profound and far reaching changes taking place at the level of global production, trade and international financial flows? Is a ‘rebalancing’ of production and consumption possible in a global economy? Does the failure of the Anglo-Saxon model imply the failure of the the whole modern experiment in the pursuit of prosperity through a more integrated and globalised world economy? Is it merely a question of balance, or is consumption itself the problem – and should Asia be learning from our ‘mistake’? If so, how else can the emerging economies continue their rise out of poverty?

There is an ongoing discussion about whether the US government will pursue ‘Buy American’ plans, and the Chinese government has introduced a ‘Buy Chinese’ policy for all government procurement. Are trade wars inevitable as the old system unravels? Or could it be that we actually need more production all round? Was Carlyle right when he cried: ‘Produce! Produce! Were it but the pitifullest infinitesimal fraction of a Product, produce it, in God’s name!’?

Listen to the session audio…

Other formats are available here

Speakers
Philippe Legrain
visiting senior fellow, LSE’s European Institute; author, Immigrants: your country needs them and European Spring: Why Our Economies and Politics are in a Mess – and How to Put Them Right

Paul Mason
broadcaster; author, Financial Meltdown and the End of the Age of Greed; technology editor, BBC's Newsnight

James Matthews
management consultant; founding member, NY Salon; writer on economics and business

Dr Linda Yueh
fellow in economics, St Edmund Hall, University of Oxford; adjunct professor of economics, London Business School; economics editor, Bloomberg TV

Chair:
Stuart Simpson
financial services professional; researcher and writer, emerging economies and quantitative finance


Produced by
Angus Kennedy convenor, The Academy; author, Being Cultured: in defence of discrimination
Stuart Simpson financial services professional; researcher and writer, emerging economies and quantitative finance
Recommended readings
Eastern economic promise holds little hope for western growth

The sun has set on America driving the world economy but China will not replace it.

Larry Elliott, Guardian, 19 October 2009

Whatever happened to imbalances?

In dollar terms [global imbalances] seemed huge...in relative terms the numbers are much less frightening. At their 2008 peak, on International Monetary Fund estimates, the global imbalances amounted to 2½ per cent of world gross national product, measured by total surpluses or deficits.

Samuel Brittan, Financial Times, 16 October 2009

A balancing act

The authorities need to resolve the problem of global economic imbalances, but first they need to understand why it has come about – if they do not identify the cause, they cannot find the solution. Daniel Ben-Ami looks at the different explanations for the unprecedented global imbalances.

Daniel Ben-Ami, Fund Strategy, 17 August 2009

Balanced growth is a win-win situation

The financial crisis and global recession showed how interconnected the world economy is. At Pittsburgh, all countries need to focus not only on events at home but across the globe. If the West is not going to grow strongly in coming years, we need the emerging world to help to pull the global economy along.

Gerard Lyons, The Times, 17 August 2009

The West can’t spend. China won’t spend

We need Chinese consumers to start splashing the cash. Will they break the habit of a lifetime?

Carl Mortished, The Times, 28 July 2009

Nations Choose Prosperity: Why Britain Needs an Industrial Policy

After years of being seen as outmoded, industrial policy is back on the political agenda, this time renamed 'industrial activism'. There is a widespread concern, fuelled by the crisis in the financial sector, that we have been too complacent about the decline in UK manufacturing, assuming that service industries would guarantee continuing prosperity with or without a vibrant manufacturing base.

Ruth Lea (Editor), Civitas, 23 June 2009

Counting on China

China, alongside other major emerging economies, is involved directly in the global economic crisis. Restoring its liquidity would help Western economies, but is China willing to assume this role? (p.54 of report)

Linda Yueh, Newsdesk Communications Ltd, April 2009

Meltdown: The End of the Age of Greed

Mason explains how deregulation is at the heart of the collapse of the banking system in September and October 2008 and how it led to expanded subprime mortgage lending, an uncontrollable derivatives market, and the lethal fusion of banking and insurance.

Paul Mason, Verso, 1 April 2009

Fixing Global Finance

The key is to acknowledge that, in a world of adjustable currencies, international lending must be denominated in the currency of borrowers, not just in that of a few dominant advanced economies. Only by tackling imbalances in the international financial system is there a chance of global financial stability.

Martin Wolf, Yale University Press, 30 January 2009

Globalisation and Economic Growth in China

In the 26 years since market-oriented reforms were introduced, China has emerged onto the world stage as a major economic presence, particularly since her accession to the World Trade Organisation in 2001. This book is a collection of papers on the effects of globalisation on China's growth prospects and of China's growth on the wider economy.

Yang Yao and Linda Yueh (eds.), World Scientific Publishing, 29 November 2006


Session partners





Battle of Ideas 2009 | session: Germany, 20 years united: growing together or falling apart?
Germany, 20 years united: growing together or falling apart?

Saturday 31 October, 12.15pm until 1.15pm, Henry Moore Gallery Lunchtime Debates

The reunification of Germany in 1989 marked the end of the Cold War. The collapse of the Berlin Wall was widely celebrated as step towards more freedom and progress for all Germans, as well as a sign of hope for the rest of the world. Many things have indeed changed for the better: politically, socially and economically. The Aufbau Ost redevelopment programme has poured £843bn into old East Germany. But large parts of the former GDR are still economically weak. In a popular song of 2005, Rainald Grebe expressed the solitude felt by many: ‘I feel so empty today, I feel Brandenburg’ (the state surrounding Berlin). Although Wolfgang Tiefensee, Federal Minister for Transport, Building and Urban Development, can say the gap between East and West is ‘closing’, this is as much a matter of West Germany’s export-led economy racing down to meet an East German economy where unemployment is at 20% or higher, and which 1.7m people have left since 1989.

Opinion polls show there still exists a kind of ‘wall’ in people’s minds, with significant social and cultural divisions between the two Germanys. Some 75% of East Germans still believe that Marx’s critique of capitalism has more to offer than free market ideology, while the party system in the West has been falling apart since the Wall came down, and the renewed Stalinist party Die Linke has not only regained influence in the East, but increasingly in the West too.

Germany’s reunification also had tremendous symbolic resonance across the world, signifying the promise of something new, but also uncertainty about a world without the old ideological sign posts. As Barack Obama put it to the crowds in Berlin in 2008: ‘The fall of the Berlin Wall brought new hope. But that very closeness has given rise to new dangers – dangers that cannot be contained within the borders of a country or by the distance of an ocean.’ So what is the true legacy of 1989 for the world, and for Germany itself? And what is needed for the people of the two Germanys to really unite? To make Willy Brandt’s words come true: ‘At last, what belongs together can grow together’?

Speakers
Jurgen Kronig
UK editor, Die Zeit; broadcaster; author, The Secret Face of Nature

Professor Jan Palmowski
head, school of arts and humanities, King's College London; author, Inventing a Socialist Nation: Heimat and the politics of everyday life in the GDR, 1945-1990

Sabine Reul
translator, Textbüro Reul GmbH

Chair:
Thomas Deichmann
editor, NovoArgumente; author, Die Steinzeit steckt uns in den Knochen: gesundheit als erbe der evolution


Produced by
Angus Kennedy convenor, The Academy; author, Being Cultured: in defence of discrimination
Thomas Deichmann editor, NovoArgumente; author, Die Steinzeit steckt uns in den Knochen: gesundheit als erbe der evolution
Recommended readings
Germany: still divided after all these years

The fall of the Berlin Wall, far from heralding a unified future, ushered in a new period of discord between west and east.

Sabine Reul, spiked, 12 November 2009

The Greengrocer's Revenge

The fall of communism in 1989 was a great relief to most citizens of the eastern bloc. But in parts of the region many people now feel that only the elites were truly liberated—and now populists are playing on people’s dismay.

Ivan Krastev, Prospect, October 2009

Die Linke is riding a wave, but for how long?

The strange foundations of Germany's surprisingly successful leftist party make its long-term future uncertain.

Jan-Werner Mueller, GuardianComment is free, 25 September 2009

Germany's Election: Divided They Stand

In the run-up to the election, there has been no grand new mission, no ambitious vision of remaking Germany — or Europe, or the world — on view.

Catherine Mayer, Time, 21 September 2009

Why Thatcher defended the Berlin Wall

Secret Kremlin minutes from 1989 reveal that anti-communist Western leaders were privately terrified about the demise of the Soviet bloc.

Mick Hume, spiked, 17 September 2009

Thatcher and Kohl clashed over unity after Fall of the Berlin Wall

Former Chancellor’s memoirs offer an unsparing account of a Prime Minister revealing her prejudices about an old enemy

Roger Boyes, The Times, 11 September 2009

After the Berlin Wall: Putting Two Germanys Back Together Again

In Germany, politicians had to put East and West back together again, marrying a totalitarian, atheist, communist system with a democratic, Christian, capitalist one. How did this marriage affect the everyday life of ordinary Germans?

Christopher Hilton, The History Press Ltd, September 2009

Stasi tried to stop King of Pop’s music drifting over the Wall

It took a lot to frighten the Stasi, East Germany’s notorious secret police, but a moonwalking pop star named Michael Jackson managed to do it.

Roger Boyes, The Times, 31 July 2009

It's 20 years since reunification but is Germany still divided?

The fall of the Berlin Wall was a seismic event in European history. But as Germany prepares to mark the 20th anniversary of its reunification, many are asking: Is there really much to celebrate?

Tony Paterson, Independent, 27 June 2009

Majority of Eastern Germans Feel Life Better under Communism

Glorification of the German Democratic Republic is on the rise two decades after the Berlin Wall fell. Young people and the better off are among those rebuffing criticism of East Germany as an 'illegitimate state.'

Julia Bonstein, Spiegel Online, 7 March 2009

Political Landscape in Flux ahead of 2009 Votes

The year 2009 is full of elections in Germany, with voters in five states set to cast their ballots and a nationwide vote scheduled for September. The result may be a fundamental shift in the country's political landscape.

Charles Hawley, Spiegel Online, 15 January 2009

Eastern Germany Between Boom and Bust

Twenty years after the fall of the Berlin Wall, the social and economic hurdles facing eastern Germany are by no means cleared. The cities may be booming, but it's a different story in smaller towns and in the country.

Oliver Samson, Deutsche Welle, 5 January 2009

Citizenship and National Identity in Twentieth-century Germany

By considering how Germans defined themselves and others, the book explores how nationality and citizenship rights were constructed, and how Germans defined - and contested - their national community over the century.

Geoff Eley & Jan Palmowski (eds.), Stanford University Press, 15 December 2007

Disenchantment with Market Economics: East Germans and Western Capitalism

The life-worlds and personal experiences of workers and employees in three enterprises in East Berlin at the moment of political and economic upheaval stand at the centre of the book.

Birgit Müller, Berghahn Books, 25 September 2007

Brandenburg

Rainald Grebe, YouTube, 2005

Session partners



Battle of Ideas 2009 | session: Debating Development
Debating Development

Saturday 31 October, 12.15pm until 1.15pm, Lecture Theatre 2 Lunchtime Debates

Developing countries account for four-fifths of the world’s population, but economist Paul Collier suggests ‘development has failed’ in many areas, and one billion people ‘are living and dying in fourteenth century conditions’. So what should be done? The Millennium Development Goals set ‘basic’ targets to be achieved by 2015. Even though development assistance rose to record levels in 2008, donors are falling short by $35 billion per year. But is aid the way forward? Can we avoid those least able to provide for themselves becoming aid dependent; or does that matter if the result is saving lives?

There is further controversy about the very desirability of economic growth on the traditional model. Disillusion in the crisis-ridden West has led to the exporting of doubts about growth to countries as diverse as South Africa and China. Take the impact of climate change debates in the West on attitudes to development. The Green New Deal advocates paying indigenous people not to develop in the traditional way, and to become stewards of the environment. Geoffrey Lean, the Independent’s environment editor, suggests developing countries invest in ‘preserving forests, peatlands and soils, which naturally absorb carbon dioxide, (rather) than destroying them and then developing expensive technology to do the job’.

Should the poorest nations be encouraged to adopt a Western model of development, or are there culturally and environmentally divergent paths they should take? Should these nations be ‘mentored and managed’ in the path of development, as Professor Gerard DeGroot suggests, or should they find their own way forward? Indeed, in the course of developing, is the West a hindrance or a help?

Listen to the session audio…

Other formats are available here

Speakers
Humphrey Hawksley
BBC World Affairs correspondent; author, Democracy Kills: what's so good about having the vote?

Alan Shipman
lecturer, department of economics, Open University; former editor, Finance Week; author, The Globalization Myth

Ruth Tanner
director, campaigns and policy, War on Want

Chair:
Kirk Leech
interim director, European Animal Research Campaign Centre; government affairs, Association of the British Pharmaceutical Industry


Produced by
Kirk Leech interim director, European Animal Research Campaign Centre; government affairs, Association of the British Pharmaceutical Industry
Recommended readings
World poverty guru ‘fails’ to spread wealth

“Microcredit is not a transformational panacea that is going to lift people out of poverty,” said Dean Karlan, a Yale economics professor who studied the phenomenon in the Philippines. “There might be little pockets of people who are made better off, but the average effect is weak, if not non-existent.”

Tony Allen-Mills, Sunday Times, 4 October 2009

Do we need to ration growth, and if so, who gets what’s left?

If you want to maximise happiness (a utilitarian argument which offends the rights-based people, I know, but not a bad start) AND prevent catastrophic global warming, you need to make sure that incomes rise in the poor countries, but are steady or falling in the rich ones. i.e. we need to ration growth – it’s just too precious (and dirty) to waste on the rich countries.

Duncan Green, Oxfam BlogsFrom Poverty to Power, 30 September 2009

World Development Report 2010

World Development Report 2010: Development and Climate Change

World Bank, 15 September 2009

Prosperity without Growth?

The UK Government, like many governments around the world, has had a sort of unfailing allegiance to the idea that we must keep the economy growing at all costs, and it’s time to question that goal.

Victor Anderson interviews Professor Tim Jackson, Sustainable Development Commission, 30 March 2009

The politics of development

Far from being the exclusive terrain of experts, the issue of economic growth is one to be considered by society as a whole.

Stuart Simpson, Culture Wars, 21 August 2008

Selling out the ‘bottom billion’

Paul Collier’s book makes astute points about the predicament of the world’s poorest people. But his proposed solutions would likely make their lives even worse.

Daniel Ben-Ami, Selling out the ‘bottom billion’, 27 July 2007

Development should mean more than survival

'Sustainable development' leaves the poor vulnerable to natural disasters.

Daniel Ben-Ami, spiked, 17 January 2005

From Poverty to Power

Gives critical insights into the massive human and economic costs of inequality and poverty and proposes realistic solutions.

Oxfam International

Festival Buzz

"The Battle of Ideas goes from strength to strength. The intensity, variety and depth of debate, sustained for an entire weekend, makes for a unique experience charging the intellectual batteries for the rest of the year."
Raymond Tallis, emeritus professor of geriatric medicine, Manchester University

Battle of Ideas 2009 | session: Post-recession Ideologies: it's the politics, stupid!
Post-recession Ideologies: it's the politics, stupid!

Saturday 31 October, 12.15pm until 1.15pm, Upper Gulbenkian Gallery Lunchtime Debates

The crisis and global economic downturn have cast doubt on capitalism’s capacity to produce wealth. This ought to raise crucial social and political questions as well as economic ones, but there seems to be a dearth of ideas about how to confront the future. Despite alarming recession forecasts, politicians seem incapable of providing convincing answers to the big questions. While the massive bailout of the financial sector marks a break from the days of supposed ‘small government’ and deregulation, this has not led to serious public debate about alternatives. The economy is presented as something beyond the realm of politics, and over which we, the people, have little control.

State spending may well be substantially reduced, and painful cuts in living standards are likely to be felt across the world. Some say conditions of austerity will usher in a new social cohesion by encouraging a return to shared values; others that we will finally accept the environmentalist mantra that less is more. But do these ideas only signal the detachment of a prosperous few from the real concerns of the rest of society? Nostalgics see in the crisis the rebirth of class politics. But apart from isolated wildcat strikes, the popular response so far has been confined to moral outrage. Every day, greedy bankers and capitalism-gone-mad are blamed for it all, but trust in politicians and the institutions of government has hit historic lows too, so we lack the means to change society for the better. Can we build a political alternative to bankrupt New Labour rhetoric and vacuous New Tory opportunism? Can we use the crisis as a spur to re-invent political and economic life?


Listen to the session audio…

Other formats are available here

Speakers
Professor Frank Furedi
sociologist and social commentator; author, What's Happened to the University?, Power of Reading: from Socrates to Twitter, On Tolerance and Authority: a sociological history

Professor Andrew Gamble
head of department, Politics and International Studies, University of Cambridge; author, The Spectre at the Feast: capitalist crisis and the politics of recession

Professor Gareth Stedman-Jones
professor of political thought and director, Centre for History and Economics, King's College Cambridge; author, An End to Poverty?

Chair:
Dr Maria Grasso
lecturer in politics and quantitative methods, Department of Politics, University of Sheffield; author: Generations, Political Participation and Social Change in Western Europe


Produced by
Dr Maria Grasso lecturer in politics and quantitative methods, Department of Politics, University of Sheffield; author: Generations, Political Participation and Social Change in Western Europe
Recommended readings
The Next Culture War

Centuries ago, historians came up with a classic theory to explain the rise and decline of nations. The theory was that great nations start out tough-minded and energetic. Toughness and energy lead to wealth and power. Wealth and power lead to affluence and luxury. Affluence and luxury lead to decadence, corruption and decline.

David Brooks, New York Times, 28 September 2009

Why the state cannot save the economy

Instead of having arid debates about the state versus the market, we must create institutions and policies that can restructure the economy.

Frank Furedi, spiked, 18 June 2009

The Spectre at the Feast

A highly readable account of the current global crisis, its likely trajectories and possible consequences, embedded in a brief but informed overview of theories of capitalist crisis.

Andrew Gamble, Palgrave Macmillan, 15 May 2009

The Tories' economic dilemma

Will the Conservatives stick with the ethos that contributed to the recession, or move into unfamiliar redistributive territory?

Andrew Gamble, Guardian Comment is Free, 26 March 2009

Diseasing the recession

The UK government’s offer of free therapy to victims of the slump turns a socioeconomic crisis into a mental health issue.

Frank Furedi, spiked, 9 March 2009

The spirit of optimism

We must fight the belief that political decisions are pre-ordained and that participation is futile.

Andrew Gamble, Guardian Comment is Free, 15 December 2008

Capitalism after the ‘credit crunch’: what is it good for?

In the run-up to a debate at the Battle of Ideas, Frank Furedi takes on capitalism’s half-hearted advocates and its misanthropic critics.

Frank Furedi, spiked, 30 October 2008

The ‘Credit Crunch’ and London’s Economy

The UK economy is slothful rather than sound and too reliant on too few ‘essentials’; the credit crisis is symptomatic of deeper, structural problems facing the UK and Western economies; and these underlying problems are unlikely to be addressed in Britain by current government priorities.

Gavin Poynter, Rising East, July 2008

Politics and Fate by Andrew Gamble

The first two sentences of this short book state clearly what the author is about: to explore the current disenchantment with politics in the West.

Bernard Crick, Independent, 31 May 2001

Session partners



Battle of Ideas 2009 | session: Data Sharing or Database State?
Data Sharing or Database State?

Saturday 31 October, 12.15pm until 1.15pm, Courtyard Gallery Lunchtime Debates

It is increasingly argued that the welfare state must use information more intelligently so it can deliver more personalised services. Increasing quantities of data are being made available to public service providers. The theory goes that a more ‘intelligent state’ can be achieved through learning from data taken from both a micro (personal) and macro (system/organisational) level, and using this information about ‘customers’ allows the state to provide higher quality targeted services at lower cost.

But for all the alleged gains of efficiency, what about the ethics of data-sharing? Are government agencies, from social services to local GPs, from education to employment, blithely disregarding their clients’ privacy? Arguably patients may suffer if rules surrounding data sharing prevent access to the best clinical care, but doctor-patient confidentiality traditionally provided an important protection for individuals against the exploitation of medical information. Critics of the new ContactPoint database, which stores information about every child in the UK from birth, argue its purpose goes beyond child protection and intrusively polices family life. More pragmatically, can the government be trusted to store personal information safely, and what are the security risks of government departments sharing data? A recent Mori poll showed that more than 60% of the public are happy for their data to be used but 75% don’t trust the government to handle it securely.

Are those who cry ‘privacy’ over-reacting? Should the interests of wider society and an efficient welfare state trump those individuals who want personal privacy? When does surveillance, electronic communications monitoring, or large scale data collection and matching, lead to a Big Brother state? Perhaps data-sharing would be acceptable if it operated on an informed consent basis, where people could opt in or out. With such fundamental issues at stake regarding the relationship between citizens and the state, is it possible to achieve a balance?

Listen to the session audio…

Other formats are available here

Speakers
Dr Ian Brown
senior research fellow, Oxford Internet Institute, University of Oxford; co-author, Online Privacy and the Law (forthcoming)

Rob Killick
CEO, Clerkswell; author, The UK After The Recession

Sir David Varney
former executive chairman, HM Revenue & Customs; former CEO designate, British Gas; author, Service Transformation: A better service for citizens and businesses, a better deal for the taxpayer

Chair:
Jo Herlihy
customer insight manager, Nottinghamshire County Council


Produced by
Jo Herlihy customer insight manager, Nottinghamshire County Council
Recommended readings
Long live the database state

Smarter use of public service statistics can save lives as well as money. But anxious civil libertarians want to stop the state sharing our personal records. They must not succeed.

Tim Kelsey, Prospect, 30 July 2009

Minding the gap

While authorities are beginning to share information more frequently, there is still a gap between the availability of data, and how it is used to help vulnerable children.

Nic Fell, LocalGov, 29 July 2009

Safeguarding Identity Strategy

Safeguarding identity strategy ... aims to deliver a common framework for the use and handling of individuals' identity information.

Identity & Passport Service, Home Office, June 2009

It’s ours: Why we, not government should own our data

Control over our personal data is at the heart of the Labour Government’s plans for improving delivery of public services. Information on how we live our lives is to be centralised so that the State can decide when and where to provide public services. It is a “we know best” approach, a panopticon, with government insight into every aspect of our lives.

Liam Maxwell, Centre for Policy Studies, June 2009

Privacy and the public

Privacy intrusions don’t just happen when information is inappropriately gathered, stored or shared. Intervention in people’s private lives and private thoughts now occurs so routinely around that it has become a normal fact of life.

Jo Herlihy, Culture Wars, 22 May 2009

The database state we're in

The Joseph Rowntree Reform Trust has published a major report on the UK's Database State. Technology is transforming government, and there is an urgent need to control and understand it.

Anthony Barnett, openDemocracy, 22 March 2009

Database State

In October 2007 Her Majesty’s Revenue and Customs lost two discs containing a copy of the entire child benefit database. Suddenly issues of privacy and data security were on the front page of most newspapers and leading the TV news bulletins.

Ross Anderson, Ian Brown, Terri Dowty et al, Joseph Rowntree Reform Trust, March 2009

Patient confidentiality and central databases

2008 may be the year when GPs find themselves in the firing line over confidentiality, as ever more patients try to opt out of ‘the NHS database’ and the Government tries ever more desperately to keep the project on track.

Ross Anderson, British Journal of General Practice, 1 February 2008

All UK 'must be on DNA database'

The whole population and every UK visitor should be added to the national DNA database, a senior judge has said.

BBC News, 5 September 2007

Service Transformation: a Better Service for Citizens and Businesses, a Better Deal for Taxpayers

... an aspect of the report is to identify the opportunities to deliver better public services through joining up service provision across the public sector.

Sir David Varney, HM Treasury, December 2006

Database master class

This is a blog project designed to give you your very own cut-out'n'keep guide to all of the children's databases

Action on Rights for Children

Session partners



Battle of Ideas 2009 | session: Genetics and genomics: medicine made to measure?
Genetics and genomics: medicine made to measure?

Saturday 31 October, 12.15pm until 1.15pm, Lecture Theatre 1 Lunchtime Debates

Hardly a week goes by without another report of a gene involved in one condition or another being discovered. Groups such as the Wellcome Trust’s Case Control Consortium have discovered complex and subtle genetic involvement in conditions such as obesity and diabetes, moving beyond simple ‘gene for’ associations; uncovering large numbers of genes with small effects, rather than small numbers with large effects. Other teams have used genetics to predict how patients might respond to particular drugs, enabling those most likely to benefit to be idetified, and allowing others to avoid unnecessary treatment and side effects. The application of genetics and genomics to medical treatment has fast been moving from science fiction to reality. 

These developments are allowing exciting leaps forward in human health, but what might be the implications of this new technology? What are the real scientific insights behind the headlines, and what might they mean for us? How will these breakthroughs change healthcare? Will knowing our genetic destinies benefit insurers more than patients? With some drugs, such as BiDil, being prescribed on racial grounds, could personalisation of medicine be moving into dangerous territory? And as the practices of many private companies offering genetic testing have come in for criticism, should there be more regulation of the ‘Wild West’ of medical genetics?

Listen to the session audio…

Other formats are available here

Speakers
Dr Philippa Brice
head, knowledge and communications, Foundation for Genomics and Population Health

Professor Peter Donnelly
director, Wellcome Trust Centre for Human Genetics; professor, statistical science, University of Oxford

John Gillott
researcher, Innogen, Open University; co-author, Science and the Retreat from Reason

Mark Henderson
head of communications, Wellcome Trust; author, The Geek Manifesto: why science matters

Chair:
Robin Walsh
graduate medical student; co-founder, Sheffield Salon


Produced by
Robin Walsh graduate medical student; co-founder, Sheffield Salon
Recommended readings
Dorian Gray: is there a secret to eternal youth?

Dorian Gray achieved eternal youth; now science is moving towards the same goal. Will some people today live to 1,000?

Anjana Ahuja, The Times, 8 September 2009

personalized medicine 101

Personalized medicine uses new methods of molecular analysis to better manage a patient’s disease or predisposition toward a disease. It aims to achieve optimal medical outcomes by helping physicians and patients choose the disease management approaches likely to work best in the context of a patient’s genetic and environmental profile.

Personalized Medicine Coalition, 2009

Notes from a young science

The perhaps slightly boring answer, that there is a ‘bit of both’ nature and nurture involved in human existence, still hasn’t answered the question where the influence of each begins and ends, and more importantly, how we might control them both.

Robin Walsh, Culture Wars, 8 May 2009

50 Genetics Ideas You Really Need to Know

In recent years knowledge of our genetic code has changed our understanding of life on Earth. New genetic technologies are transforming the way we live and promise treatments for otherwise incurable diseases. But these advances are also generating controversy, particularly surrounding issues such as cloning and designer babies.

Mark Henderson, Quercus, 2 April 2009

Obesity: Gene discovery suggests some people are hardwired to overeat

The discovery of six genes that raise the risk of obesity highlights the role of the brain in making people more likely to overeat.

Ian Sample, Guardian, 15 December 2008

The day I had my genes tested

DNA analysis for diseases such as cancer and Alzheimer's is growing in popularity, but scientists are doubtful of its value. James Randerson pays £825 to try it.

James Randerson, Guardian, 9 December 2008

Spit parties: Genetic testing becomes a social activity

A company is glamorising genetic testing by taking spit samples at high-society parties to give customers risk profiles for various diseases. But are consumers being given the full story about what genetic risk means?

Imran Khan, Guardian Science Blog, 18 September 2008

Gene therapy: how science moved from hype to hope

‘Magic bullets’ for killer diseases were once the medical goal, but only now is the true value of genetics being understood – and it’s the many, not the few, who will benefit.

Mark Henderson, The Times, 2 June 2007

Science and the Retreat from Reason

Examines the roots of the public's waning faith in science. The authors look at the effects of discoveries in quantum mechanics, the postwar loss of certainty in the sciences, chaos and complexity, science and humanism, the quest for beauty in science, and the mystical tendency in popular science.

John Gillot and Manjit Kumar, Monthly Review Press, 31 December 1997


Session partners





Battle of Ideas 2009 | session: The Fight over Flight: what's the problem with air travel?
The Fight over Flight: what's the problem with air travel?

Saturday 31 October, 12.15pm until 1.15pm, Student Union

The recently approved plans for a third runway at Heathrow have sparked fierce debate about air travel. Anti-flying groups have spoken up in opposition to the plans, mostly citing environmental concerns. While many are concerned about the environmental impact airport expansion will have, however, others worry that restricting the continuing expansion of our freedom of movement would be a backwards step. Regular air travel has only recently become affordable for most people, and critics of anti-flying groups argue there is a heavy dose of snobbery in their dismissal of the right of ‘chavs’ to fly off for ‘stag nights in Prague’. So is there more to the fight over flight than concerns about carbon emissions?

At a time when it seems we are working more than ever, and our leisure hours are dwindling, others feel that wasting precious time on long, flight-avoiding journeys is a price they are simply not willing to pay. Moreover, some claim airport expansion and transport infrastructure development will bring much-needed jobs amid the recession. But this is countered by the argument that the downturn is an opportunity to develop ‘green jobs’ rather than expanding environmentally harmful industries.

BA has sparked much outrage by asking its staff to work for free to help the company survive, and Ryanair’s Michael O’Leary continues to tout ever more outrageous cost-cutting measures for workers and passengers alike. Meanwhile campaign groups like Campaign for Better Transport complain air prices are kept artificially low by government subsidy, avoiding investment in other, more sustainable forms of transport. The economy, they argue, would benefit by more people taking a ‘staycation’ in the UK. Is the freedom of flight now a necessity to be defended, or a luxury we should sacrifice for the good of the planet? Should the government be prepared to develop and enable air travel as much as possible, or should we instead focus on improving our domestic infrastructure?

Listen to the session audio…

Other formats are available here

Speakers
Dr Mayer Hillman
environmentalist; senior fellow emeritus, Policy Studies Institute; author/co-author of over 50 books, including How We Can Save the Planet and The Suicidal Planet

Darren Johnson
Green Party member and chair, London Assembly; leader, Lewisham Council Green Group

Peter Smith
director of tourism, St. Mary’s University College, Twickenham, London; co-author, Volunteer Tourism: the lifestyle politics of international development

Chair:
Abigail Ross-Jackson
speakers' agent, Ed Victor Speakers Bureau LLP


Produced by
David Bowden associate fellow, Academy of Ideas; culture writer
Abigail Ross-Jackson speakers' agent, Ed Victor Speakers Bureau LLP
Recommended readings
BA boss questions flying motives

'I don't believe people fly because they like the idea of flying, particularly business people,' British Airways boss Willie Walsh has said.

BBC News, 19 October 2009

BAA to give up on third Heathrow runway

THE airport operator BAA has bowed to opposition to a third runway at Heathrow airport. It will not submit a planning application before the general election and will not sign large contracts to “bounce” a future Conservative government into accepting it.

Chris Gourlay and Jon Ungoed-Thomas, The Times, 12 October 2009

Do you care about your children? Then stop flying

The industry is perhaps the most unsustainable on the planet

Mark Lynas, Independent, 10 September 2009

Planes 'threaten climate targets'

The UK may have to cut emissions of greenhouse gases by 90% by 2050 so the aviation sector can continue to grow.

Roger Harrabin, BBC News, 9 September 2009

Cost of air travel 'must rise to deter people from flying'

Government advisory body on climate change says ticket prices should rise to ensure emissions fall to 2005 levels.

David Batty and Caroline Davies, Guardian, 9 September 2009

Why I’m standing up for the right to fly

The co-founder of Modern Movement explains why they’re holding a pro-flight demo in London on Thursday.

Alex Hochuli, spiked, 19 February 2009

Class hatred at Stansted Airport

Posh Plane Stupid insists that it is not picking on poor people. So why is it so madly obsessed with cheap flights?

Brendan O'Neill, spiked, 9 December 2008

Nuclear-powered passenger aircraft 'to transport millions' says expert

Call for big research programme to help aviation industry convert from fossil fuels to nuclear energy.

Ben Webster, The Times, 28 October 2008

The menace of cheap travel

Publishers are on dodgy ground when they advise readers against ‘frivolous’ travel, since they have little intention of slowing down themselves.

Mark Khazar, Battles in Print, 1 October 2006

The Social Consequences of Hypermobility

Mobility is liberating and empowering. But it is possible to have too much of a good thing. The growth in the numbers exercising their freedom and power is fouling the planet and jamming its arteries.

John Adams, RSA, 21 November 2001

Terminal 5 Inquiry: The implications of climate change for the future of air travel

It is clear that, in light of the scale of reduction needed, no substantial sector of the economy can be excused from reducing its greenhouse gas emissions, and especially those fossil fuel-consuming ones contributing most damage.

Mayer Hillman, Government of London, 1 April 1998

Session partners





Battle of Ideas 2009 | session: Social Science for Schools at the Ideas Market
Social Science for Schools at the Ideas Market

Saturday 31 October, 10.30am until 5.00pm, Lower level exhibition space

Bringing social science to teachers Social Science for Schools is a new website for teachers, from the Economic and Social Research Council. The website brings social science research to the classroom - whether you’re looking for research resources, news stories or a blog to discuss issues and ideas, our website has it all.

www.socialscienceforschools.org.uk

Come and view the website at the ESRC stall in the Ideas Market.

Speakers
Chair:


Produced by
Festival Buzz

"The Battle of Ideas goes from strength to strength. The intensity, variety and depth of debate, sustained for an entire weekend, makes for a unique experience charging the intellectual batteries for the rest of the year."
Raymond Tallis, emeritus professor of geriatric medicine, Manchester University

Battle of Ideas 2009 | session: Rethinking education – the new crisis of adult authority in the classroom
Rethinking education – the new crisis of adult authority in the classroom
OPENING FESTIVAL LECTURE and Q & A

Saturday 31 October, 10.30am until 12.00pm, Upper Gulbenkian Gallery Keynote Controversies

Endless disputes about everything from the role of assessments, exams and inspections to the content of the curriculum seem to add up to a crisis in schooling. In his new book, Wasted – Why education isn’t educating, Professor Frank Furedi argues these controversies are symptoms of a more fundamental problem: confusion about adult authority. Since education requires the conscious and regular imposition of that authority, it is here that the crisis is most pronounced. The insecurity experienced by a significant section of the teaching profession in dealing with pupils’ misbehaviour suggests they often feel powerless, but apprehensions about discipline are only the starkest expression of unease about adult authority. Teaching inevitably involves an unequal relationship between adults and children. It presupposes that the older generation has something important to impart. And in order to learn, children have to accept of the authority of the teacher who embodies knowledge of a subject. But today, teachers and parents alike often try to avoid acting authoritatively because they feel uncomfortable with this hierarchical role. We’re all familiar with how many teachers and parents affect the role of a ‘mate’ in their dealings with children. It is even common for teachers to call themselves ‘learners’, and listening to the ‘pupil voice’ is a mandatory requirement of school life.

While this trend is presented as progressive and enlightened, critics like Furedi argue it represents an evasion of the responsibility that grown-ups have towards the younger generation. Teachers need to assume pedagogic authority in order to initiate, direct and set the terms of their relationship with children, often imposing demands on youngsters that go against the child’s inclination, such as insisting that children study a topic in which they have no interest, but which is nevertheless fundamentally important for their development. Similarly, teachers need to set boundaries to help children acquire the habit of self-discipline and concentration, and curb their tendency to get distracted. What are the consequences when teachers flounder and accommodate to the inclinations and feelings of children?  Without conscious adult guidance, how can education be anything other than an arbitrary and confusing experience? 

Listen to the session audio…

Other formats are available here

Speakers
Professor Frank Furedi
sociologist and social commentator; author, What's Happened to the University?, Power of Reading: from Socrates to Twitter, On Tolerance and Authority: a sociological history

Chair:
Claire Fox
director, Academy of Ideas; panellist, BBC Radio 4's Moral Maze; author, I Find That Offensive


Produced by
Claire Fox director, Academy of Ideas; panellist, BBC Radio 4's Moral Maze; author, I Find That Offensive
Recommended readings
Give teachers authority or betray our children

I was talking to a group of 12-year-olds about their life at school. One of them gazed at me with a puzzled demeanour and asked:

Frank Furedi, London Evening Standard, 29 October 2009

The teachers who can do no right

A report claims that a third of teachers have been falsely accused of wrongdoing. Frank Furedi argues that it's time parents recognised their responsibilities.

Frank Furedi, The Times, 27 October 2009

Terrorised by toddlers

Schools now expel pupils as young as three. Are children so bad? No – it’s adults’ fault.

Frank Furedi, Sunday Times, 25 October 2009

Wasted: Why Education Isn't Educating

Education is praised for its potential contribution to economic development, as a central instrument for encouraging social inclusion and mobility. Increasingly, the promotion of education has little to do with learning as such.

Frank Furedi, Continuum, 30 September 2009

Specialist pleading

One of the most influential contemporary cultural myths is that our era is characterised by the end of deference.

Frank Furedi, The Australian, 2 September 2009

Hijacking education

From global warming alarmism dressed up as Geography to 'happiness teaching' through yoga: the classroom has been hijacked by zealous campaigners who care little for pedagogy.

Frank Furedi, spiked, 11 June 2007

Session partners



in association with

Battle of Ideas 2009 | session: It's not fair! The Battle for Equality
It's not fair! The Battle for Equality

Saturday 31 October, 10.30am until 12.00pm, Lecture Theatre 2

From the French revolutionary motto of ‘liberty, equality, fraternity!’ onwards, the battle for equality has been integral to politics. Now it seems ‘fairness’ is the political catchphrase of the day. Gordon Brown has pledged to be ‘the rock of stability and fairness upon which people stand’, close tax loopholes and provide extra support for those who ‘play by the rules’. Is ‘fairness’ just a platitude, a new word for old politics, or a means of ‘sharing out the pain’ of the recession? It has recently become fashionable to attribute all manner of social ills to inequality. The recent influential book The Spirit Level argues that unequal societies are bad not just for the poor, but for almost everyone. Economic growth, it claims, has largely finished its work and the emphasis should today be on spreading the wealth around. Some go further in claiming the pursuit of wealth makes us unhappy. Is there more to life than materialism?

The conventional narrative suggests the left-right struggle between equality and liberty was won by Thatcherite individualism. Inequality has increased in Anglo-Saxon societies, with the top 10% now earning nearly ten times more than the bottom 10%. Everything from crime and teenage pregnancy to a decline in community cohesion has been linked with this. For some, the financial crisis is proof that individualism, and even material aspiration, must be restrained. Equality must not be sacrificed on the altar of economic growth. Instead we should strive for a more stable and equal society. But is this an impoverished understanding of equality as ‘levelling-down’?  Is there really a choice to be made between economic growth and equality? And if inequality really is the problems, what’s the solution? Is equality an abstract, self-evident good, or does ‘equality’ only gain meaning when it is premised on a more free society too?

Listen to the session audio…

Other formats are available here

Speakers
Karen Chouhan
race equality consultant; founder and director, Equanomics-UK; founder member and board director, 1990 Trust Roots Research Centre

Anna Minton
writer and journalist; author, Ground Control: fear and happiness in the twenty-first century city

Bruno Waterfield
Brussels correspondent, The Times; co-author, No Means No

Chair:
Alex Hochuli
communications consultant, researcher and blogger based in São Paulo


Produced by
Alex Hochuli communications consultant, researcher and blogger based in São Paulo
Recommended readings
How messy it all is

More equality is a good thing and it’s an idea that’s worth defending. It would be nice if there were more politicians willing to stand up and defend it, however they saw fit. That may be wishful thinking. But so too is the idea of an evidence-based politics, which just opens the door to all the prevarications of joined-up thinking.

David Runciman, London Review of Books, 22 October 2009

Towards a better measure of well-being

Advances in research enable us now to develop broader measures of well-being. Health, education, security and social connectedness all are important to quality of life – but are not adequately reflected in GDP.

Joseph Stiglitz, Financial Times, 13 September 2009

What Matters

It would be a mistake to think that because the US is a less racist, sexist and homophobic society, it is a more equal society. In fact, in certain crucial ways it is more unequal than it was 40 years ago.

Walter Benn Michaels, London Review of Books, 27 August 2009

Spare a thought for the undeserving rich

Forget a High Pay Commission, making people’s earnings public would create a fairer society – and be more fun

David Aaronovitch, The Times, 19 August 2009

Equality row reveals a deeper rift for Labour

The meltdown at the human rights quango is more than a bureaucratic squabble. It is about the future of the Centre Left

Rachel Sylvester, The Times, 4 August 2009

Distorting the spirit of equality

The Spirit Level, a new book on why equal societies are better than unequal ones, fancies itself in the tradition of the French Revolution. In truth, it turns equality from a political goal into a therapeutic imperative.

Daniel Ben-Ami, spiked, 22 March 2009

The Spirit Level: Why More Equal Societies Almost Always Do Better

Large inequalities of income in a society have often been regarded as divisive and corrosive, and it is common knowledge that in rich societies the poor have shorter lives and suffer more from almost every social problem.

Richard Wilkinson & Kate Pickett, Allen Lane, 5 March 2009

Why Politics Matters: Making Democracy Work

Achieving mass democracy was the great triumph of the twentieth century. Learning to live with it will be the greatest achievement of the twenty-first century. A rising tide of discontent is posing a major crisis for systems of mass democracy: the evidence is clear to see in reduced turnout and party membership and in opinion surveys.

Gerry Stoker, Palgrave Macmillan, 7 July 2006


Session partners





Battle of Ideas 2009 | session: Chav-bashing: demonising the ‘white working class’?
Chav-bashing: demonising the ‘white working class’?

Saturday 31 October, 10.30am until 12.00pm, Café

When a holiday firm can offer ‘chav-free holidays’ and a London gymnasium puts on lessons in ‘chav-fighting’ it seems like ‘chav’ is one of the few socially acceptable slurs left. Some commentators argue that the term is an expression of class prejudice as morally reprehensible as racism. Underlying the discussion, however, is a widespread perception that a significant section of society has values and norms of behaviour that are highly problematic. The c-word may be regarded with distaste, but the spectre of an yobbish, BNP-electing class looms large in the popular imagination, while ‘McDonald’s Mums’ and ‘binge-drinking ladettes’ are widely regarded with disdain.

Often this group is regarded more sympathetically as a marginalised ‘white working class’ demoralised by political correctness and multiculturalism. Others blame a failing educational system for turning out a generation of NEETs who are unfit for either employment or training. The Department for Communities argues working class kids have a ‘poverty of aspiration’ and proposes mentoring to broaden their horizons.

But do the discussions about ‘chavs’ or the ‘white working class’ describe real problems or are they symptomatic of less tangible cultural anxieties? Who exactly are these fluid terms meant to describe? Is there really a majority working class culture threatened by political correctness? Is the celebration of ‘chav-culture’, from the Dianafication of Jade Goody to artistic depictions of happy-slapping and graffiti, an antidote to snobbery, or does it risks turning its supposed objects into another pitied minority?


Listen to the session audio…

 

Other formats are available here

Speakers
Neil Davenport
sociology and politics teacher; writer on culture; former music journalist

Professor Geoff Dench
senior fellow, Young Foundation; sociologist; writer on family and community issues

Dr Gillian Evans
lecturer, social anthropology, Centre for Research on Socio-Cultural Change (CRESC), University of Manchester; author, Educational Failure and Working Class White Children in Britain

Suzanne Moore
columnist, The Mail on Sunday; founding member, New Deal of the Mind Coalition

Chair:
Martin Earnshaw
co-editor Future of Community: reports of a death greatly exaggerated; chair, IoI Social Policy Forum


Produced by
Martin Earnshaw co-editor Future of Community: reports of a death greatly exaggerated; chair, IoI Social Policy Forum
Recommended readings
The BNP can be dismissed - but their constituency can not

Politicians should have paid attention years ago to the growing alienation of the old white working class

James Forsyth, Telegraph, 24 October 2009

All in it together? Some of us are much more in it than others, George

The blending of Right-wing fiscal policy with the belief that it somehow helps those at the very bottom is the essence of the thesis. ‘We are all in it together,’ said Osborne. To which one can only reply: Some are clearly more in IT than others.

Suzanne Moore, Mail on Sunday, 10 October 2009

You say ‘underclass’, we say ‘white trash’

Chris Grayling’s comparison of Moss Side with The Wire was silly, but his critics have vilified the working class, too.

Neil Davenport, spiked, 27 August 2009

What Matters

It would be a mistake to think that because the US is a less racist, sexist and homophobic society, it is a more equal society. In fact, in certain crucial ways it is more unequal than it was 40 years ago.

Walter Benn Michaels, London Review of Books, 27 August 2009

Yes family breakdown IS behind broken Britain

Britain is jostling for the dubious honour of the sickest lifestyle in Western Europe. Government figures show our adults are the most obese, and 11 to 15-year-olds who drink, are drinking more - the average weekly intake being over six pints. According to The Children's Society charity, a higher percentage of youngsters are getting drunk than in any other OECD country.

John Ware, Daily Mail, 11 July 2009

How to beat up chavs

A London gym is offering people lessons in headbutting hoodies and duffing up ‘the scourge’ of society.

Tim Black, spiked, 27 April 2009

The Spirit Level: Why More Equal Societies Almost Always Do Better

Large inequalities of income in a society have often been regarded as divisive and corrosive, and it is common knowledge that in rich societies the poor have shorter lives and suffer more from almost every social problem.

Richard Wilkinson & Kate Pickett, Allen Lane, 5 March 2009

Britain has produced unteachable 'uber-chavs'

Britain has produced a generation of

Nick Britten, Telegraph, 9 February 2009

Sources of resentment, and perceptions of ethnic minorities among poor white people in England

This report examines sources of resentment, and perceptions of ethnic minorities among poor white people in England.

Department for Communities and Local Government, Department for Communities and Local Government, 7 January 2009

Who cares about the White Working Class?

Life chances for today’s children are overwhelmingly linked to parental income, occupations and educational qualifications – in other words, class. The poor white working class share many more problems with the poor from minority ethnic communities than some of them recognize.

Runnymede Trust, Runnymede, January 2009

Welcome to Everytown: A Journey into the English Mind

Philosopher Julian Baggini pinpointed postcode S66 on the outskirts of Rotherham, as England in microcosm - an area which reflected most accurately the full range of the nation's inhabitants, its most typical mix of urban and rural, old and young, married and single.

Julian Baggini, Granta Books, 1 April 2008

Educational Failure and Working Class White Children in Britain

What does it mean to be working class in Britain at the beginning of the 21st century? Why, despite over 50 years of compulsory education in Britain, are many working class children still likely to end up in the same kind of low-paid, routine occupations as their parents?

Gillian Evans, Palgrave Macmillan, 25 May 2007

The New East End: Kinship, Race and Conflict

This is non-fiction Brick Lane -what life is really like around Brick Lane and the East End.

Geoff Dench, Profile Books, 17 February 2006

The Likes of Us: A Biography of the White Working Class

Once they were portrayed as the salt of the earth. Nowadays, they take to the streets when paedophiles and asylum seekers are in their midst; they expose their lives in TV documentaries; they love Gucci and hate the Euro - the broadsheets cast them as xenophobes and exhibitionists and mock their tastes and attitudes. Who are the white working class and what have they done to deserve this portrayal?

Michael Collins, Granta Books, 6 June 2005


Session partners



Battle of Ideas 2009 | session: Young Journalists Academy at the Ideas Market
Young Journalists Academy at the Ideas Market

Saturday 31 October, 10.30am until 5.00pm, Lower level exhibition space

Graduates of the Young Journalists’ Academy (YJA) will be reporting and blogging on the festival. The YJA offers 16- to 18-year-old London state school pupils a route into the competitive media industry. Participants at the YJA summer school learn all the tricks of the trade from top journalists. Students train in everything from investigative journalism to celebrity reporting and photo editing. Read more about the programme at www.yja.org.uk and on Times Online.

The YJA team and recent alumni will be available in the Ideas Market at 3pm on Saturday to answer questions and tell you more about the programme.

Speakers
Chair:


Produced by
Session partners







Battle of Ideas 2009 | session: Foyles Festival Bookshop
Foyles Festival Bookshop

Saturday 31 October, 10.30am until 6.00pm, Upper exhibition space

Foyles will once again run the festival bookshop, stocking books by festival speakers and others related to the Battle of Ideas 2009 themes. This year the expanded bookshop will include shelves to browse, seating areas to read in and author signings (look out for details at the festival).

Foyles is a Charing Cross Road institution, but in the last few years the entire shop has been refitted. It still has an unparalleled range of books at its heart, with five floor of books on 56 specialist subjects, but also features an art gallery, a café, Ray’s Jazz shop and a flourishing programme of author events.

This year Foyles, Charing Cross Road will host a Battle Satellite on contemporary interest in, and our changing social and cultural understanding of, autism on Monday 12 October.

Speakers
Chair:


Produced by
Session partners



Battle of Ideas 2009 | session: Frankenstein's Daughters: from science fiction to science fact?
Frankenstein's Daughters: from science fiction to science fact?

Saturday 31 October, 10.30am until 12.00pm, Lecture Theatre 1

Developments in pre-implantation genetic diagnosis and screening (PGD and PGS) allow couples to avoid having children with life-threatening conditions, but they also imply the possibility that some specific forms of disability will be ‘screened out’, raising the prospect of a generation of ‘designer babies’. Many religious groups rail against scientists ‘playing God’. While some disability campaigners fear that the use of PGD and PGS will devalue people born with disabilities, disabled people could potentially use ARTs to select a child that shares their physical impairment: in one high-profile case a deaf couple challenged the assumption that an embryo likely to be deaf should be rejected. Current UK law means ‘normal’ embryos must always be preferred, but is this appropriate given that the state does not prevent two deaf people from becoming parents together ordinarily?

Where does science fact meet science fiction and how can we distinguish between the two outside of the lab? How far should the decisions of HFEA committees regulate individuals’ decision-making and clinicians’ practice? Should the media take a more measured approach to reporting on science and reproduction - or do journalists have a duty to inform us of the worst possible outcomes as well as the most probable? Does pre-implantation genetic screening imply an attack on disabled people? Can biomedical breakthroughs shape what it is to be human?



Listen to the session audio…

Other formats are available here

Speakers
Mark Henderson
head of communications, Wellcome Trust; author, The Geek Manifesto: why science matters

Ken MacLeod
award-winning science fiction writer; author, Descent, The Restoration Game and Intrusion; writer-in-residence, MA Creative Writing, Edinburgh Napier University 2013-2014

Sandy Starr
communications officer, Progress Educational Trust; webmaster, BioNews

Dr Alan Thornhill
scientific director, The London Bridge Fertility, Gynaecology and Genetics Centre

Chair:
Fiona Fox
director, Science Media Centre.


Produced by
Tony Gilland associate fellow, Academy of Ideas
Recommended readings
A step forward for genetic embryo-screening

Pre-implantation genetic diagnosis (PGD), which screens embryos for inherited disease so that only unaffected ones are implanted in the womb, has helped hundreds of families to have healthy children since it was developed in the late 1980s by a team led by Professor Alan Handyside of Hammersmith Hospital.

Mark Henderson, The Times, 26 October 2009

The Hype and the Hope: Press Coverage of Hybrid Embryos

Researchers at the School have been the first to examine the press coverage of the controversies around creating animal-human hybrid embryos for stem cell research in a new report published this week.

Cardiff School of Journalism, Media and Cultural Studies, 25 June 2009

The Great Designer Baby Controversy of ’09

The Fertility Institutes Back Away From Making History

Michael Anissimov, hplus magazine, 11 June 2009

IVF twins at greater risk of illness or early death, new study shows

Twins born as a result of fertility treatment are at greater risk of serious illness or dying in the first three years of their life than those who are conceived naturally, a study suggests.

David Rose, The Times, 21 May 2009

50 Genetics Ideas You Really Need to Know

In recent years knowledge of our genetic code has changed our understanding of life on Earth. New genetic technologies are transforming the way we live and promise treatments for otherwise incurable diseases. But these advances are also generating controversy, particularly surrounding issues such as cloning and designer babies.

Mark Henderson, Quercus, 2 April 2009

Hybrids: separating hope from the hype

Recent weeks have seen a furore erupt over controversial laws that would allow the creation of human-animal embryos for research, with much talk of the sacredness of human life and the danger of scientists playing God.

Roger Highfield, Telegraph, 8 April 2008

Should we stamp out ‘designer deafness’?

Sandy Starr of the Progress Educational Trust asks why the UK government is legislating against something as rare as pro-deaf embryo selection.

Sandy Starr, spiked, 31 March 2008

Life, Death and IVF

What this couple seem to have been trying to do is simply object to the Human Embryology and Fertility Bill which makes it illegal to implant a

The Goldfish, BBC Ouch! Blog, 14 March 2008

Mapping morality: the ethics of technology

From miltary hardware to medical science, technology provokes some tough moral questions.

Jonathan Weber, The Times, 19 November 2007

Session partners





Battle of Ideas 2009 | session: Festival Art Exhibition 2009
Festival Art Exhibition 2009

Saturday 31 October, 10.30am until 5.00pm, Entrance Gallery

In the Entrance Gallery there will be a specially curated exhibition of selected works of Fine Art students from the RCA. The nature of the students’ work selected, and the ethos of the show celebrates the processes and working methods that foster speculation and exploration.

CURATOR: David Rayson, professor and head of department, School of Fine Art, Department of Painting, RCA

Featuring work by

David Buckley
C Powell-Williams
Mark Davey
Krister Klassman
Joseph Long
Christopher Barr
Tara Langford
Cordelia Cembrowicz
Amit Nachumi
Diana Fiedler

Speakers
Chair:


Produced by
Session partners



Battle of Ideas 2009 | session: Is there a global power shift from West to East?
Is there a global power shift from West to East?

Saturday 31 October, 10.30am until 12.00pm, Henry Moore Gallery

The current economic crisis has led to calls for a new financial order, a Bretton Woods II. But can US President Obama reshape the world in the way that Roosevelt and Truman did when America was the supreme world power? Or is China ready to take over from America and lead the world? It is less than a century since Britain effectively surrendered its position as a military superpower to the US, having first been eclipsed by American economic power. The UK only hung on to a certain superiority based on assumed cultural pre-eminence and expertise in international diplomacy compared to its brash American cousins. Today, while America no doubt remains the world’s biggest economic and military power by far, it is also clear that its political power is not what it was. Embroiled in two seemingly unsuccessful conflicts in Iraq and Afghanistan, and facing the biggest economic crisis since the Depression, American might no longer seems to translate into a confident projection of power onto the world. When Obama says America is ready to lead once more, we wonder where exactly he wants to lead us, and why he seems to be asking permission.

Although China may raise the odd difficult question about the role of the dollar as world currency and call for reform of the world’s institutions, it by no means seems ready to take up the baton; instead it self-consciously avoids conflict, projecting only ‘soft power’. India looks over her shoulder at China, while Russia, while maybe willing to lead the world, is hardly a credible or popular choice. Are we entering a new period in world affairs in which the old power is crumbling away from within - more unsure of itself and its mission than under any real challenge - and no new power is ready to take its place? What might this imply for international relations? A new form of global parity and co-operation, or a world bereft of direction and incapable of containing local conflicts, scared of its own shadow?

Speakers
Dr Kerry Brown
director, Lau China Institute, King's College, London; and Associate Fellow at Chatham House

Professor Bill Durodié
head of department and chair of international relations, University of Bath

Dr Tara McCormack
lecturer in international politics, University of Leicester; author, Critique, Security and Power: the political limits to emancipatory approaches

Gideon Rachman
chief foreign affairs commentator, Financial Times; author, Zero-sum World: politics, power and prosperity after the crash

Chair:
Dr Philip Cunliffe
senior lecturer in international conflict, University of Kent; co-editor, Politics Without Sovereignty: a critique of contemporary international relations.


Produced by
Dr Tara McCormack lecturer in international politics, University of Leicester; author, Critique, Security and Power: the political limits to emancipatory approaches
Recommended readings
Are we witnessing ‘the rise of the rest’?

The elevation of the G20 over the G8 has prompted talk of an international power shift. The reality is more complicated.

Tara McCormack, spiked, 1 October 2009

Sharing China’s confidence in the future

We must engage with China as it grows into its new role as a global political and economic heavyweight.

Lord Mandelson, Telegraph, 30 September 2009

All Together Now

After 1945, the world — fresh from a devastating conflict — summoned its energies to build a new international order. Now we are being tested again

Gordon Brown, New York Times, 23 September 2009

The Post-American World: and the Rise of the Rest

Zakaria describes a world in which the United States will no longer dominate the global economy, orchestrate geopolitics, or overwhelm cultures. He sees the "rise of the rest"—the growth of countries like China, India, Brazil, Russia, and many others—as the great story of our time, and one that will reshape the world

Fareed Zakaria, Penguin, 4 June 2009

Obama and the limits of soft power

Barack Obama is a soft power president. But the world keeps asking him hard power questions.

Gideon Rachman, Financial Times, 2 June 2009

The interpolar world: a new scenario

Everyone agrees the world is changing. The question is in which direction? This paper offers an original contribution to the debate on the future shape of the international system. Based on a diagnosis of current developments, it argues that many factors point to the emergence of an ‘interpolar’ world.

Giovanni Grevi, EU Institute for Security Studies, June 2009

The Great Crash, 2008: A Geopolitical Setback for the West

The financial crisis has called into serious question the credibility of western governments and may precipitate an eastward shift of power.

Roger C. Altman, Foreign Affairs, February 2009

Is America’s new declinism for real?

The new declinism may be more soundly based than its predecessors. China has a record of sustained and dynamic economic growth that the Soviet Union was never capable of.

Gideon Rachman, Financial Times, 25 November 2008

Global Trends 2025: A Transformed World

The international system—as constructed following the Second World War—will be almost unrecognizable by 2025 owing to the rise of emerging powers, a globalizing economy, an historic transfer of relative wealth and economic power from West to East, and the growing influence of nonstate actors.

US National Intelligence Council, November 2008

Financial crisis marks out a new geopolitical order

Blame greedy bankers. Blame Alan Greenspan's careless stewardship of the US Federal Reserve. Blame feckless homeowners who took out loans they could never expect to repay. Blame politicians and regulators everywhere for closing their eyes to the approaching tempest.

Philip Stephens, Financial Times, 9 October 2008

Rivals: How the Power Struggle Between China, India and Japan Will Shape Our Next Decade

"Rivals" looks at: How the power struggle between China, India and Japan will shape our next decade, will explore the legacies of history, the likely future trajectories of China, Japan and India, and the potential collisions and intersections between them which will shape the 21st century.

Bill Emmott, Allen Lane, 3 April 2008

What Does China Think?

An introduction to thinkers that are shaping China's future and a hidden world of intellectual debate that is driving a new Chinese revolution.

Mark Leonard, Fourth Estate, 18 February 2008

Struggling Giant: China in the 21st Century

Considers the impact of China’s development on the world economic system, and on its environment; the likely future stability of China; the very existence of a unified China and the fault lines along which this entity might break apart in the years ahead, and an assessment of the future of the one party system, and what might replace it.

Kerry Brown, Anthem Press, 6 June 2007


Session partners



Battle of Ideas 2009 | session: The Myth of Racist Kids - Launch
The Myth of Racist Kids - Launch

Saturday 31 October, 10.30am until 5.00pm, Lower level exhibition space

The Manifesto Club will launch a new publication, The Myth of Racist Kids, at the festival.  The publication looks at anti-racist policies and the growing regulation of school life. Its author Adrian Hart will be available for interviews, books signing and debate at the Manifesto Club Stall in the festival’s Ideas Market.

To organise interviews with Adrian Hart before, in advance or after the Battle of Ideas, contact the Manifesto Club: .(JavaScript must be enabled to view this email address)

Speakers
Adrian Hart
author, That's Racist! How the regulation of speech and thought divides us all and Leave those kids alone – How official hate speech regulation interferes in school life

Chair:


Produced by
Session partners



Battle of Ideas 2009 | session: Parliament: reform or revolution?
Parliament: reform or revolution?

Saturday 31 October, 10.30am until 12.00pm, Student Union

‘Without general elections, without unrestricted freedom of press and assembly, without a free struggle of opinion, life dies out in every public institution, becomes a mere semblance of life, in which only the bureaucracy remains as the active element. Public life gradually falls asleep…’ Rosa Luxemburg

The forthcoming UK election is likely to focus attention once again on our parliamentary institutions and constitutional arrangements. This time the debate should perhaps go beyond the usual questions of whether we should make our voting system more proportional or further devolve power to the Welsh Assembly and Scottish Parliament. Today the very legitimacy of the system is in question, with public respect for Parliament perhaps at an all-time low. 2009 has seen the traditional protection of parliamentarians undermined from within when the Serjeant at Arms allowed police to arrest Damian Green, and then the MPs’ expenses scandal, leading to reform of the role of the speaker. New speaker John Bercow promised a clean break, with various reforms to modernise the Commons while protecting the rights of backbenchers and restoring the integrity of Parliament. But is it too little too late?

While some observers worry the sovereignty of Parliament is being eroded, advocates of reform have called for further checks on MPs. The Lord Chief Justice recently criticised plans for an independent body to oversee MPs expenses, as it risks a dangerous conflict between judges and Parliament. But should the authority of Parliament be checked in the interests of accountability, transparency and sound modern governance? Are old institutions worth defending, or should we get rid of a system riddled with problems? As the election draws closer, should we even bother to exercise our right to vote, or is the really progressive thing to look elsewhere for democratic revival?

Indeed, to add to the parliamentary chaos, political parties look increasingly defunct, with membership at an all time low, while voter turnout was a mere 61% in 2005. Does the rise of independents and fringe groups signify a negative rejection of collective politics or a positive opportunity to move towards new collective ideals?

 

Listen to the session audio…

Other formats are available here

Speakers
Jessica Asato
acting director, Progress; editor, Progress Magazine

Martin Bell
former independent MP for Tatton; author, A Very British Revolution: the expenses scandal and how to save our democracy

Dr James Panton
head of politics, Magdalen College School, Oxford; associate lecturer in politics and philosophy, Open University; co-founder, Manifesto Club

Graham Smith
chief executive, Republic

Chair:
Suzy Dean
freelance writer; blogger, Free Society


Produced by
Suzy Dean freelance writer; blogger, Free Society
Recommended readings
A book to set democratic alarm bells ringing

Martin Bell’s account of the expenses scandal has insights, but his willingness to embrace infringements upon parliamentary sovereignty in the name of restoring trust denigrates democracy.

Suzy Dean, spiked, 30 October 2009

Martin Bell: 'The House of Commons cannot be trusted to police itself'

'I was for three and a half years on the Standards and Privileges Committee so I saw the regulatory machinery in action and some members of that committee left their party allegiances at the committee room door and others did not... My experience is that the House of Commons cannot be trusted to police itself.'

Martin Bell interviewed by Angus Kennedy, Independent Independent Minds, 27 October 2009

A Very British Revolution: The Expenses Scandal and How to Save Our Democracy

The revelations over MPs' expenses that began in May 2009 ranged from petty thieving to outright fraud and sparked a crisis in confidence unprecedented in modern times. This was a 21st-century Peasants' Revolt - an uprising of the people against the political class.

Martin Bell, Icon Books, 1 October 2009

Hired guns take aim at target Tory seats

Dozens of Conservative parliamentary candidates are working in the lobbying industry that seeks to influence their party’s leadership.

Tom Baldwin and Alice Fishburn, The Times, 25 September 2009

Dying days of the big parties

The voting system masks a fragmenting club of three. Calls for reform will go on, whoever wins.

Vernon Bogdanor, Guardian Comment is Free, 23 September 2009

Parliament of fear

The combative and hostile pantomime of PMQs is symptomatic of a hostile working climate in which bullying has become commonplace.

Paul Evans, Total Politics, August 2009

Bell and Waite anti-sleaze move

Former anti-sleaze MP Martin Bell and ex Church of England envoy Terry Waite are considering fielding candidates at the next general election.

BBC News, BBC News, 18 August 2009

Pirate Party launches UK poll bid

The Pirate Party - which won a surprise seat in the European Parliament in Sweden - has launched in the UK.

BBC News, 13 August 2009

The Tories and the tyranny of anti-politics

Anyone interested in Big Politics and society-shaking debate should challenge the Conservative Party’s ‘clean politics’ agenda.

Brendan O'Neill, spiked, 11 August 2009

The death of the citizen MP and why I'm quitting politics

The Commons is set to become a chamber of professional politicians, dependent on the taxpayer, and therefore remote from the millions of Britons who aren't - especially the hard-pressed and overtaxed middle classes.

Paul Goodman, Daily Mail, 4 August 2009

Reinventing politics

To suggest reform of a parliamentary system steeped in the anachronism of traditional class struggle is a retreat from reality

Jeremy Seabrook, Guardian Comment is Free, 31 May 2009

Disaffected voters turn to 'none of the above'

Between them, the cash-for-honours affair and the questions raised about Lord Goldsmith's impartiality as Attorney General are casting a long shadow over the whole of British political life. The shadow besmirches not merely the Prime Minister's own reputation but that of all the major political parties and politicians in general.

Anthony King, Telegraph, 5 February 2007

Session partners





Battle of Ideas 2009 | session: Ideas Market
Ideas Market

Saturday 31 October, 10.30am until 5.00pm, Lower level exhibition space

Come and have a coffee while browsing a range of stalls promoting ideas to get you thinking and talking – with WorldWRITE, Manifesto Club, Academy of Ideas and many more.

Speakers
Chair:


Produced by
Festival Buzz

"The Battle of Ideas goes from strength to strength. The intensity, variety and depth of debate, sustained for an entire weekend, makes for a unique experience charging the intellectual batteries for the rest of the year."
Raymond Tallis, emeritus professor of geriatric medicine, Manchester University

Battle of Ideas 2009 | session: The State and Recession: solution or part of the problem?
The State and Recession: solution or part of the problem?

Saturday 31 October, 10.30am until 12.00pm, Courtyard Gallery

The current crisis has been welcomed by some as heralding the end of ‘neoliberalism’: the free market, free trade agenda that supported light touch regulation, tax cuts, privatisation, foreign direct investment and fiscal discipline. In its place are calls for a return to progressive taxation, government spending and subsidies and ever-tighter regulation of banks: the state is back and, commanding nearly 50 per cent of the UK economy, it’s big.

Despite Hayek, Friedman and the rhetoric of neo-liberalism - rolling back the state, trickle-down, consumer choice and market efficiencies in the public sector - the state has actually never gone away. Public spending under Margaret Thatcher continued to grow and social protection expenditure in particular has nearly doubled in size in the last 20 years to some £170bn. Now, with UK public sector net debt standing at some 55% of GDP and tax revenues at only 38%, there is a huge annual deficit to fill on top of the massive public debt already incurred by Labour’s fiscal stimulus package.

Keynes once noted that “It is often said by wiseacres that we cannot spend more than we earn ... It would be much truer to say that we cannot earn more than we spend”. So are public sector cuts and swingeing tax rises really the only solution? There could be a case for state investment in support of productive growth: the same state that built Docklands and the financial sector could be building super-fast trains and leading the world in aerospace. Must the state serve to regulate against capitalist excess, greed and exploitation? Will the state lead us out of recession, the vanguard of a new fairer capitalism, or is it nothing more than yesterday’s solution to what are much deeper problems?


Listen to the session audio…

Other formats are available here

Speakers
Dr Vince Cable
deputy leader and shadow chancellor, Liberal Democrats; author, The Storm: the world economic crisis and what it means

Phil Mullan
economist and business manager; author, Creative Destruction: How to start an economic renaissance

Martin Wolf
associate editor and chief economics commentator, Financial Times; author, Fixing Global Finance

Chair:
Angus Kennedy
convenor, The Academy; author, Being Cultured: in defence of discrimination


Produced by
Angus Kennedy convenor, The Academy; author, Being Cultured: in defence of discrimination
Stuart Simpson financial services professional; researcher and writer, emerging economies and quantitative finance
Recommended readings
Where the axe should fall

Retrenchment must go hand in hand with reform in Britain to make the state fitter as well as leaner

Leader, Economist, 24 September 2009

The austerity auction

Politicians are competing to see who can make the severest cuts — only because they have no broader vision for the economy.

Rob Lyons, spiked, 21 September 2009

Tackling the fiscal crisis: A recovery plan for the UK

The central issue emerging now in the UK – and the one which will dominate politics for the next few years – is the size of the UK government budget borrowing and deficits, and government debt.

Vince Cable, Reform, September 2009

Why the deficit hysteria? I only wish we'd borrow more

Projections of national debt in the US and UK have triggered panic – yet investment in the future is crucial to recovery

Robert Reich, Guardian Comment is Free, 31 August 2009

Saved by big government

Reagan was wrong. State spending is all that has stopped America's slump becoming catastrophic.

Paul Krugman, Guardian Comment is Free, 11 August 2009

State Capitalism in Britain

Despite the State being the main investor in the UK's national economy, the official rhetoric of private sector productivity is alive and well. James Heartfield takes a look at Labour's failed strategy of privatising public services and the rise of ‘corporate welfare'

James Heartfield, Mute magazine, 25 June 2009

Why the state cannot save the economy

Instead of having arid debates about the state versus the market, we must create institutions and policies that can restructure the economy.

Frank Furedi, spiked, 18 June 2009

The Storm: The World Economic Crisis and What it Means

Although the downturn is global, the complacency of the British government towards the huge 'bubble' in property prices and high levels of personal debt, combined with increasingly exotic and opaque trading within the financial markets, has left Britain badly exposed.

Vince Cable, Atlantic Books, 1 April 2009

Fixing Global Finance

The key is to acknowledge that, in a world of adjustable currencies, international lending must be denominated in the currency of borrowers, not just in that of a few dominant advanced economies. Only by tackling imbalances in the international financial system is there a chance of global financial stability.

Martin Wolf, Yale University Press, 30 January 2009

Stabilizing an Unstable Economy

“Twenty-five years ago, when most economists were extolling the virtues of financial deregulation and innovation, a maverick named Hyman P. Minsky maintained a more negative view of Wall Street; in fact, he noted that bankers, traders, and other financiers periodically played the role of arsonists, setting the entire economy ablaze.”

Hyman P. Minsky, McGraw-Hill Professional, 1 May 2008

The Myth of the Neo-Liberal State

Far from the market having a voracious capacity to extend its influence over all aspects of contemporary social and economic life in the UK; the state is directly engaged in propping up an un-dynamic private corporate sector and ensuring employment for many of those working within it.

Gavin Poynter, University of East London, 13 April 2007

Session partners





Battle of Ideas 2009 | session: Battle of Ideas 2009 welcome address
Battle of Ideas 2009 welcome address

Saturday 31 October, 10.00am until 10.20am, Upper Gulbenkian Gallery

The fifth annual Battle of Ideas festival will open with a Welcome Address hosted by Claire Fox, Director of the Academy of Ideas.

Read Academy of Ideas Director Claire Fox’s introductory essay to the Battle of Ideas 2009.

Listen to the session audio…

Other formats are available here

Speakers
Professor David Delpy
chief executive, EPSRC

Anoushka Healy
assistant editor, Strategy & Development, The Times

Professor Colin Lawson
director, Royal College of Music; period clarinettist; author, Mozart: Clarinet Concerto and Brahms: Clarinet Quintet

Professor Jeremy Myerson
Helen Hamlyn Professor of Design, Royal College of Art

Chair:
Claire Fox
director, Academy of Ideas; panellist, BBC Radio 4's Moral Maze; author, I Find That Offensive


Produced by
Session partners





Battle of Ideas 2009 | session: 'We don't do McDonald's': America and World Culture
'We don't do McDonald's': America and World Culture

Tuesday 27 October, 7.00pm until 9.00pm, Notre Dame University, London

Venue: University of Notre Dame London Centre, 1 Suffolk Street, London SW1 4HG

Tickets: £7.50 (£5 concessions) per person. Tickets are available from the Academy of Ideas website.


Despite President Obama being heralded as an urbane new leader whose multicultural background symbolises a nation more at ease with itself, much of the world remains suspicious of American culture. For a long-time caricatured as ‘Coca-Colonisation’, the cultural influence of the US is often seen as little short of ‘cultural imperialism’. In 2005 a group of Torino city councillors tried to ban Coca-Cola from city hall before the Winter Olympics, while from Canada to France, many countries impose music quotas on radio stations to help local artists get a footing in ‘an industry that is largely overshadowed by a gigantic American influence.’ From McDonalds to MTV, popular US brands are often interpreted as both a sign of America’s rampant commercialism and its superficial ‘trash’ culture. But is this a fair or full picture?

Accusations that American culture is dumbing down the world are often thinly veiled attacks on popular culture per se. Such snobbery is often misplaced: there is more to US culture than Hollywood blockbusters, with American artists being leading lights in many art forms. From Philip Roth to The Wire, from the Guggenheim to Leonard Bernstein, from F Scott Fitzgerald to John Ford, America’s cultural achievements have broken new ground and many remain monumental. Moreover, America a place where artists from diverse backgrounds have come together to forge new and distinctive art, where two Russian émigrés like George Balanchine and Igor Stravinsky could create ballets that not only defined American dance but modern dance to this day. Shouldn’t this aspect of the American dream be an inspiration to us all?

That said, much American culture has spread around the world not because it is the best, but because of America’s political, economic and military might. Do we really want a homogenous cultural landscape, where innovation, quirkiness and regional identity are squeezed out by Americana? How can we ensure that the world is exposed to the best of American art, while allowing other cultures to flourish too?

Speakers
Clive Bloom
emeritus professor, English and American studies, Middlesex University; author, Riot City: protest and rebellion in the capital

Peter Curran
documentary maker; broadcaster; publisher; specialising in arts, culture and pop music; recorder, Revolution in the Head

Carol Gould
editor, Current Viewpoint; author, Don’t Tread on Me: anti-Americanism abroad

Angus Kennedy
convenor, The Academy; author, Being Cultured: in defence of discrimination

Alan Miller
chairman, Night Time Industries Association (NTIA)

Patrick Spottiswoode
director, Globe education, Shakespeare's Globe

Chair:
Dr Shirley Dent
communications specialist (currently working with the British Veterinary Association media team); editor, tlfw.co.uk; author, Radical Blake


Produced by
Dr Shirley Dent communications specialist (currently working with the British Veterinary Association media team); editor, tlfw.co.uk; author, Radical Blake
Recommended readings
The Brits are coming! UK actors storm US TV

They can act, they don't give the director a hard time, they're cheap(ish) – and now they can do the accent.

John Patterson, Guardian, 30 September 2009

Does the world still care about American culture?

For most of the 20th century, the dominant culture in the world was American. Now that is no longer true. What is most striking about attitudes toward the United States in other countries is not the anti-Americanism they reflect, or the disdain for former President George W. Bush, or the opposition to American foreign policies. Rather, people abroad are increasingly indifferent to America's culture.

Richard Pells, Dallas Morning News, 4 April 2009

Don't Tread on Me: Anti-Americanism Abroad

An attack on what Gould sees as the rampant anti-Americanism that has become so integral to British and European culture: the racism of the anti-racists, the intolerance of the tolerant and the reactionary-ism of the progressives.

Carol Gould, Social Affairs Unit, 20 January 2009

The Return of Cultural Diplomacy

America should aim to export more serious forms of entertainment as well as 'Dark Knight' and 'Baywatch.'

Martha Bayles, Newsweek, 31 December 2008

Some Countries Remain Resistant to American Cultural Exports

American movies and music have done very well in some countries like Sweden and less well in others like India. This may sound like a simple difference in human tastes, but decisions to consume culture have an economic aspect.

Tyler Cowen, New York Times, 23 February 2007

Session partners





Battle of Ideas 2009 | session: Science on Screen – not testing enough?
Science on Screen – not testing enough?

Monday 26 October, 7.00pm until 9.00pm, Shortwave Cinema, London

Venue: Shortwave Cinema, 10 Bermondsey Square, London, SE1 3UN

Tickets: £7.50 (£5 concessions) per person. Tickets are available from the Academy of Ideas website.


Science and technology make popular viewing, even beyond the specialist digital channels that thrive on Brainiac and How it’s Made. The Open University has abandoned beard-ridden late-night lectures for popular programmes like Coast and Electric Dreams. And Tomorrow’s World has finally found a prime time successor in Bang Goes the Theory. But is there enough science mixed in with the entertainment, or does the drive to reach a big audience mean demanding intellectual ideas are relegated to the dark corners of BBC 4?

Doors open 7pm for 7:30pm.

Speakers
Dr Sally Crompton
head, Open Broadcast Unit, Open University; commissioner of OU/BBC programmes, including Coast and James May's Big Ideas

Carlo Massarella
series producer and director, Windfall Films; Emmy Award-winner, DNA: The Human Race

Andrew Mueller
journalist; author, I Wouldn't Start from Here: the 21st century and where it all went wrong

Tony Nixon
senior lecturer, Information Systems, Open University; academic consultant, James May's 20th Century

Dr Chris Riley
writer, broadcaster and film-maker; MD, The Attic Room; producer, In the Shadow of the Moon and Space Odyssey

Chair:
Timandra Harkness
journalist, writer & broadcaster; presenter, Futureproofing and other BBC Radio 4 programmes; author, Big Data: does size matter?


Produced by
Timandra Harkness journalist, writer & broadcaster; presenter, Futureproofing and other BBC Radio 4 programmes; author, Big Data: does size matter?
Recommended readings
The Cell and the difficulties of presenting science on TV

Scientists have always had it in for television. They think it’s all arty, arty, arty. Television is Gutenberg all over again. They come up with this marvellous invention, a printing press, and before you can say calculus, it’s running off Bibles and fairy tales.

AA Gill, The Sunday Times, 17 August 2009

Listen & learn

The Reith Lectures have long been a premier platform for public intellectuals, but are scholarly communicators endangered in an era of dumbing down, media fragmentation and heightened pressures on academics?

Matthew Reisz, Times Higher Education, 29 May 2009

Are the glory days of science on television gone forever?

Ever since the demise of Tomorrow's World, science on TV has been in a dire state in Britain. But the internet offers hope

Frank Swain, Guardian Science blog, 13 December 2008

The rise of reality science

Science programmes, just like all other television genres, follow trends. The new formats have come a long way since the highbrow traditional documentaries featuring “talking heads” that, judging by BBC Horizon's message board, many scientists remember nostalgically.

Deborah Cohen, British Medical Journal, 21 May 2005

Session partners



Battle of Ideas 2009 | session: Space: from infinite dreams to recurring nightmares
Space: from infinite dreams to recurring nightmares

Friday 23 October, 8.00pm until 10.00pm, Royal Observatory, Greenwich, London

Venue: Royal Observatory, Flamstead House, Greenwich Park, London, SE10 9NF

Tickets: £10, includes Planetarium event at 18.50 (part of Sci-Fi Universe): book online at Sci-Fi London.


Early in the 20th century the potential of manned flight and spaceflight appeared limitless. These dreams were expressed in early science fiction movies and series where almost anything was possible, confined only by the limits of our imagination. In 1969 these collective dreams were achieved when mankind set foot on the moon. This new reality gave birth to a new generation of sci-fi films and the groundbreaking series, Star Trek. Boldly going beyond the limits of known engineering with its multiracial crew, it expressed the optimism of its time.

But as the century drew to a close the space programme was increasingly confined by budget limits, and handcuffed by America’s commitment to the shuttle. Science fiction too began to retreat into a narrower vision of space exploration. Now, science fiction is dominated by remakes and reboots of classic films and series, as the major studios avoid risky new projects and opt for known brands. And international space exploration seems tied to its own re-run, a remake of the 1960s classic Race to the Moon, only with different actors and better visuals.

Are space research and science fiction trading on nostalgia, asking us to part with our money for glossy sanitised remakes? Is it time to show more imagination both on screen and in real space exploration?

Speakers
Dr Maggie Aderin-Pocock
space scientist, Astrium; science communicator, UCL; managing director, Science Innovation

Jon Chase
associate lecturer and researcher, Science Communication, University of Glamorgan

Paul Cornell
writer, science fiction prose (British Summertime), television (Doctor Who) and comics (Captain Britain and MI-13)

Dr Simon Foster
science teacher, Wentworth College; runner-up, NESTA FameLab 2009

Chair:
Timandra Harkness
journalist, writer & broadcaster; presenter, Futureproofing and other BBC Radio 4 programmes; author, Big Data: does size matter?


Produced by
Timandra Harkness journalist, writer & broadcaster; presenter, Futureproofing and other BBC Radio 4 programmes; author, Big Data: does size matter?
Recommended readings
Manned space flight is ‘over-ambitious and no longer viable’

The space agency has become over-ambitious and critically underfunded in its attempts to blast humans back to the Moon, to Mars and beyond, panel members noted.

Jacqui Goddard, The Times, 11 September 2009

Moon

Moon is set in a future-world that has solved its energy crisis by mining fuel from the moon. Sam Rockwell plays Sam Bell, a guy with an eerie, lighthouse-keeper job.

Peter Bradshaw, Guardian, 17 July 2009

One Giant Leap: Apollo 11 Forty Years on

The first moon landing in July 1969 captured the imagination of the world in a way that no subsequent 'space spectacular' has succeeded in doing. Forty years later, Piers Bizony has produced a stunning, comprehensive visual record of the mission using high-resolution images selected from the entire suite of Apollo 11's on-board film magazines.

Piers Bizony, Aurum Press Ltd, 8 May 2009

Science fiction powers space research

The European Space Agency (Esa) is studying science fiction for ideas and technologies that could be used in future missions.

Mark Ward, BBC News, 11 May 2000

Session partners



Battle of Ideas 2009 | session: Drawing the line: political cartooning in an inoffensive age
Drawing the line: political cartooning in an inoffensive age

Thursday 22 October, 7.00pm until 9.00pm, Kowalsky Gallery, London

Venue: DACS, Kowalsky Gallery, 33 Great Sutton Street, London, EC1V 0DX

Tickets: £7.50 (£5 concessions) per person. Tickets are available from the Academy of Ideas website.


In one of Charles Schultz’s Peanuts strips, Lucy declares that she is going to be a political cartoonist ‘lashing out with my crayon’. From Gillray to Giles, Hogarth to Herblock, the most vicious political cartoons are often the most successful – capturing and caricaturing the urgency of political situations through the personal foibles of politicians. Gordon Brown in the past year has been variously depicted as a wheelchair bound incontinent and a sweating poker player betting it all on the joker (Peter Mandelson). But the best cartoonists’ work is insightful even when it’s cruel. As Theodore Dalrymple puts it ‘Gillray, like Swift before him and Dickens after him, saw everything through a lens that clarified even as it distorted’.

But we live in an era in which anything that can be seen as ‘offensive’ is met with all round disapproval. A storm erupted earlier this year after the New York Post published a cartoon showing police shooting a chimp, which was mistaken for a racist reference to President Obama. The New Yorker ‘Terrorist Fist-Jab’ cover featuring Obama and his wife Michelle had already caused a commotion, though the intention was actually to satirise fear-mongering. Any hint that a minority group is being targeted provokes calls for censorship. Martin Rowson’s depiction for the New Humanist of new atheists ‘outing’ themselves behind an effeminate Richard Dawkins brought accusations of homophobia. The cartoon series Popetown, was dropped by the BBC after protests by Roman Catholics. And we are all familiar with the controversy about cartoons depicting the prophet Mohammed.

Should political cartoonists pull no punches, whatever offence they cause? Does crude, physical caricaturing come with the territory when you are a public figure? Or is it too easy to lampoon politicians rather than their politics? Do we want cartoonists who are prepared to take risks and push at the boundaries of taste in order to make clearer the world we live in? If we curtail political cartooning in any way, are we effectively censoring the press or simply ensuring good taste? Where should we draw the line with political cartoons and offence?

Speakers
Sarnath Banerjee
artist, film-maker; graphic novelist, Corridor and Barn Owl's Wondrous Capers; founder, New Delhi's Phantomville comics publishing house

Dave Brown
political cartoonist, The Independent; author, Rogues’ Gallery: more misused masterpieces

John Kampfner
chief executive, Index on Censorship; former editor, New Statesman; author, Freedom For Sale: how we made money and lost our liberty

Brendan O'Neill
editor, spiked; columnist, Big Issue; contributor, Spectator; author, A Duty to Offend: Selected Essays

Martin Rowson
political cartoonist; illustrator; writer; author, Giving Offence

Chair:
Dr Shirley Dent
communications specialist (currently working with the British Veterinary Association media team); editor, tlfw.co.uk; author, Radical Blake


Produced by
Dr Shirley Dent communications specialist (currently working with the British Veterinary Association media team); editor, tlfw.co.uk; author, Radical Blake
Recommended readings
Committed to free expression? What nonsense

Yale has acted cravenly over images of Muhammad.

Oliver Kamm, The Times, 29 September 2009

Freedom For Sale: how we made money and lost our liberty

Why is it that so many people around the world appear willing to give up freedoms in return for either security or prosperity? For the past 60 years it had been assumed that capitalism was intertwined with liberal democracy, that the two not just thrived together but needed each other to survive. But what happens when both are undermined?

John Kampfner, Simon & Schuster, 3 September 2009

Yale Press Bans Images of Muhammad in New Book

Two dozen authorities, including diplomats and experts on Islam and counterterrorism, unanimously recommended that the book, “The Cartoons That Shook the World,” should not include the 12 Danish drawings that originally appeared in September 2005. What’s more, they suggested that the Yale press also refrain from publishing any other illustrations of the prophet that were to be included,

Patricia Cohen, New York Times, 12 August 2009

Obama as The Joker: Racial Fear's Ugly Face

Images of the poster of President Obama as the Joker have dominated the blogosphere, and Washington Post Culture Critic Philip Kennicott looks at how there is little consensus on whether it is effective as political messagemaking.

Philip Kennicott, Washington Post, 6 August 2009

The power of the cartoonist

'Sometimes a cartoon is just a cartoon', the New York Post wrote in an editorial apologising for the offence caused by an image of policemen shooting a chimpanzee dead.

Stephen Mulvey and Ali McConnell, BBC News, 20 February 2009

Giving Offence (Manifestos for the Twenty-First Century)

Tolerated in Britain for over 300 years-and ubiquitous throughout the world for much longer - visual satire gives offence in the quickest way and in its purest form. Cartoons have long since established themselves as a legitimate part of the general political discourse.

Martin Rowson, Seagull, 1 January 2009

Taking offence is the best form of attack

I know this isn't all about me, but the row about those Danish cartoons of the Prophet Mohammed has made my life a misery.

Martin Rowson, New Humanist, 2 March 2006

Those cartoons: a caricatured argument

All of this heat about the Danish cartoons is shedding no light on the important questions of free speech, genuine tolerance, multiculturalism and society today

Mick Hume, spiked, 6 February 2006

Session partners





Battle of Ideas 2009 | session: Museums for world peace? The pros and cons of cultural diplomacy
Museums for world peace? The pros and cons of cultural diplomacy

Wednesday 21 October, 6.30pm until 8.00pm, Tate Britain, London

Venue: Tate Britain auditorium, Millbank, London, SW1P 4RG

Tickets: £10/£8 from Tate Britain on 020 7887 8888 or visit or buy online.


‘Cultural diplomacy’ is in vogue. The idea is that museums, galleries, libraries, art, theatre and music can play a critical role in international relations. The think tank Demos recommends these institutions address terrorism and conflict in the Middle East, and work to enhance relations with diasporas. Neil MacGregor, director of the British Museum, argues that the museum, its staff and collections can play a role in state-building and promoting peace and stability internationally, as well as helping those who visit in Bloomsbury to understand and appreciate other cultures. It is argued that in the context of a world that is experiencing a dramatic resurgence in nationalism and sectarian violence, encyclopaedic museums can play a positive role in encouraging understanding and tolerance between cultures.

But can culture really ease international conflict and foster tolerance? Or does looking to old objects to find messages of tolerance for today meaning obscuring the contemporary reasons behind conflicts? Does assigning cultural institutions such a role risk undermining their more traditional goals, or even compromise their scholarly objectivity? What kind of relationships should Western cultural institutions have with their counterparts abroad, and to what purpose? What role, if any, can and should museums play on the international stage?

The evening will be introduced by Dr Victoria Walsh, Head of Public Programmes at Tate Britain.

Speakers
Dr Stephen Deuchar
director, Tate Britain; chair, Turner Prize 2009

Dr Tiffany Jenkins
writer and broadcaster; author, Keeping Their Marbles: how treasures of the past ended up in museums and why they should stay there

Jonathan Jones
art critic, Guardian

Andrea Rose
director, Visual Arts and Strategic Programmes, British Council; governor, University of the Arts, London; author, Gagarin in Britain

Dr Tim Stanley
leader writer and columnist, Daily Telegraph; research and teaching fellow, Rothermere American Institute at Oxford University

Chair:
Claire Fox
director, Academy of Ideas; panellist, BBC Radio 4's Moral Maze; author, I Find That Offensive


Produced by
Dr Tiffany Jenkins writer and broadcaster; author, Keeping Their Marbles: how treasures of the past ended up in museums and why they should stay there
Recommended readings
Beyond the exotic

One rather unexpected consequence of 9/11 and its political aftermath in Afghanistan and Iraq has been a steadily developing appreciation in the west of the art and culture of the Middle East.

Stephen Deuchar, Guardian, 10 October 2009

How Helpful Is Cultural Diplomacy?

But does traditional cultural diplomacy work? Do we need state-supported tours by American performing arts groups when without federal funding so many of our performers and performing arts groups are appearing all over the world, when American architects are designing high profile buildings internationally and when American artists are featured in the great museums?

Michael Kaiser, Huffington Post, 21 September 2009

Taxpayers insure £500 million Turner paintings sent to China

The taxpayer has been forced to underwrite the half a billion pounds insurance cost of a

Melissa Kite, Telegraph, 25 April 2009

The Art of Museum Diplomacy

When western diplomats seek concessions from Iran, they typically dish out tough rhetoric and threaten sanctions. Neil MacGregor, the cherub-faced director of the British Museum, uses a more refined arsenal: cultural relics and priceless artifacts.

William Lee Adams, Time, 19 February 2009

The Return of Cultural Diplomacy

America should aim to export more serious forms of entertainment as well as 'Dark Knight' and 'Baywatch.'

Martha Bayles, Newsweek, 31 December 2008

This show's diplomacy is for real - and it's worth a hundred Milibands

The V&A exhibition takes Syrians seriously in their own capital, unlike the hectoring speeches of the foreign secretary.

Simon Jenkins, Guardian Comment is Free, 29 November 2008

The Royal Ballet’s Asian tour is a great lesson in cultural diplomacy

When they tour, arts companies create a buzz of economic and political activity

David Jays, Sunday Times, 13 July 2008

MacGregor calls for bigger role for cultural diplomacy

Speaking at the launch of a DEMOS report on cultural diplomacy last month, British Museum director Neil MacGregor called for culture to play a bigger international role in building and sustaining relations between countries…

Museums Association, 14 March 2007

You're paying for 'cultural diplomacy'

Do you enjoy multiculturalist drivel? No? Tough luck.

Damian Thompson, Telegraph, 3 March 2007

Why should artists be agents for the government?

Easily flattered, many arts organisations are falling over themselves to act as diplomats

Tiffany Jenkins, Independent, 28 February 2007

Cultural Diplomacy

As identity politics exert an increasing influence on domestic and international exchanges, culture is therefore a critical forum for negotiation and a medium of exchange in finding shared solutions.

John Holden, Rachel Briggs, Samuel Jones, Kirsten Bound, Demos, February 2007

International Dimensions

Each section of the report is richly illustrated with practical examples of the National Museums' contribution to agendas of fundamental global importance: from the dialogue between cultures to the preservation of the world's natural assets. The work reaches well beyond the fields of operation traditionally associated with museums.

National Museums Directors' Conference, 6 June 2002

Session partners





Battle of Ideas 2009 | session: The Future of Collaboration: Sharing and Work in the Networked Age
The Future of Collaboration: Sharing and Work in the Networked Age

Saturday 17 October, 6.00pm until 8.00pm, Brighton

NEW VENUE: The Thistle Hotel, Kings Road, Brighton, BN1 2GS (overlooking the Brighton seafront)

Tickets: £7.50 (£5 concessions) per person. Tickets are available from the Academy of Ideas website.


The 21st century looks set to be age of online collaboration. While old forms of community and solidarity have waned, leaving us apparently more fragmented and individualised, the social web enables many of us to work, play and organise with others in ways previously unimaginable. Technologies like Flickr, Delicious and Wikipedia evidence new means of sharing information and working together. Many suggest these technologies will have far-reaching social implications, and even presage a new form of production and work outside the market system. While traditional free market capitalism is compromised by the worldwide recession, the world wide web is said to promise an exciting alternative. Wired’s Kevin Kelly suggests we are entering a new collectivist epoch, a ‘New Socialism’. Technology guru Howard Rheingold sees these developments as disruptive, and will change the way people ‘meet, mate, work, fight, buy, sell’. Charles Leadbeater, author of We-Think, sees the new means of networked collaboration as presaging a new production model: ‘Mass Innovation rather than Mass Production’.

There are challenges to the optimists, though. What about privacy and authorship, if innovations, ideas and information are open to all? Does ‘sharing’ our photos, ideas, and writing open up egalitarian and creative possibilities, or merely allow multinational corporations to take advantage of free labour and have access to our intellectual property? Cory Doctorow argues we are in danger of becoming IP serfs having to pay to access ideas which should be freely available, and champions a ‘creative commons’ as a bulwark against this trend.

Can and should these new forms of production be regulated? If so, by whom and how? Is new technology really a utopian challenge to the market, or merely more of the same in virtual space? Can the profound problems of social fragmentation and an economic system in crisis be resolved by sharing technologies and collaborating and innovating with online ‘friends’?

Speakers
Dr Michael Bull
reader, media studies, University of Sussex; core member, Future Trends Forum; author, Sound Moves: iPod culture and urban experience

Cory Doctorow
novelist; co-editor, BoingBoing.net; author, Content: selected essays on technology, creativity, copyright and the future of the future

Nico Macdonald
principal, Spy; writer, consultant and researcher on innovation, technology and media

Chair:
Dr Robert Clowes
chair, Mind & Cognition Group, Nova Institute of Philosophy, Lisbon University; chair, Lisbon Salon


Produced by
Sean Bell secretary and founder member, The Brighton Salon; copy-editor, writer and journalist
Dr Robert Clowes chair, Mind & Cognition Group, Nova Institute of Philosophy, Lisbon University; chair, Lisbon Salon
Dan Travis director, Brighton Salon; tennis coach; author How to teach Young Children Tennis and In Defence of Competitive Sport.
Recommended readings
Makers

Perry and Lester invent things. All sorts of things. Seashell robots that make toast, Boogie Woogie Elmo dolls that drive cars. They also invent an entirely new economic system.

Cory Doctorow, HarperVoyager, 29 October 2009

The New Socialism: Global Collectivist Society Is Coming Online

Bill Gates once derided open source advocates with the worst epithet a capitalist can muster. These folks, he said, were a

Kevin Kelly, Wired, 22 May 2009

The dialectic of wearing an iPod

Michael Bull argues that the wearing of iPods signals the emergence of a new self, one that is cut off from 'chilly' urban landscapes. Perhaps. But that is not the whole story.

Rob Clowes, spiked, August 2008

Content: Selected Essays on Technology, Creativity, Copyright and the Future of the Future

Readers will discover how America chose Happy Meal toys over copyright, why Facebook is taking a faceplant, how the Internet is basically just a giant Xerox machine, why Wikipedia is a poor cousin of "The Hitchhikers Guide to the Galaxy", and how to enjoy free e-books.

Cory Doctorow, Tachyon Publications, 1 January 2008

Sound Moves: IPod Culture and Urban Experience

Tthe Apple iPod acts as an urban Sherpa for many of its users and in doing so joins the mobile army of technologies that many of us habitually use to accompany our daily lives. Through our use of such mobile and largely sound based devices, Sound Moves demonstrates how and why the spaces of the city are being transformed right in front of our ears.

Michael Bull, Routledge, 12 December 2007


Session partners



Battle of Ideas 2009 | session: Sustainability in Architecture: Late-Nite Review
Sustainability in Architecture: Late-Nite Review

Thursday 15 October, 7.30pm until 9.30pm, BDP's offices, Brewhouse Yard, London EC1V 4LJ

‘Architecture’ is seldom seen without the prefix ‘sustainable’. But what does sustainable architecture mean?

Richard Rogers says sustainable architecture means ‘the humanising of the built environment’. Spencer de Grey insists that sustainability is the equivalent of ‘good design’ while Leon Krier says that today’s ‘unsustainable architecture’ is the ‘architecture of excess’.  Conversely, these could simply be examples of what Financial Times’ architectural commentator Edwin Heathcote calls the ‘glib mantra of sustainability’ and Rem Koolhaas calls an ‘empty formula’. Can the idea stand up to scrutiny?

Champions of sustainable architecture will explain their ideas to, and be grilled by a panel of critics.

Part bear-pit, part celebrity wrestling, part rigorous review, the point of the discussion is to see if the architects – and panellists – can convey their ideas successfully, but also to see if those ideas themselves stand up to criticism.

Come along for a beer, a 7:30 start and the architectural challenge of the year. The event is free but please email .(JavaScript must be enabled to view this email address) to register your interest in attending.

Speakers
Cany Ash
partner, Ash Sakula Architects

Chris Bannister
director, Hopkins Architects (winner, Building Magazine's 'Sustainable Architect of the Year 2008')

Kieran Long
editor, Architects’ Journal and Architectural Review; journalist, critic, teacher on design, architecture and the city; author, Hatch: The New Architectural Generation.

Charlie Luxton
designer specialising in sustainable refurbishment; writer and TV presenter, including Five's Build a New Life in the Country

Keith Papa
architect director, BDP

Karl Sharro
architect; writer; Middle East commentator; co-author, Manifesto: Towards a New Humanism in Architecture

Amin Taha
architect, Amin Taha Architects and Group Work; jury member, RIBA’s National Awards and Stirling Shortlist

Craig White
founding director, White Design and ModCell

Chair:
Austin Williams
associate professor in architecture, XJTLU University, Suzhou, China; director, Future Cities Project; convenor, Bookshop Barnies; founding member of New Narratives


Produced by
Austin Williams associate professor in architecture, XJTLU University, Suzhou, China; director, Future Cities Project; convenor, Bookshop Barnies; founding member of New Narratives
Session partners





Battle of Ideas 2009 | session: Face the Future: Reimagining Belfast
Face the Future: Reimagining Belfast

Thursday 15 October, 7.00pm until 9.00pm, Belfast

Venue: Belfast Exposed Photography, The Exchange Place, 23 Donegall Street, Belfast BT1 2FF

Tickets: This event is FREE but ticketed. Please contact: .(JavaScript must be enabled to view this email address)


From architecture and planning to arts and cultural policy, education, urban renewal and marketing, there is a palpable ambition to reinvent post-conflict Belfast as a modern, economically viable city. But this effort seems constantly thwarted by the city’s troubled past and its fractured and disconnected character. While the centre is rebranded for visitor experience, retail, leisure and lifestyle consumption, Belfast’s neighbourhoods remain fixated on questions of cultural recognition, conflict management and healing the past.

Why do we seem more concerned with ‘bringing down walls’ and ‘reconnecting communities’ than in dealing with economic problems? Is empowering self appointed ‘community leaders’ a distraction from exercising real political power? Does formalising moribund community relationships prevent us from forging a more progressive politics? And could it be that opportunities to build authentic relationships across the city’s boundaries are being obstrcuted by the very thing supposed to support them- relentless political intervention? As the economic crisis threatens further to downgrade Belfast’s metropolitan ambitions, has the time come for the city to ditch the fixation with its troubled past, and face the future?

Speakers
Arthur Acheson
architect, The Boyd Partnership Chartered Architects LLP; founder and chairman, Belfast Civic Trust

Dr Kevin Bean
lecturer, Irish politics, Institute of Irish Studies, University of Liverpool; author, The New Politics of Sinn Féin

Dr Dominic Bryan
senior lecturer, social anthropology and director, Institute of Irish Studies, Queen's University, Belfast

Ciaran Mackel
architect, ARD Architects; senior lecturer, architecture, University of Ulster; broadcaster

Chair:
Pauline Hadaway
writer and researcher


Produced by
Session partners



Battle of Ideas 2009 | session: Rethinking Freedom in the age of health and safety
Rethinking Freedom in the age of health and safety

Thursday 15 October, 6.30pm until 8.30pm, Leeds

Venue: Committee Rms 6 and 7, Leeds Civic Hall, Calverley Street, Leeds, LS1 1UR

Tickets: This event is FREE but ticketed (a voluntary contribution towards costs will be asked for on the night). Please contact: .(JavaScript must be enabled to view this email address)


ASBOs, bans on smoking and drinking in public places, the fight against obesity and regulation of school meals, parenting orders and the vetting of adults working with children and vulnerable people are only a few examples of the seemingly unstoppable rise of legislation and regulation designed to control people’s behaviour in areas of civic and personal life that were previously free from state interference. In 2005 then Prime Minister Tony Blair acknowledged that only a few years before the British people would not have found these changes ‘acceptable.’ For example, interference in the family through parenting orders ‘would have either seemed somewhat bizarre or dangerous, and indeed there are still people who see this [as] an aspect of the nanny state, or [that] we are interfering with the rights of the individual’.

Yet the erosion of such ‘individual rights’ has proceeded unhampered and at increasing pace. For the most part, these developments are neither presented nor experienced as infringements on liberty, but rather as commonsense measures to improve the health, security and well-being of all. Is it really worth standing up for the right to smoke or drink wherever we please, to behave without consideration for others, and to expose children to unnecessary risks? Should we welcome state guidance and regulation designed to help us leading healthy and happy lives? Or do we lose something when individuals must defer to a benevolent state?

Are our political leaders exploiting ‘health and safety’ to impose laws and regulations that are incompatible with a democracy of free citizens, or are they just responding to popular demand? Can indeed citizens be free that value health and safety above all things? Are restrictions of individual liberties a price worth paying for the sake of our communal life, or might they actually harm civil society?

Speakers
Yvonne Crowther
youth manager, Cardinal Community Enterprise Project

Cath Follin
city centre manager, Leeds City Council

Dr Philip Hadfield
associate fellow, University of Leeds; author, Nightlife and Crime

Dr Stuart Waiton
lecturer in sociology and criminology, Abertay University; author, Snobs' Law: criminalising football fans in an age of intolerance

Chair:
Dolan Cummings
associate fellow, Academy of Ideas; author, That Existential Leap: a crime story (forthcoming from Zero Books)


Produced by
Michele Ledda coordinator, Civitas Supplementary Schools Project, Yorkshire; co-organiser, Leeds Salon
Paul Thomas civil servant; qualified FE teacher; organiser, Leeds Salon
Session partners



Battle of Ideas 2009 | session: Do children need protecting from adult carers?
Do children need protecting from adult carers?

Wednesday 14 October, 6.30pm until 8.30pm, Manchester

Venue: Blackwell University Bookshop, The Precinct Centre, Oxford Road, Manchester M13 9RN. See a map of the venue.

Tickets: £5 per person. Tickets will be posted when purchased by phone from Blackwell: 0161 274 3331. There will be a £3 discount per ticket against purchases in store at the event.


The relationship between adults and children is increasingly fraught, and viewed through the prism of risk. Not only teachers, neighbours and relatives, but even parents themselves are seen as potential abusers. But some childcare professionals and academics like Manchester Metropolitan University’s Heather Piper have begun to challenge this climate. Her book ‘Researching Sex and Lies in the Classroom’ is a critique of the ‘No Touch’ policies ubiquitous in schools and early years settings, and examines the insecurities surrounding adult-child relations. Not so long ago, those who saw something unwholesome in pictures of toddlers in the bath would be accused of having ‘dirty minds’. Nowadays, official policy and institutional practice works on the assumption that those working with children are ‘dirty-minded’ from the outset. Critics like Piper argue that when we are encouraged to view all physical contact with children as something to be avoided, in case it is perceived as inappropriate, we begin to apply a damaging check on every spontaneous interaction.

Meanwhile, family policy increasingly focuses on the need to protect children from the failings of parents, who could either pose a danger to their children, or simply not know what they’re doing. But some parents too have begun to express concerns about the idea that they’re hopeless and don’t try hard enough. Jennie Bristow argues in her book Standing up to Supernanny that the professionalisation of parenting undermines the authority of parents, and inhibits the spontaneous loving relationships with parents, and other adults, that children need in order to flourish.

So, how much do child protection policies help prevent abuse - and how much do they damage adults’ ability to conduct normal, caring relationships with the children in their charge?

Speakers
Jennie Bristow
senior lecturer in sociology, Canterbury Christ Church University; author, The Sociology of Generations: New directions and challenges and Baby Boomers and Generational Conflict; co-author, Parenting Culture Studies

Heather Piper
professorial research fellow, Education and Social Research Institute, Manchester Metropolitan University; author, Researching Sex and Lies in the Classroom and Don't Touch!: the educational story of a panic

Chair:
Hilary Salt
actuary; founder, First Actuarial


Produced by
Simon Belt IT consultant; coordinator, Manchester Salon
Recommended readings
Standing Up to Supernanny

Parenthood, we are told, requires a massive adjustment to our lives, emotions, and relationships, and we have to be taught how to deal with that. But can it really be so bad that we need constant counselling and parenting classes? It is a myth that today's parents are hopeless and lazy: in many ways, we have become too diligent, too hopeful of great outcomes and clear rewards, to the point where we lose ourselves in trying to provide some kind of professional service to our children.

Jennie Bristow, Imprint Academic, 16 September 2009

Paranoia surrounding paedophiles 'stops us taking pictures of our children'

Paranoia surrounding paedophiles and terrorism is causing a 'creeping restriction' on the freedom to take photographs, a report warns today.

Matthew Hickley, Daily Mail, 17 August 2009

Children are the lifeblood of Blue Peter,’ says Biddy Baxter

I do hope common sense will prevail. There is a clear distinction between the use of children in drama and musicals, for which licences have always been required, and children participating in news-based magazine shows such as Blue Peter.

Biddy Baxter, The Times, 12 August 2009

Early alert is key to protecting lives, says health regulator

Doctors, nurses and health visitors must do more to protect children and raise “early alerts” over suspected violence or child abuse, the health regulator says.

David Rose, The Times, 13 March 2009

This database is good mother, not big brother

Our details are all over the web. And a central bank of information will help vulnerable children, not harm secure ones.

Alice Miles, The Times, 28 January 2009

Licensed to Hug: How Child Protection Policies Are Poisoning the Relationship Between the Generations

Since the establishment of the Criminal Records Bureau in 2002, more than a third of British adults have had to get a certificate to say they are safe to be near children, and the numbers affected are increasing. Frank Furedi and Jennie Bristow argue that the growth of police vetting has created a sense of mistrust.

Frank Furedi and Jennie Bristow, Civitas, 30 June 2008

You can’t care for kids unless you touch them

Under new guidelines, teachers can be chastised for patting a boy on the head or for putting a plaster on a girl’s knee. A stirring new book says these mad anti-touch measures are killing the spirit of teaching and caring.

Joise Appleton, spiked, 13 May 2008

Don't Touch!: The Educational Story of a Panic

Touch, Heather Piper and Ian Stronach, argue, has been detached from the relationships of guidance, discipline and caring that give it meaning. Guidelines mean the ‘micro-regulation of professional behaviours’: teachers’ actions are viewed as if through an alien eye, regardless of context or intent.

Heather Piper and Ian Stronach, Routledge, 1 October 2007


Session partners





Battle of Ideas 2009 | session: Divining art? Culture and the sacred in the 21st century
Divining art? Culture and the sacred in the 21st century

Tuesday 13 October, 7.00pm until 9.00pm, Notre Dame University, London

Venue: University of Notre Dame London Centre, 1 Suffolk Street, London SW1 4HG

Tickets: £7.50 (£5 concessions) per person. Tickets are available from the Academy of Ideas website.


The charge-sheet against religion’s curtailment of artistic freedom is long, and by no means confined to the past. Since the The Satanic Verses controversy 20 years ago, religious campaigners have sought to censor the Jyllands-Posten Mohammed cartoons, Behzti at the Birmingham Rep, Jerry Springer the Opera, The Da Vinci Code, Cosimo Cavallaro’s ‘My Sweet Lord’, Chandra Mohan’s The Beautiful Vexation… and the list goes on. Consequently, religion has become something of a bogeyman to the 21st century arts.

But aren’t secular states as guilty of censoring art as any religion, China’s Cultural Revolution being perhaps the best known example? Moreover, since time immemorial, religion has inspired art. The list of divinely inspired art is a match for any ‘religion-as-censor’ list: the Sistine Chapel, the Mahabharatha, Bernstein’s Chichester Psalms, Dante’s Divine Comedy, Ginsberg’s ‘Kaddish’, Rumi’s poetry and Handel’s Messiah are just the tip of the iceberg. The religious and sacred in art points to something beyond the merely natural or biological in the human condition. For William Blake, the imagination was the ‘human form divine’.

Is there a place for the divine in art in the 21st century? Is religion the enemy or friend of contemporary art? Can we fully enjoy our artistic legacy if we don’t know our religious history? Andrew Motion has called for school children to be taught the bible so they can fully appreciate poets like Milton. But how does multicultural, secular society cope with art that celebrates specific beliefs over others? Can art that celebrates a particular faith still be universal in what it says about humanity? Have we lost faith in art that aims to transcend and transform full stop? And if so, is that the death knell for sacred art? Or is great art today simply embracing the divine in a different way, heralding no one faith in particular, but capturing the spirit of modern life and imagination, from Gormley’s ‘Angel of the North’ to Akram Khan’s ‘Sacred Monsters’?

Speakers
Dolan Cummings
associate fellow, Academy of Ideas; author, That Existential Leap: a crime story (forthcoming from Zero Books)

Dr Dennis Doordan
professor, School of Architecture and Department of Art, Art History and Design, University of Notre Dame; author, Twentieth Century Architecture

Ruth Gledhill
religion correspondent, The Times; journalism tutor, City University

Andrew Haydon
commissioning editor, theatre, Culture Wars; co-editor, TheatreVoice.com

Ivan Hewett
chief music critic, Daily Telegraph; professor, Royal College of Music; broadcaster; author, Music: healing the rift

George Pitcher
journalist; Anglican priest, St Bride's Church, Fleet Street; author A Time to Live: the case against euthanasia and assisted suicide

Professor Ben Quash
professor of Christianity and the arts, King's College London; consultant, BBC's 'Religion and Ethics'

Padraig Reidy
news editor, Index on Censorship; regular contributor, Guardian's Comment is Free

Chair:
Dr Shirley Dent
communications specialist (currently working with the British Veterinary Association media team); editor, tlfw.co.uk; author, Radical Blake


Produced by
Dr Shirley Dent communications specialist (currently working with the British Veterinary Association media team); editor, tlfw.co.uk; author, Radical Blake
Recommended readings
Pope condemns Bible 'vandalism' exhibition

The Pope has condemned as

Aislinn Simpson, Telegraph, 28 July 2009

Holy Inspiration: Religion and Spirituality in Modern Art

Religious art is spiritual, but spiritual art is a much broader and less-defined concept.

Eline van der Vlist, Art Info, 1 April 2009

Censorship is alive and well

From bookshops to art galleries, free expression is being stymied by the aggressive tactics of a Christian campaign group

Terry Sanderson, Guardian commentisfree, 20 November 2008

The censor's dark materials

Censorship is a terrible thing. So thank goodness it never works

Philip Pullman, Guardian, 29 September 2008

Vatican looks to modern artists for divine inspiration

The Holy See is seeking fresh talent. Could Damien Hirst be the new Michelangelo?

Andrew Johnson, Independent, 8 June 2008

Session partners





Battle of Ideas 2009 | session: Age of Autism: rethinking 'normal'
Age of Autism: rethinking 'normal'

Monday 12 October, 7.00pm until 8.30pm, Foyles Charing Cross Road

Venue: Foyles Charing Cross Road, 113-119 Charing Cross Road, London, WC2 0EB

Tickets: £7.50 (£5 concessions) per person. Tickets are available from the Academy of Ideas website.


From being a developmental disability little heard of outside of medical circles and families directly affected by the condition twenty years ago, the idea of autism has become part of everyday culture and speech. From the figure of the autistic savant promoted in films such as Rain Man to George Osborne’s ‘autistic’ jibe aimed at Gordon Brown in 2006, autism has become shorthand for social phenomena of all sorts. For anti-MMR campaigners, autism is a consequence of the toxicity of modern medicine and modern life; self-help groups such as Aspies for Freedom make autism a matter of identity politics, arguing for a positive identity, and for people to ‘self-identify’ as autistic. Indeed, the autistic spectrum seems to be ever-widening, with a 2009 report arguing that it is wrong to see autism as a ‘distinct illness’ and that autistic traits are far more common in children than recognised.

Are we suffering from an epidemic of autism? Or are we living through what has been termed the ‘Age of Autism’, where a developmental condition has taken on a far wider definition and meaning in society? Has increased debate and discussion about autism helped or hindered those suffering from the condition and their families? And what does our fascination with autism say about us as a society?

Speakers
Professor Richard E Ashcroft
professor of bioethics, Queen Mary University of London

Dr Michael Fitzpatrick
writer on medicine and politics; author, The Tyranny of Health

Dr Elisabeth Hill
senior lecturer, Goldsmiths College, University of London; co-editor, Autism: mind and brain

Professor Stuart Murray
professor, contemporary literatures and film, University of Leeds; author, Representing Autism: culture, narrative, fascination

Sandy Starr
communications officer, Progress Educational Trust; webmaster, BioNews

Chair:
Dr Shirley Dent
communications specialist (currently working with the British Veterinary Association media team); editor, tlfw.co.uk; author, Radical Blake


Produced by
Dr Shirley Dent communications specialist (currently working with the British Veterinary Association media team); editor, tlfw.co.uk; author, Radical Blake
Recommended readings
Making autism ‘normal’ won’t help my son

It may reduce the stigma but it trivialises the learning difficulties and isolation sufferers endure.

Michael Fitzpatrick, The Times, 12 October 2009

Genetics and autism: Untangling the debate

In recent years, we have come to understand more about the genetics of ASD. Although we are at a very early stage of understanding the biology of ASD, genetic research promises much.

Richard Ashcroft, BioNews, 22 September 2009

From autism to Asperger's: disentangling the genetics and sociology of the autistic spectrum

The early narrow definition of autism emerged out of the psychiatry of the pre-war years and became widely accepted in the post-war decades. While research revealed a substantial genetic contribution to autism, in the late twentieth century there was an upsurge in the diagnosis of autism, particularly among 'higher functioning' individuals, and the concept of the 'autistic spectrum' became established.

Michael Fitzpatrick, BioNews, 22 September 2009

Are we all autistic now?

Lumping Mozart and Einstein in with those who have severe socialisation problems is no help to sufferers or science.

Sandy Starr, spiked, 15 September 2009

How Gary McKinnon became a cause celebre

British computer hacker Gary McKinnon's fight against extradition to the US has drawn support from a large and diverse range of influential people. How did his case become such a cause celebre?

Caroline McClatchey, BBC News, 4 August 2009

One in every 64 children could have autism, Cambridge researchers find

Hundreds of thousands of children with autism have not been diagnosed, Cambridge University scientists have found.

Rebecca Smith, Telegraph, 30 May 2009

Erasing Autism

Scientists are closing in on the genes linked to autism. So why is Ari Ne'eman so worried?

Claudia Kalb, Newsweek, 17 May 2009

I don't want to be 'cured' of autism, thanks

Discussion of prenatal testing hasn't included the people it plans to eliminate: society disables us more than autism ever could.

Anya Ustaszewski, Guardian Comment is Free, 15 January 2009

‘Crusade against autism’: doing more harm than good

The author of the new book Defeating Autism: A Damaging Delusion asks why autism has sidelined even Joe the Plumber in the US election.

Michael Fitzpatrick, spiked, 30 October 2008

Defeating Autism: A Damaging Delusion

Biomedical theories of autism can offer a plausible explanation of the supposed ‘autism epidemic’ and are increasingly accepted by parents and activists but do they work and are they safe?

Michael Fitzpatrick, Routledge, 20 October 2008

Representing Autism

From concerns of an 'autism epidemic' to the MMR vaccine crisis, autism is a source of peculiar fascination in the contemporary media. Discussion of the condition has been largely framed within medicine, psychiatry and education but there has been no exploration of its power within representative narrative forms.

Stuart Murray, Liverpool University Press, 30 May 2008

Autism: Mind and Brain

Autism is a neurodevelopmental disorder that allows a unique window on the relationship between mind and brain. The study of autism provides insight into the brain basis of the complex social interactions typical of human beings, since a profound impairment in social interactions is the hallmark of autistic disorders.

Uta Frith & Elisabeth Hill (eds.), Oxford University Press, 15 January 2004


Session partners





Battle of Ideas 2009 | session: Don and dusted: is the age of the scholar over?
Don and dusted: is the age of the scholar over?

Wednesday 7 October, 7.00pm until 8.30pm, British Library, London

Venue: Conference Centre, British Library, St Pancras, 96 Euston Road, London, NW1 2DB

Tickets: £7.50 (£5 concessions) per person. Tickets are available from the Academy of Ideas website.


‘The scholar is that man who must take up into himself all the ability of the time, all the contributions of the past, all the hopes of the future. He must be an university of knowledges.’
Ralph Waldo Emerson, ‘The American Scholar’

What does scholarship mean today? The pursuit of knowledge for its own sake is often viewed as outmoded. A recent education minister infamously dismissed ‘the medieval concept of a community of scholars seeking truth’ as a ‘bit dodgy’. The scholar ensconced in a library, surrounded by dusty books, has given way to the a results-focused researcher, contributing to the economic and social well-being of the nation. This goes beyond the traditional two cultures divide: ‘curiosity-driven’ arts and humanities research and pure science are both belittled as self-indulgent, trumped by ‘impact’ projects. Some fear now universities are just part of Lord Peter Mandelson’s super-ministry, whose title contains neither the word education nor universities, every academic will be beholden to business. Already intellectual inquiry is justified in terms of outcomes and consequences. Scholars must prove themselves as social-includers, skills-brokers, community coherers and contributors to UK Plc, and demonstrate how their subjects make students employable.

But are these trends as philistine as critics imply? Perhaps it is mere romanticism to yearn for the days of bumbling boffins. The modern world faces urgent problems that cannot be resolved in musty archives. As the competition for public funding intensifies, surely publicly-funded scholars have an obligation to make their work relevant. And the fact that all political parties share an enthusiasm for evidence-based policy surely shows at last they value academics’ contribution to society.

Is evidence-based research in the humanities and social science inching out theoretical work? Is output-driven research in the sciences limiting experimentation and serendipitous discovery? Or will the ‘new’ targeted research mean less waste and more public support for academics’ work? Is scholarship still essential to ‘an university of knowledges’, where ideas about what it means to be human are developed and contested? What – if any – is the distinction between the old-fashioned scholar and the 21st century researcher? And how do scholars and researchers preserve the contributions of the past, inspire the hopes of the future and unearth new knowledge in the present?

The session will be introduced by Dr Joanna Newman, head, higher education, British Library.

Speakers
Professor Mary Beard
professor of classics, University of Cambridge; fellow, Newnham College; classics editor, The Times Literary Supplement; author, A Don's Life

Professor Colin Blakemore
professor of neuroscience at the universities of Oxford and Warwick; chair, Neuroscience Research Partnership, Singapore; chair, general advisory committee on science, Food Standards Agency

Professor Colin Lawson
director, Royal College of Music; period clarinettist; author, Mozart: Clarinet Concerto and Brahms: Clarinet Quintet

Professor Gloria Laycock
professor of crime science and director, UCL Jill Dando Institute of Security and Crime Science

David Sweeney
director, research, innovation and skills, Higher Education Funding Council for England (HEFCE)

Chair:
Claire Fox
director, Academy of Ideas; panellist, BBC Radio 4's Moral Maze; author, I Find That Offensive


Produced by
Dr Shirley Dent communications specialist (currently working with the British Veterinary Association media team); editor, tlfw.co.uk; author, Radical Blake
Claire Fox director, Academy of Ideas; panellist, BBC Radio 4's Moral Maze; author, I Find That Offensive
Recommended readings
Invest in curiosity. It leads to pots of gold

Research pays off – and that well-researched fact should be music to the ears of Treasury officials in these straitened times.

Colin Blakemore, The Times, 9 October 2009

Academy strikes back: the fight for 'useless' knowledge starts here

Scholars have too long acquiesced to policy agendas. They must reassert the value of scholarship for its own sake, argues Claire Fox.

Claire Fox, Times Higher Education, 1 October 2009

Get out and join the city life

US universities are part of the fabric of their communities. Robin Hambleton says UK institutions should emulate them

Robin Hambleton, Times Higher Education, 1 October 2009

Pointless studies are the key to evolution

The demise of the silly survey strikes at the heart of being civilised.

David Mitchell, Observer, 27 September 2009

Communiqué from an Absent Future

Like the society to which it has played the faithful servant, the university is bankrupt. This bankruptcy is not only financial. It is the index of a more fundamental insolvency, one both political and economic, which has been a long time in the making.

we want everything, 24 September 2009

The University’s Crisis of Purpose

The world economic crisis and the election of Barack Obama will change the future of higher education. Even as universities, both public and private, face unanticipated financial constraints, the president has called on them to assist in solving problems from health care delivery to climate change to economic recovery.

Drew Gilpin Faust, New York Times, 1 September 2009

Being a humble servant to business will be a disaster for everyone

By insisting our universities' sole role is to fire the economy, we have lost sight of their more civilising purpose

Thomas Docherty, Times Higher Education, 4 June 2009

Academic rigour can most certainly do the business

It is a myth to believe that, in higher education, business-facing activity and academic rigour are mutually exclusive.

Gill Nicholls, Guardian, 26 May 2009

The modern university: you get what you pay for

It is the marketisation of higher education, its transformation into a glorified job-training scheme, that sustains the case for tuition fees.

Tim Black, spiked, 18 March 2009

Killing Thinking: The Death of the Universities

'Increasingly students are being asked to pay for the costs of the regulation of higher education rather than education itself. Access to Higher Education has become more widely available: the implications of that change are the concern of this book.'

Mary Evans, Continuum, 22 September 2005

Mary Beard & Tom Holland on East, West & Antiquity

youtube.com

Session partners